JP2017080470A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of favorably enhancing a degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: An upper bulging part 28 that bulges frontward of a pachinko machine is provided on a front door frame of the pachinko machine, and an operation switch unit 800 having a button member 810 operated by a player is arranged in the upper bulging part 28. By operating the button member 810, a predetermined performance is executed on a display screen or the like of a pattern display device. A light emission unit 850 is built in the operation switch unit 800, and the light emission unit 850 is arranged at a position in a further depth side than an operation face part 811 of the button member 810 in a depressing operation direction. The light emission unit 850 is held in a state of being capable of displacing to a side of being closed to the operation face part 811 and a side of being located away from the operation face part 811. By displacing the light emission unit 850 by a variable mechanism such as a solenoid 880 or the like provided in the operation switch unit 800, a distance between the light emission unit 850 and the operation face part 811 is changed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 43

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is known which includes an operation means operated by a player. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, an operation means is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and a special effect is generated according to the player's operation in order to make the player expect a special gaming state or the like that is advantageous to the player. Is performed on a screen display or the like. In a gaming machine that employs operation means as described above, how to increase the player's attention to the game using the operation means is an important issue.

JP 2008-29764 A

  Here, there is a concern that simply performing a special effect according to the operation of the operation means will make the operation monotonous and the freshness will fade, and the interest in the operation itself will be likely to decrease. That is, even if the player is prompted to perform an operation, it is assumed that the operation is performed halfway and it is difficult to perform the function of improving the degree of attention to the game by the operation means. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in using the operation means to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
An operation unit having an operation unit that is displaced from a predetermined position in an operation direction by a player's operation, an urging unit that displaces the operation unit in a direction opposite to the operation direction, and a movable unit that is displaceable in the same direction as the operation unit. When,
A signal output means for outputting an operation signal when the operation unit is operated and displaced to a detection position;
Effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect based on an operation signal from the signal output means;
Displacement means for deforming the operation means so that it is recognized that the appearance of the operation means is changed according to the game situation as seen from the front side of the gaming machine by displacing the movable part,
The operation means includes the operation unit that is being deformed from the pre-deformation state to the deformation completion state and the return from the deformation completion state to the pre-deformation state when the movable unit is displaced in the operation direction. The detection position of the operation unit is either during the deformation from the pre-deformation state to the deformation completion state or the return from the deformation completion state to the pre-deformation state by the deformation means. It is characterized by permitting displacement to.

  The degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a perspective view which shows the back surface structure of a game board. It is a front view which shows the structure of a back pack unit. (A) The top view which shows an operation switch unit, (b) It is the AA partial fragmentary sectional view of Fig.10 (a). (A) The figure which shows the operation switch unit in a normal state, (b) The figure which shows the operation switch unit in an extended state. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for operation area expansion effects. It is a time chart for demonstrating the relationship between the operation area expansion production | presentation displayed on a symbol display apparatus, and operation of an operation switch unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an effect corresponding to continuous operation. It is a time chart for demonstrating the relationship between the continuous operation corresponding | compatible effect displayed on a symbol display apparatus, and operation of an operation switch unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment from diagonally forward. (A) The top view which expands and shows an upper plate unit, (b) It is the BB partial sectional view of Fig.22 (a). (A) The CC sectional view taken on the line of Drawing 22 (a), (b) The DD line sectional view of Drawing 22 (b). It is the schematic which shows the mode of operation at the time of continuous operation corresponding | compatible production execution. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 1st continuous operation corresponding | compatible effects. (A) is a schematic plan view of the operation switch unit according to the third embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the operation switch unit, and (c) is the relationship between the number of operations, the operation area AE, and the operation stroke. It is a graph which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a table for selecting the number of specified operations, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display time and the production mode, and (c) is an expectation of the jackpot result suggested by the specified number of operations and the production. It is the schematic which shows the relationship with a degree. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuous expansion effects performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special setting process for maximum regulation frequency. It is a time chart which shows the display content in the symbol display apparatus in case a continuous expansion effect is performed, and the state change of an operation switch unit. It is a time chart which shows the display content in the symbol display apparatus in case a continuous expansion effect is performed, and the state change of an operation switch unit. (A) is a figure which shows the skip setting table for extended effects in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a graph which shows the relationship between the frequency | count of operation, an operation area | region, and an operation stroke. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for continuous expansion effects performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. (A) is the schematic which looked at the operation switch unit in 5th Embodiment from upper direction, (b) is the EE sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 35 (a). It is the schematic which shows the deformation | transformation aspect of an operation switch unit. It is a flowchart which shows the operation switch form change effect process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. (A) It is a flowchart which shows a form change process, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd single operation. (A) is the outline figure which shows the internal structure of the operation switch unit in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic which shows the electrical structure concerning an operation switch unit. (A) is the schematic which looked at the operation switch unit in 7th Embodiment from upper direction, (b) is the GG partial sectional view of Fig.40 (a). It is the schematic which shows the deformation | transformation aspect of the operation switch unit at the time of performing the operation corresponding | compatible effect using an operation switch unit. It is a flowchart which shows the operation switch form change effect process in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the internal structure of the operation switch unit in 9th Embodiment. It is the schematic which looked at the light emission unit from the front side. It is the schematic which shows operation | movement of an operation switch unit. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for operation suggestion. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special operation corresponding | compatible effects. It is a flowchart which shows the process for light emission effect start. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation corresponding | compatible effect concerning 3rd display mode. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation corresponding | compatible effect concerning 2nd display mode. It is the schematic which shows the internal structure of the operation switch unit in 10th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic which shows a protrusion side stopper mechanism, (b) is the schematic which shows a press side stopper mechanism. It is the schematic which shows operation | movement of an operation switch unit. It is a flowchart which shows the operation switch unit drive effect process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a time chart which shows the flow of operation corresponding production.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are exploded perspective views showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 3, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

  The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the island facility of the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island facility of the game arcade.

  The game machine main part 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in an openable and closable state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to a connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and the lower frame portion and the left frame in the outer frame 11 are further fixed. The lower support metal fitting 18 is fixed to a connecting portion with the portion. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism. The support mechanism causes the gaming machine main unit 12 to turn the left side of the pachinko machine 10 in the front view with respect to the outer frame 11. In addition, the right side can be turned forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the turning tip side.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main part 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. And a unit 15 (see FIG. 4). The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably attached to an end of the inner frame 13 on the rotation base end side, and the front door frame 14 rotates on the right side with the left side as the rotation base end side in a front view. It can be turned forward as the tip side. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to an end of the inner frame 13 on the rotation base end side, and the back pack unit 15 rotates on the left side when viewed from the front. The moving base end side is set to the right and the right side is set to the rotating tip end side so that it can be rotated rearward.

  Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 13. ing. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 (see FIG. 1) is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire gaming area PE described later can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. 21 is covered from the back side of the front door frame 14 by the glass unit 30.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a glass unit installation portion 22 is formed on the frame 20 so as to surround the window portion 21. Specifically, the glass unit installation portion 22 is disposed on the back side of the frame body 20 and is recessed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the window portion 21 is disposed at the bottom thereof. The glass unit 30 is fitted in the glass unit installation portion 22 so that the displacement in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction is restricted.

  The glass unit 30 includes glass panels 31 and 32 having transparency, and a glass holder 33 that holds the glass panels 31 and 32. The glass holder 33 has an annular frame portion formed along the window portion 21, and the glass panels 31 and 32 are accommodated in a region surrounded by the frame portion.

  Referring back to FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 21. For example, an annular illumination part 24 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window part 21. In the annular illumination unit 24, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. More specifically, a top lamp portion 25 provided with a function of turning on at a predetermined error is provided at the center of the annular illumination portion 24 and at the uppermost portion of the pachinko machine 10, and prizes are provided on the left and right sides of the window portion 21. A side lamp portion 26 to which a function of lighting during ball payout is given is provided. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the top lamp unit 25, speaker units 27 for outputting sound effects corresponding to the gaming state are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 28 and a lower bulging portion 29 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. The upper bulging portion 28 is provided with an upper pan 28 a that opens upward, and the lower bulging portion 29 is provided with a lower pan 29 a that also opens upward. The upper plate 28a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding the game balls to a game ball launching mechanism, which will be described later, while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 29a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 28a.

  An operation switch unit 40 that is manually operated by the players is provided in a portion of the upper bulging portion 28 that is in front of the upper plate 28a (game ball storage area). The operation switch unit 40 is an operation device for a player to give a predetermined instruction during the progress of the game for the purpose of giving a predetermined effect on a display screen of a symbol display device, which will be described later. A specific configuration of the operation switch unit 40 and a predetermined effect based on the operation will be described in detail later.

  A game ball launching handle 45 is provided at a position side by side with the lower bulging portion 29 so as to protrude to the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 45, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch mechanism described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 50 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 50 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 28a and a front door side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 29a. A receiving portion 53 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at the upper corner of the passage forming unit 50, and the receiving portion 53 is divided into left and right by a partition wall 54, so that the front door side upper dish passage is formed. An entrance portion and an entrance portion of the front door side lower dish passage are formed. The upstream side of the front door side upper dish passage and the front door side lower dish path are connected to a game ball distributing section which will be described later. The game balls that have entered the dish passage are guided to the lower dish 29a.

  Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. In FIG. 5, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted as in FIG. 3.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 60 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. Support metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5) on the front surface of the resin base 60. Further, bearing brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 2) on the back surface of the front door frame 14 so as to correspond to the support brackets 71 and 72. Shafts are formed on the support fittings 71, 72, and these shafts are inserted into the bearing holes of the bearing fittings 57, 58 of the front door frame 14 so that the front door frame 14 rotates relative to the inner frame 13. It is supported movably. That is, the support fittings 71 and 72 and the bearing fittings 57 and 58 constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

  A locking device 75 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The locking device 75 has a plurality of front door flange members 76 extending toward the front door frame 14. Corresponding to these front door collar members 76, a plurality of collar receiving members 59 extending toward the inner frame 13 are provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 (see FIG. 3). When the front door brim member 76 is caught by the hook receiving member 59, the front door frame 14 is locked in a closed state. As shown in FIG. 4, the locking device 75 includes an inner frame collar member 77 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 77 are hooked on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11, so that the gaming machine main part 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

  A cylinder lock 78 for performing an unlocking operation of the locking device 75 is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 60. The cylinder lock 78 is integrated with the locking device 75, and the tip portion (key hole portion) is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the hole provided in the front door frame 14. Turning the key inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 78 to the right releases the locking of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13, and turning the key to the left releases the locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11. .

  A game board housing portion 61 for housing the game board 80 is formed at a substantially central portion on the front surface of the resin base 60. The game board accommodating portion 61 is recessed behind the pachinko machine 10 to define an accommodation space for accommodating the game board 80, and the game board 80 attached to the resin base 60 is fitted in the accommodation space. It has become.

  The game board 80 includes a wooden plywood and a sheet material that covers a front plate surface of the plywood, and the front surface of the game board 80 is exposed to the front side of the resin base 60 through an open portion of the game board housing portion 61. . In the exposed portion, that is, the front surface of the game board 80, a game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed. As already described, the game area PE is covered with the glass panels 31 and 32. The rear glass panel 32 is arranged so that the gap with the front surface of the game board 80 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is front and back at the same location in the game area PE. It is arranged not to line up. Thereby, the ball blockage in the game area PE is suppressed. Note that the game board 80 is not limited to wooden, and may be made of synthetic resin.

  Hereinafter, the game board 80 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board 80.

  The game board 80 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-rear direction) by performing router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 81, a variable winning device 82, operating ports 83a and 83b, a through gate 84, a variable display unit 85, and the like. When game balls enter the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operation ports 83a and 83b, the game balls are detected by a detection switch described later, and a predetermined number of award balls are paid out based on the detection result. The In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 80, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

  In addition, in the game board 80, a number of nails 87 are implanted in order to disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill are arranged. By various configurations such as the nail 87 and the windmill, the flow path of the game ball is differentiated and adjusted so that the winning to the above-described general winning opening 81 or the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

  The variable winning device 82 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win, and is switched to a predetermined open state in which a game ball is easy to win in the case of a big win. As a release mode of the variable winning device 82, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is regarded as one round, and the variable winning device 82 is opened by a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds). It is set to be repeated as the upper limit.

  The variable display unit 85 is disposed at the upper center of the game board 80, and the operation ports 83a and 83b are disposed below the variable display unit 85. More specifically, the operation ports 83a and 83b are arranged side by side with the operation port 83a on the upper side and the operation port 83b on the lower side. The lower working port 83b is provided with an electric accessory as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory is in a closed state (unsupported state or non-guided state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the operation port 83b, and an open state (supported state) in which the game ball can easily enter the closed state. Or a guide state), and when the lottery based on the winning to the through gate 84 is won, the main controller controls the open state. As the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory, the low frequency support mode set so that the winning frequency to the lower operation port 83b is lower than the upper operation port 83a, and the lower operation mode 83a than the upper operation port 83a. The high-frequency support mode is set so that the winning frequency for the operating port 83b is high, and it is low when a predetermined winning result is obtained by a lottery based on entering the operating ports 83a and 83b. The frequency support mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode.

  The variable display unit 85 and the operation ports 83a and 83b are portions that control game play, and the player's attention is likely to be gathered. By arranging the variable display unit 85 and the operation ports 83a and 83b side by side in the center of the gaming machine, the movement amount of the line of sight between the two is suppressed, which contributes to the reduction of the burden on the player's eyes.

  The variable display unit 85 includes a symbol display device 94 that variably displays symbols with a winning in the operation ports 83a and 83b as a trigger. The symbol display device 94 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display (display screen 94a), and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. Specifically, on the display screen 94a, symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled up and down. When a big hit occurs, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, and a transition is made to a special gaming state. The display mode on the display screen 94a may be changed as follows. That is, the symbols may be displayed variably by arranging them in the upper, middle, and lower rows and scrolling the symbols in the left-right direction.

  The variable display unit 85 includes a center frame 95 formed so as to surround the symbol display device 94. A first specific lamp unit 96 and a second specific lamp unit 97 are provided on the center frame 95. Reservation lamp portions 98 and 99 are provided at the upper and lower portions of the center frame 95, respectively. The lower holding lamp unit 98 corresponds to the symbol display device 94 and the first specific lamp unit 96, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the operation ports 83 a and 83 b is held up to four times and the holding lamp unit 98 The number of hold is displayed by lighting. The upper holding lamp unit 99 corresponds to the second specific lamp unit 97, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the holding lamp unit 99. It has become so.

  In addition, an operation frequency display portion 95a that suggests the number of operations when the operation switch unit 40 is operated is provided in a portion of the center frame 95 that is located on the side (left side) of the display screen 94a. The operation number display section 95a includes a light emitting board on which a plurality of light emitters (LEDs) are arranged and mounted in the vertical direction and a transparent cover that covers the light emitting board, and is electrically connected to a display control device described later. ing. The display content of the operation count display section 95a is controlled by the display control device such that the operation switch unit 40 is repeatedly turned on, so that the display is turned on sequentially from the lower light emitter.

  Referring again to FIG. 5, below the game board housing portion 61 (game board 80) in the resin base 60, a game ball that launches a game ball to the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 45. A firing mechanism 110 is provided. The game ball launching mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying a ball and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is attached to the resin base 60 via a reinforcing plate described later. ing.

  The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 80 side. A ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-described firing standby position is disposed at a position closer to the downstream end portion (that is, the lower end portion) of the firing rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

  The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source / launch control device described later. Based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply / launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction, so that the game ball placed at the launch standby position is on the game board 80 side, more specifically, the game. It is driven out toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 80.

  The guide rail 100 partitions the game area PE together with a game area partition member, which will be described later, so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 includes an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is defined by both the rails 101 and 102. Is formed. The guide passage 103 includes an inlet portion 104 that is opened to the tip side (obliquely downward) of the firing rail 112, and an outlet portion 105 that is located above the gaming area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → the guide rail 100 (the entrance portion 104 → the exit portion 105). In the game board 80, a reversal prevention member 106 for preventing the reversal of the game ball reaching the game area PE into the guide passage 103 is attached to the front side of the exit portion 105, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101. Thus, it is possible to prevent the subsequent launch of the game ball from being hindered by the game ball that has reached the game area PE first.

  The guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112 are arranged such that the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 face each other with a gap therebetween. A foul ball passage 55 (see FIG. 3) is disposed below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage 55 is integrally formed with the passage formation unit 50 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return as foul balls in the guide passage 103, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage 55 through the gap. It becomes. The foul ball passage 55 communicates with the lower door passage on the front door side, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 55 are discharged to the lower plate 29a shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

  In addition, the resin base 60 is provided with a plurality of lock devices that can be switched between a locked state in which the game board 80 cannot be removed from the game board housing portion 61 and an unlocked state in which the game board 80 is allowed to be removed. It has been. The locking device has an abutting portion that abuts against the front surface of the game board 80 in the locked state, and the abutting portion abuts against the front surface of the game board 80, thereby moving the game board 80 toward the front door frame 14 side. The displacement will be suppressed.

  A through hole that penetrates the resin base 60 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, the side that supports the front door frame 14) in the resin base 60, and covers the through hole. A passage forming member 121 is disposed. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 60 and has a main body side upper dish path 122 and a main body side lower dish path 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper dish passage 122 and the main body side lower dish passage 123 communicates with a game ball distributing section described later. A receiving portion 53 (see FIG. 3) of the passage forming unit 50 attached to the front door frame 14 enters below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side is below the main body side upper dish passage 122. An upper plate passage is arranged, and a front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

  In the resin base 60, a shutter 124 that restricts the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper dish path 122 and the main body side lower dish path 123 is provided below the passage forming member 121. The shutter 124 is supported by the resin base 60 in a state where the shutter 124 can be switched between a blocking position where the outlet portions of both passages are narrowed to prevent the gaming ball from flowing out and an allowable position where the gaming ball is allowed to flow out. Further, a biasing member that biases the shutter 124 toward the blocking position is attached to the resin base 60. When the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the shutter is driven by the biasing force of the biasing member. 124 is configured to remain in the blocking position. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened in a state where the game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage 122 or the main body side lower tray passage 123, the disadvantage that the stored balls spill out is avoided. . In contrast, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the shutter 124 is pushed back to the allowable position against the urging force by the receiving portion 53 provided in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage communicate with the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage, respectively, and the movement of the game ball is allowed.

  Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (the resin base 60 and the game board 80) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

  A bearing fitting 132 is attached to the rotation base end side (the right side in FIG. 7) of the back surface of the resin base 60. A bearing portion 133 is formed on the bearing bracket 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. A plurality of fixing levers 134 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame 13 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 60.

  As already described, a central opening 64 that penetrates in the thickness direction of the resin base 60 and opens to the back side of the resin base 60 is formed at the bottom portion of the game board housing 61 in the resin base 60. The central opening 64 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board 80 housed in the game board housing part 61. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back of the game board 80, and these various components are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the central opening 64. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 80 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the game board 80 as seen from the rear.

  A synthetic resin pedestal member 141 on which the variable display unit 85 (see FIG. 6) is mounted on the game board 80 is fixed to the back of the game board 80. The pedestal member 141 has a substantially box shape opened to the game board 80 side, and covers almost the entire rear surface of the game board 80. A part of the pedestal member 141 protrudes to the back side of the resin base 60 through the central opening 64 of the resin base 60. The symbol display device 94 (see FIG. 6) described above with respect to the protruding portion and the symbol display thereof. A display control device for driving the device 94 is attached. The symbol display device 94 and the display control device are arranged so that the symbol display device is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the resin base 60). Furthermore, the game board 80 is equipped with an audio lamp control device unit 142 so as to be positioned behind the display control device. The sound lamp control device unit 142 includes a sound lamp control device 143 and a mounting table 144, and the sound lamp control device 143 is mounted on the mounting table 144.

  The sound lamp control device 143 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound, lamp display, and display control device in accordance with instructions from a main control device to be described later, and the sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 145.

  A main controller unit 160 is provided below the sound lamp controller unit 142 so as to cover the base member 141 from behind. The main controller unit 160 includes a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the back of the game board 80 and a main control unit 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main controller 162 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 163 made of, for example.

  The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be unsealed by a box sealing portion 164 as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided on the short side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used for sealing processing.

  Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened. However, by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that forms the box sealing portion 164, the box sealing portion 164 can be applied. The base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed. Even after opening, the sealing process can be performed again. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole portion among the plurality of box sealing portions 164. When the substrate box 163 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, a connecting portion between the box sealing portion into which the locking pin is inserted and the substrate box 163 main body. Disconnect. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the substrate box 163 are separated, and the internal main control substrate can be taken out. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If the history of opening the substrate box 163 is left in the substrate box 163, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 163.

  The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected by a base seal part 165 so that they cannot be opened. Specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has a locking hole portion and a locking pin similarly to the box sealing portion 164, and the locking pin is inserted into the locking hole portion so that the board box 163 and The mounting base 161 is coupled so as not to be separable. This makes it easier to grasp the fact that the substrate box 163 has been illegally removed.

  The portion of the pedestal member 141 that faces the back of the game board 80 corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning port 81, variable winning device 82, upper operating port 83a, and lower operating port 83b, and on the downstream side. A collection passage that collects in one place is formed. Thereby, all the game balls won in the general winning opening 81 and the like are gathered below the game board 80 through the collection passage. That is, the pedestal member 141 is provided with a function of collecting game balls won in various winning openings.

  A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board 80, and the game balls gathered below the game board 80 by the collection passage are led out into the discharge passage. Similarly, the out port 86 leads to the discharge passage, and a game ball that has not won any winning port is led out into the discharge passage through the out port 86.

  Further, in the collection passage, a winning port switch for detecting a game ball won in the general winning port 81 on the front side of the game board 80, a count switch for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning device 82, and an operation port 83a, An operating port switch for detecting a game ball entering 83b is mounted, and a winning detection mechanism is constituted by these various switches. Furthermore, gate switches for detecting game balls passing through the through gate 84 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 85 in the base member 141. These various switches are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and the detection information by each switch is output to the main control device 162.

  Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by the back pack unit 15. As shown in FIG. 9, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

  The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and includes a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 85.

  The base part 211 is provided with an external terminal board (not shown) at the upper right part thereof. Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal plate, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. Further, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latch pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the latch pins 214 are inserted through the bearing portions 133 provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions 215 through which the fixing levers 134 provided in the inner frame 13 are inserted, and the base portion 211 is rearward of the base portion 211 in a state where the fixing levers 134 are inserted through the insertion portions 215. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contact with the inner frame 13.

  In the base portion 211, a payout mechanism portion 202 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and that opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. The A tank rail 222 that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the lower side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

  The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to any one of the upper plate 28a, the lower plate 29a, and a discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper plate 28a through the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower plate 29a through the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage. Has been.

  At the lower end portion of the base portion 211, the discharge passage board and the control device collective unit 204 are attached so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction. In the discharge passage board, a discharge passage opened rearward is formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and an open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game ball led to the discharge passage from the recovery passage described above passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Discharged.

  The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, and a payout control device 242 and a power supply / launch control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply / launch control device 243 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is accommodated in the board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam is eliminated.

  The power source / launch control device 243 includes a power source / launch control board housed in the board box 246, and a predetermined power source required for various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board. Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 45 is performed. Further, the power source / launch control device 243 is provided with a power switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched to the on state (on state) or the shut off state (off state).

  Here, this pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing various data, and even if a power failure occurs, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure. It can be done. For example, when the power supply is shut down by a normal procedure as in the case of a game hall being closed, the state before the shutdown is stored and held. The main controller 162 is provided with a RAM erase switch 166. When power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166, the RAM data is initialized.

(Operation switch unit 40)
Next, the operation switch unit 40 provided on the front door frame 14 and the configuration related thereto will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a plan view of the upper bulging portion 28 showing the operation switch unit 40 and its peripheral portion in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 10B is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), in the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14, the unit accommodating the operation switch unit 40 is located in the front side of the upper plate 28a (game ball storage area). A portion 28b is formed. The unit accommodating portion 28b has a concave shape opened upward, and a part of the operation switch unit 40 is exposed upward through the opened portion.

  The operation switch unit 40 includes a housing 310 whose outer shape is formed in accordance with the inner shape of the unit accommodating portion 28b. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the housing 310 is formed smaller than the outer cylindrical portion 311 and the outer cylindrical portion 311 that constitutes the outline of the housing 310 and contacts the peripheral wall portion of the unit accommodating portion 28b. The inner cylindrical portion 311 facing the outer cylindrical portion 311 from the inside of the housing 310, and the top plate portion 313 constituting the outline of the housing 310 together with the outer cylindrical portion 311 by connecting both the cylindrical portions 311 and 312. The claw portion (not shown) formed on the outer cylindrical portion 311 is hooked on the receiving portion (not shown) formed on the unit housing portion 28b, so that removal from the unit housing portion 28b is restricted. Has been.

  The top plate portion 313 covers a part of the open portion of the unit accommodating portion 28b, and a central opening 314 is formed in the central portion so as to communicate with a region surrounded by the inner cylindrical portion 312. The inner cylindrical portion 312 accommodates a push button member 320 as an operation portion (press operation portion), and a part of the push button member 320 is exposed upward through the central opening 314. Thereby, access to the push button member 320 is permitted.

  In the present embodiment, a shutter mechanism that forms a window opening OP as an access path to the push button member 320 is employed. By operating this shutter mechanism, the size of the window opening OP is changed.

  Specifically, on the left and right sides of the central opening 314 in the housing 310, shutter members 330 that are movable to a closed position that covers a part of the central opening 314 and an open position that does not cover the central opening 314 are provided. . The shutter member 330 has a flat plate shape parallel to the top plate portion 313, and the top plate portion 313 is formed with a horizontally long slit 315 that can accommodate the shutter member 330. The slits 315 are opened to the sides facing each other (the side of the central opening 314), and the shutter member 330 can be slidably moved toward and away from each other through the opened portion.

  In other words, the operation switch unit 40 is configured such that the portion exposed to the player side (the push button member 320 and the shutter member 330) can be deformed, and the exposed portion is deformed, It is possible for the player to grasp that the operation switch unit 40 is deformed visually or tactilely.

  The housing 310 is provided with a shutter spring member 335 as urging means for urging the shutter member 330 toward the closed position, and each shutter member 330 is moved toward the closed position by the shutter spring member 335. It is always energized. The top plate portion 313 is formed with stopper portions 316 that restrict further movement toward the central opening 314 side by contacting the shutter member 330 from the front side in the biasing direction. In the state where the shutter member 330 is in contact with the end, the ends of the shutter member 330 on the side of the central opening 314 are in contact with each other at the center of the central opening 314 (see FIG. 10A). Thus, the position where the stopper member 316 is in contact (that is, the closed position) is the initial position of the shutter member 330.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, a semicircular cutout 331 is provided at the end of the shutter member 330 on the side where it faces relative to each other. In a state where each shutter member 330 is disposed at the closed position, a circular window opening OP straddling both shutter members 330 is formed by the notch portions 331. In other words, in a state where both shutter members 330 are waiting at the closed position, access to a part of the push button member 320 is permitted through the window opening OP. In other words, the part that can be operated in the push button member 320 is limited by the shutter member 330.

  In addition, the housing 310 is provided with a solenoid 340 as a driving unit that moves the shutter member 330 to the open position, and a gear 345 as a driving force transmission unit that transmits the generated driving force to the shutter member 330. The solenoid 340 is electrically connected to the display control device 410, and is configured to switch from the non-excitation state to the excitation state based on a drive signal from the display control device 410. When the solenoid 340 is in an excited state, the shutter member 330 moves to the open position against the biasing force of the shutter spring member 335. The shutter member 330, solenoid 340, and gear 345 constitute a shutter mechanism (variable actual opening forming means).

  When the shutter member 330 moves from the closed position to the open position, the window opening OP is expanded, and the ratio of the operable area (accessible area) in the shutter member 330 increases. Further, in the present embodiment, the push button member 320 is movably provided, and the position of the push button member 320 changes in accordance with the movement of the shutter member 330. Hereinafter, the configuration of the push button member 320 will be described, and then the relationship between the push button member 320 and the shutter member 330 will be supplementarily described.

  The push button member 320 is allowed to move in the same direction (vertical direction) as the central axis CL of the inner cylindrical portion 312 and is restricted from moving in a direction intersecting the central axis CL. Specifically, the push button member 320 has a cylindrical body portion 321 extending in the same direction as the central axis direction of the inner cylindrical portion 312, and the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 321 is the inner cylindrical portion 312. The movement in the direction intersecting with the central axis CL is restricted by abutting against the inner peripheral surface.

  An operation surface portion 322 as an operation target by the player is integrally formed at an end portion (upper end portion) on the central opening 314 side in the body portion 321. The operation surface portion 322 has a curved surface that is convex upward, and suppresses a local load on the finger or the like during operation.

  The push button member 320 is formed of a transparent or translucent synthetic resin material, and a light diffusing plate is fixed to the back side thereof. It is good also as a structure which provides a body and radiates | emits light through the operation surface part 322 of the pushbutton member 320. FIG. In this case, the decorativeness of the push button member 320 is improved. In addition, by performing light emission control, characters and symbols that prompt the player to perform a push operation such as “PUSH”, “push!”, “CHANCE”, and the like are displayed on the operation surface unit 322 at a predetermined timing. Also good.

  The body portion 321 incorporates a button spring member 325 as a biasing unit that biases the push button member 320 toward the side protruding from the central opening 314. When the shutter member 330 stands by at the closed position, the shutter member 330 abuts against the operation surface portion 322 from the front side in the urging direction, and further protrusion of the push button member 320 is restricted.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the top of the operation surface portion 322 is exposed from the window opening OP, and the end portion (for example, the notch portion 331) of the shutter member 330 faces obliquely upward in the operation surface portion 322. It is in contact with the part. Therefore, the biasing force of the button spring member 325 is transmitted to the shutter member 330 through the push button member 320, and the shutter member 330 is pushed not only upward but also toward the open position. However, since the urging force of the shutter spring member 335 is set larger than the urging force of the button spring member 325, the shutter member 330 pushed by the push button member 320 is prevented from moving back to the open position. . For this reason, in a state where the shutter member 330 functions as a stopper, the shutter member 330 pushed by the push button member 320 does not move and remains in the closed position. Note that a part of the urging force of the button spring member 325 is distributed to the top plate portion 313, and furthermore, the urging force is distributed by employing a plurality of shutter members 330, so that the stopper function of the shutter member 330 is suitable. Is secured.

  When the shutter member 330 moves to the open position, the shutter member 330 is removed from the movement path of the push button member 320, so that the function of the shutter member 330 as a stopper becomes invalid. Note that the shutter member 330 can also be referred to as a “movable stopper” in view of the fact that the push button member 320 can be switched by the shutter member 330.

  The housing 310 employs another stopper (fixed stopper) that restricts the movement of the push button member 320 in place of the shutter member 330 when the shutter member 330 is disposed at the open position. Specifically, a flange portion 323 that protrudes in the radial direction of the central axis CL is formed at the end of the body portion 321 opposite to the central opening 314 side. The housing 310 has a shutter with respect to the flange portion 323. A first abutting portion 317 that can abut from the front side (upper side) in the urging direction by the spring member 335 is formed. In a state where the movement of the push button member 320 is regulated by the shutter member 330, the first contact portion 317 and the flange portion 323 are opposed to each other with a gap therebetween, but the shutter member 330 is moved to the open position. When the push button member 320 further protrudes, the flange portion 323 comes into contact with the first contact portion 317, and further protrusion is avoided. That is, the first contact portion 317 functions as a stopper instead of the shutter member 330.

  Further, the housing 310 is provided with a second abutting portion 318 that can abut against the flange portion 233 of the push button member 320 from the side opposite to the central opening 314 side (downward), and the flange portion 233 is a second abutting portion. Further contact with the portion 318 prevents further backward movement. That is, the movement range of the push button member 320 is defined as follows by the both contact portions 317 and 318. That is, the push button member 320 moves between both positions of the maximum protruding position where movement is restricted by the first abutting portion 317 and the maximum pushing position where movement is restricted by the second abutting portion 318. Is allowed. In a state where the movement is restricted by the shutter member 330, the apparatus waits at an intermediate position between the maximum protruding position and the maximum pushing position. The state in contact with the shutter member 330 arranged in the closed position in this way is the normal state of the operation switch unit 40. Note that the button spring member 325 is configured to ensure the urging function regardless of the position of the push button member 320 in the moving range.

(Operation of operation switch unit 40)
In the present embodiment, a region exposed upward in the operation surface portion 322 of the push button member 320, that is, a region that can be operated by direct contact (hereinafter referred to as an operation region AE) is changed according to the game situation. This is one of the features. Accordingly, the operation of the operation switch unit 40 when changing the operation area AE will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the operation switch unit 40. When the operation area AE is expanded, the operation switch unit 40 is switched from the state shown in FIG. 11A to the state shown in FIG. 11B. When the operation area is reduced, the operation switch unit 40 is changed to the state shown in FIG. The state of b) is switched to the state of FIG.

  First, a case where the operation area AE is expanded will be described. When the solenoid 340 is not excited, that is, when the drive signal is not output from the display control device 410, the shutter member 330 is in a standby state by the urging force of the shutter spring member 335 ( (See FIG. 11 (a)). In such a state, the operation surface portion 322 of the push button member 320 abuts against the shutter member 330 from the lower side, so that further protrusion of the push button member 320 is suppressed.

  When the solenoid 340 is excited, the shutter member 330 moves to the open position against the urging force of the shutter spring member 335, as shown in FIGS. Thereby, the ratio which the part exposed upwards in the operation surface part 322 occupies becomes large. The push button member 320 is not in contact with the first contact portion 317, and there is room for movement to the protruding side. Therefore, the button spring member 325 is moved toward the maximum projecting position in accordance with the movement of the shutter member 330 by the urging force of the button spring member 325. Thereby, the protrusion amount from the center opening 314 increases, and the access to the operation surface part 322 is facilitated. Further, the operation stroke of the push button member 320 is increased.

  Next, a case where the operation area AE is reduced (when returning to the normal state) will be described. When the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 340 stops, the solenoid 340 enters a non-excited state, and the shutter member 330 is closed by the biasing force of the shutter spring member 335 as shown in FIG. Move to. At this time, the shutter member 330 pushes the operation surface portion 322 to the side opposite to the urging direction of the button spring member 325. The force for pushing the operation surface portion 322 in the direction opposite to the urging direction is set to be larger than the urging force of the button spring member 325, so that the push button member 320 moves backward against the urging force of the button spring member 325. To do. Thereby, the operation area AE is reduced and the operation stroke of the push button member 320 is reduced.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described based on the block diagram of FIG. In FIG. 12, a power supply line is indicated by a double line arrow, and a signal line is indicated by a solid line arrow.

  An MPU 402 is mounted on a main control board 401 provided in the main controller 162. The MPU 402 includes a ROM 403 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 402 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 403 is executed. A RAM 404 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated.

  The MPU 402 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the MPU 402 are a power failure monitoring board 405 provided in the main controller 162, a payout controller 242 and other switches not shown. In this case, the power failure monitoring board 405 is connected to the power supply / emission control device 243, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power failure monitoring board 405. Further, as a part of the switch group, a plurality of detection sensors provided in various ball entering portions such as the operation ports 83a and 83b and the variable winning device 82 are connected, and the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 enters the ball entering portion. Entry determination is performed. Further, the MPU 402 executes a big hit occurrence lottery based on the entrance to the operation ports 83a and 83b in the entrance portion.

  Here, an electrical configuration for performing a big hit occurrence lottery or the like in the MPU 402 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 402 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting the emission color of the first specific lamp unit 96, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 94, and so on. The jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery of occurrence, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot state or the normal jackpot state, and the reach lottery when the symbol display device 94 changes and changes Reach random number counter C3, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, first variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection of symbol display device 94, and first specific ramp unit 96 The period for switching the color displayed on the symbol and the symbol variable display time on the symbol display device 94 are determined. A second change type counter CS2 which has been decided to use the off-symbol counter C4 is used to set the combination of off-design.

  Among these, the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS1, and CS2 are loop counters that each add 1 to the previous value and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, the out symbol counter C4 is configured such that the register value is added using the R register (refresh register) in the MPU 402, and as a result, the numerical value changes randomly. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 404. The RAM 404 is provided with a holding ball storage buffer including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a game to the operation ports 83a and 83b is provided. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in time series in accordance with the ball entry history.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 676, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 676), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the big hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 676). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage buffer of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation ports 83a and 83b. That is, the pachinko machine 10 (specifically, the MPU 402) includes a jackpot occurrence lottery means for lottering whether or not a big hit state has occurred based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery start condition.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 49, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 49) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2 determines whether the probability variation state (high probability state) or the normal state (low probability state) is determined after the jackpot state ends. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage buffer of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation ports 83a and 83b. That is, the pachinko machine 10 (specifically, the MPU 402) includes a jackpot type lottery means for lottering a jackpot type according to the establishment of a predetermined lottery start condition.

  Here, the probability variation state refers to a gaming state in which the probability of occurrence of a jackpot state is higher than that in the normal state until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied after the jackpot state ends. Specifically, in the normal state, the number of random number values that will generate the jackpot state is two, and the values are “337, 673”. In the probability variation state, the jackpot state occurs. The number of random values is 10, and the values are “67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523, 601, 661”.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the normal jackpot state (first special game state) that becomes the normal state after the end of the jackpot state and the probability change jackpot state (second special game state) that becomes the probability change state after the end of the jackpot state are established. In the display screen of the symbol display device 94, the symbols that are stopped and displayed after the variable display are different. Specifically, when a normal jackpot state occurs, the combination of the normal jackpot symbols as the first special display result (more specifically, the combination of symbols with the same even number) is stopped and displayed. When the big hit state occurs, the combination of the probabilistic big hit symbols as a second special display result (more specifically, the combination of symbols given the same odd number) is stopped and displayed.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage buffer of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation ports 83a and 83b. That is, the pachinko machine 10 (specifically, the MPU 402) includes reach generation lottery means for lottering whether or not a reach display is generated based on establishment of a predetermined lottery start condition.

  The first variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The second variation type counter CS2 includes, for example, Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240), it returns to 0.

  The first variation type counter CS1 determines the display mode of the symbol display device 94, such as the type of reach effect that occurs during the reach display and other general symbol variation modes. That is, the pachinko machine 10 (specifically, the MPU 402) is provided with effect type lottery means for drawing the type of reach effect.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 94 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the stop display result after the variable display becomes a special display result. In the case where the gaming state is a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variation display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 94 is started. This means a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the special display result in the previous stage.

  In other words, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state can be established by stopping the symbols for a part of the symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 94. This is a display state in which a combination of reach reach symbols is displayed, and in that state, the symbol variation display is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the symbol variation display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state is established on a preset active line in the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying possible combinations of reach symbols, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner by the final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 is operated (specifically, a pressing operation) as part of various reach effects, the effect display on the display screen is not performed. An operation-related effect that is different from the case where the operation-related effect is displayed is set.

  As an operation-corresponding effect, after the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 moves from the initial position toward the maximum pressing position (that is, after the forward movement), the push button member 320 returns to the initial position (that is, after the forward operation). In this case, a single operation corresponding effect is set to display an operation corresponding effect every time the push button member 320 is operated once. In this case, the reach display occurs both in the situation where the jackpot state finally occurs and in the situation where the jackpot state does not occur, but the single operation corresponding effect occurs with a predetermined probability in any situation. However, the content of the effect display that is finally displayed in the effect corresponding to the single operation differs between the situation where the big hit state occurs and the situation where the big hit state does not occur.

  As an operation-corresponding effect, in addition to a single operation-corresponding effect, an operation-corresponding effect display is displayed every time the push button member 320 is operated once, and a push button member is displayed in a variable display time (game times) where a big hit state occurs When 320 is operated for a predetermined number of times, a jackpot corresponding effect display is performed, and the push button member 320 is operated for a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period in a variable display time (game time) in which a big hit state does not occur. In this case, a repetitive operation-corresponding effect for displaying a disabling effect display is set.

  As an operation-corresponding effect, in addition to a single-operation-corresponding effect and a repetitive-operation-corresponding effect, an operation-corresponding effect display is displayed every time the push button member 320 is operated once, and the push button member 320 is defined a predetermined number of times. A specific one-shot operation can be executed when operated, and a jackpot corresponding effect display is displayed when a specific one-shot operation is performed in a variable display time (game time) in which a jackpot state occurs, and a variable display time (game) in which a big hit state does not occur In this case, a continuous operation corresponding effect is displayed in which a disengagement corresponding effect is displayed when a specific single operation is performed.

  Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned various operation-compatible effects, an operation area expansion effect for expanding the operation area AE of the push button member 320 during reach display is set as the operation-related effects. In the operation area expansion effect, when the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 is operated in a state where the operation area AE is expanded, a big hit is dealt with in the variable display times (game times) in which the big hit state occurs. The effect display is performed, and in the variable display times (game times) in which the big hit state does not occur, the outlier corresponding effect display is performed.

  The switching display time as the time for switching the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 96 is determined by the second variation type counter CS2. This switching display time corresponds to the symbol fluctuation display time of the symbol display device 94. Both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are acquired at the time of starting the switching of the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 96 and determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 94.

  The off symbol counter C4 is used to determine a stop symbol in the left row symbol, middle row symbol, and right column symbol when the big hit lottery is missed, and a predetermined range of counter values is prepared. The out symbol counter C4 is updated in the normal process, and the value of the out symbol counter C4 is stored in either the front / rear out / reach symbol buffer of the RAM 404, the non-front / rear out reach reach symbol buffer, or the complete out symbol design buffer. Then, when determining the variation pattern at the start of symbol variation, one of the buffer values of the front / rear reach symbol buffer, the reach / reject symbol buffer other than front / rear out, and the completely out symbol buffer is acquired according to the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  In addition, the value of the electric utility opening counter C5 at that time is acquired at the timing when the winning to the through gate 84 occurs, and a lottery is executed as to whether or not to open the electric combination based on the acquired value. Is done.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 12, the power failure monitoring board 405, the payout control device 242, and the sound lamp control device 143 are connected to the output side of the MPU 402 in the main control device 162. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242 based on the result of determining whether or not the player has entered the pitching unit.

  Various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a stop display command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command are output to the sound lamp control device 143. Here, the change start command and the type command are output to the sound lamp control device 143 when the switching display in the first specific lamp unit 96 is started based on the information stored in the reserved ball storage buffer. In this case, the variation start command includes the symbol variation display time, information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, information on whether or not reach display, information on the reach type, etc. Contains type information. The stop display command is output to the sound lamp control device 143 when the switching display in the first specific lamp unit 96 is terminated. The jackpot start command is output to the sound lamp controller 143 when the jackpot state is entered. The jackpot end command is output to the sound lamp control device 143 when the jackpot state ends.

  The MPU 402 is connected to a drive unit or the like provided in the variable winning device 82. In the big hit state, drive control of the driving unit is executed, and the variable winning device 82 is opened and closed. . As described above, when the variable winning device 82 is opened and closed in the big hit state, a large number of game balls are paid out to the player. That is, the big hit state as the special game state can be made more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

  The power failure monitoring board 405 relays between the main control board 401 and the power / fire control device 243, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 243.

  The payout control device 242 controls payout of prize balls and lending balls by the payout device 224. When the prize ball command is input, the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. The payout device 224 is driven and controlled. In other words, when a prize ball command is input, the payout control device 242 executes a payout control process and controls the payout device 224 to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command. . That is, the pachinko machine 10 has a payout function for executing payout of game balls based on the game result.

  The power / launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 401, the payout controller 242 and the like, and the generated operating power is indicated by a double line arrow. Supply through the route. The power supply / launch control device 243 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound lamp control device 143 controls the display control device 410 while driving and controlling the speaker unit and the light emitting unit provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control board 401.

  An MPU 412 is mounted on a display control board 411 provided in the display control device 410. The MPU 412 includes a ROM 413 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 412 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 413 is executed. A RAM 414 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated.

  The MPU 412 is provided with an input port and an output port. An audio lamp control device 143 is connected to the input side of the MPU 412, and position detecting means for the push button member 320 provided in the operation switch unit 40 is connected. The position detection means includes a position detection sensor 351 that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the display control device 410 when the push button member 320 is at the maximum pressing position, and the push button member 320 is the maximum protruding position. And a position detection sensor 352 that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the display control device 410. Further, a symbol display device 94 is connected to the output side of the MPU 412, and a solenoid 340 provided in the operation switch unit 40 is connected. Further, a symbol display device 94 and an operation frequency display unit 95a are connected to the output side of the MPU 412.

  The position detection sensor 351 outputs a HI level signal when the push button member 320 reaches the maximum pressing position, and outputs a LOW level signal when moving from the maximum pressing position. The display control device 410 is configured to determine that one operation has been performed based on the falling to the LOW level signal. The position detection sensor 352 outputs a HI level signal when the push button member 320 reaches the maximum protruding position, and outputs a LOW level signal when the push button member 320 moves from the maximum protruding position. The display control device 410 is configured to determine that the push button member 320 has reached the maximum protruding position based on the rise to the HI level signal.

  The MPU 412 inputs a production command (variation start command, type command, stop display command, jackpot start command, jackpot end command, etc.) output from the main control device 162 and output via the sound lamp control device 143. In addition, the display control of the symbol display device 94 is executed by analyzing the input command or performing a predetermined calculation process based on the input command.

  Specifically, when a variation start command is input, after the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 94 is started and the symbol variation display is performed in a manner corresponding to the information included in the variation start command, The symbol fluctuation display is terminated in a state where the stop result corresponding to the type command is displayed. As the symbol variation display in a mode corresponding to the information included in the variation start command, for example, the above-described reach display or reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 94. In addition, when displaying the stop result, in the variable display times where the normal jackpot state will occur, a combination of normal jackpot symbols will be displayed, and in the variable display times where the probability variation jackpot state will occur The combination of the probable jackpot symbol is displayed.

  In the display control, detection results from the position detection sensors 351 and 352 of the operation switch unit 40 are reflected. Further, the MPU 412 controls the operation switch unit 40 based on the effect command.

  In the MPU 412, when display control of the symbol display device 94 is executed so that the detection results from the position detection sensors 351 and 352 of the operation switch unit 40 are reflected, and an operation corresponding effect using the operation switch unit 40 is performed. In this case, various areas provided in the ROM 413 and the RAM 414 of the display control device 410 are used.

  As various areas provided in the ROM 413, for example, various table storage areas 421 are set. The various table storage areas 421 show the details of the contents of the effect when the effect display corresponding to the change display time is performed when the change display of the symbol is started based on the change start command input from the sound lamp control device 143. This is an area that stores a table for identification.

  As various areas provided in the RAM 414, various flag storage areas 425, a timing counter area 426, and a continuous operation counter area 427 are set. The various flag storage area 425 stores information for specifying the effect pattern in the variation display time when the variation display of the symbol is started based on the variation start command input from the audio lamp control device 143, for example. It is an area. The timing counter area 426 is a counter area for specifying the start timing of various effects. The continuous operation counter area 427 is a counter area for measuring the number of continuous operations when the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 is continuously operated a plurality of times.

(Various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 progresses the game in each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 402 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 402 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various sensor detection monitoring processes are executed. Specifically, signals from various detection sensors and switches connected to the main control device 162 are read, and these signals are determined to store detection information (for example, winning detection information).

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the off symbol counter C4 and the electric accessory release counter C5 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the missed symbol counter C4, and the electric accessory release counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, respectively. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

  After that, in step S104, a winning process for the working opening accompanying winning in the working openings 83a and 83b is executed. In the winning process for the operating port, when a winning has occurred in the operating ports 83a and 83b, the number of start-pending memories stored in the holding ball storage area is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). Under certain conditions, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the off symbol counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area. In this case, it is stored in the first vacant reserved area among the first area to the fourth area of the reserved area, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the current start reserved memory number. Further, a process for turning on the first hold lamp unit 98 corresponding to the start hold storage number is executed for the voice lamp control device 143.

  In subsequent step S105, after a through winning process for winning through the through gate 84 is executed, the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the through winning process, if a winning to the through gate 84 has occurred, the number of stored bonus items stored in the electronic role holding area is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”). As a condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C5 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area. Moreover, the process for making the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 143 light the 2nd reservation lamp | ramp part 99 corresponding to the number of articles | goods reservation storage number is performed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S208 and S209 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242, and a command for effects such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, etc. Is set, it is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 143. The command transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 is transmitted to the display control device 410 via the sound lamp control device 143.

  Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

  In a succeeding step S203, a prize ball command setting process is performed. In the winning ball command setting process, first, with reference to the flags corresponding to the winning detection stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 404, whether or not winning has occurred in various winning portions such as the general winning opening 81 or the like. When a winning occurs, the number of game balls to be paid out is determined according to the winning. Then, a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 242 is set based on the number of game balls determined in the above-described processing.

  Thereafter, in step S204, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control processing, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 94, display control of the first specific lamp unit 96 that performs variation display, and the like are performed.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By this gaming state transition processing, the gaming state transitions to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, etc., and in the opening / closing execution mode, control of the variable prize winning device 82 so as to open the big winning opening. Is executed.

  In step S206, a power combination support process for controlling the driving of the power combination provided in the lower operation port 83b is executed. In this electric combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination is opened.

  In the subsequent step S207, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing is reached (steps S208 and S209). That is, in step S208, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404. In step S209, update of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is executed. Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  Next, among the various processes executed by the MPU 412 of the display control apparatus 410, a process related to setting of an operation corresponding effect related to the operation switch unit 40 will be described.

  The MPU 412 executes normal processing for repeatedly executing a plurality of types of predetermined processes in a predetermined order while operating power is supplied. As the process related to the setting of the operation corresponding effect in the normal process, a command determination process for specifying the type of command input from the sound lamp control device 143 and executing a process corresponding to the specified command, and the operation area expansion effect are performed. At least an operation area expansion effect process for performing and a continuous operation corresponding effect process for performing the continuous operation corresponding effect are set. Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described.

  First, the command determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Command judgment processing)
In the command determination process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not a change start command is input. Various commands input from the voice lamp control device 143 are stored in a command storage area provided in the RAM 414, and are erased by being read out in the command determination process.

  If the change start command is input, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the change start command includes information related to the operation region expansion effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value information of the first variation type counter CS <b> 1 included in the variation start command is included in the value group information for operation region expansion effects stored in the ROM 413.

  If the information related to the operation area expansion effect is included, a specific process for the operation area expansion effect is executed in step S303. In the specific process for the operation area expansion effect, the operation area expansion effect flag is stored in the operation area expansion effect flag storage area among the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414.

  If it is determined in step S302 that the information related to the operation area expansion effect is not included, the process proceeds to step S304, and it is determined whether or not the information related to the continuous operation-compatible effect is included. If the information related to the continuous operation-compatible effect is included, the specific process for the continuous operation-compatible effect is executed in step S305. In the specific process for the continuous operation corresponding effect, the continuous operation corresponding effect flag is stored in the continuous operation corresponding effect flag storage area among the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414.

  Further, in the specifying process of step S305, the following process is executed along with the storage of the continuous operation corresponding effect flag. That is, the prescribed number of continuous operations is determined based on the acquired random number value, the prescribed number determination table (see FIG. 16B) stored in the various table storage areas 421 of the ROM 413, and whether or not a jackpot has occurred. Process. In such determination processing, when the jackpot is won, the prescribed number of times is likely to increase as compared to the case where the jackpot is not won. Specifically, when the jackpot is won, “5 times” is selected with a probability of 5/100, “10 times” is selected with a probability of 10/100, and “15” is selected with a probability of 85/100. Times "is selected. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won, “5 times” is selected with a probability of 85/100, “10 times” is selected with a probability of 10/100, and “15 times” with a probability of 5/100. Is selected.

  Note that the upper limit value of the prescribed number of times (15 times in the present embodiment) is within the continuous operation corresponding effect execution period in consideration of the return speed of the push button member 320 to the standby position, the detection information reading timing, and the like. Are determined to be within a practically achievable range.

  If it is determined in step S304 that the information related to the continuous operation corresponding effect is not included, the process proceeds to step S306 after executing the specifying processes in steps S303 and S305. In step S306, specific processing for variation display is executed. In the specific processing, based on the variation start command and the type command, the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 94, the symbol variation display mode including the reach display and reach effect, and the symbol type to be finally stopped are displayed. The specified information is stored in the RAM 414. Thereafter, the command determination process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S301 that the change start command has not been input, the process proceeds to step S307, and after executing other specific processing, this command determination processing ends. In other specific processes, when the input command is a stop display command, a jackpot start command, or a jackpot end command, a process corresponding to each command is executed. In other specific processing, if it is determined that a command has not been input, the processing is ended as it is, and if the input command cannot be analyzed, the processing is also ended as it is.

(Operation area expansion effect processing)
Next, the operation area expansion effect process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The operation area expansion effect process is executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

  In the operation area expansion effect process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not it is during variable display (game rotation) where the operation area expansion effect occurs. When the variable display is not being performed, the operation area expansion effect process is terminated as it is, and when the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, it is determined whether or not a pressing operation has been suggested. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the operation area expansion effect is started, a pressing operation suggestion image (pressing operation prompting image) that prompts the player to press the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 is displayed. It is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. For example, as the pressing operation suggestion image, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and characters such as “Press the button!” Are displayed on the display screen 94a. The suggestion of the pressing operation is not limited to that on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, and may be performed by outputting sound from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of that on the display screen 94a. Alternatively, the push button member 320 may emit light. Further, these various suggestion patterns may be used in combination.

  If it is determined in step S402 that the pressing operation has not been suggested, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether it is the expansion start timing of the operation area. The start timing is stored in advance in the ROM 413 of the display control device 410 as information on a predetermined count value after the start of symbol variation display. Then, each time an affirmative determination is made in step S401 after the start of the symbol variation display, the value of the suggestion start timing counter provided in the timing counter area 426 is updated, and the value of the counter becomes the predetermined count value. Is reached, an affirmative determination is made in step S403.

  If it is determined in step S403 that the operation area expansion start timing is not reached, the operation area expansion effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation region expansion start timing is reached, an operation region expansion process is executed in the subsequent step S404. In the operation area expansion process, output of a drive signal to the solenoid 340 of the operation switch unit 40 is started. As a result, the solenoid 340 is excited, and the shutter member 330 moves from the closed position to the open position, as shown in FIGS. As a result, the operable region in the push button member 320 (specifically, the operation surface portion 322) is expanded (that is, the proportion of the portion exposed upward in the operation surface portion 322 is increased), and the push button member 320 is increased. The amount of upward protrusion increases (the operation stroke increases).

  After executing the process of step S404, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, a pressing operation suggestion image setting process is executed. Thereby, the pressing operation suggestion image is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. As for the display of the image, the display of the message is started at the timing after the expansion of the operation area is completed, and the message is terminated when a predetermined suggestion period elapses or a pressing operation is performed.

  In a succeeding step S406, a pressing operation waiting state setting process is executed. In the pressing operation waiting state setting process, the flag is stored so that the pressing operation waiting flag is stored in the pressing operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414 at the same timing as the display start timing of the pressing operation suggestion image. Set the timing. Thereafter, the processing for effect corresponding to continuous operation is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the pressing operation has been suggested, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation waiting flag is stored in the pressing operation waiting flag storage area of the RAM 414, thereby determining whether or not the pressing operation has been suggested.

  If it is waiting for a pressing operation, the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing operation waiting state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the end timing has been reached with reference to the value of the counter for measuring a pressing operation waiting period in the timing counter area 426. The pressing operation waiting period measurement counter is set to a predetermined value in accordance with the operation waiting state setting process, and is updated each time a negative determination is made in step S408. When the pressing operation waiting period measurement counter is a predetermined value, an affirmative determination is made in step S408.

  If a negative determination is made in step S408, the process proceeds to step S409. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation of the push button member 320 has been performed. Specifically, in the MPU 412 of the display control device 410, in addition to the normal process in which the command determination process and the operation area expansion effect process are repeatedly executed, the normal process is periodically interrupted (for example, 2 msec) and started. Timer interrupt processing to be performed is set. In the timer interruption process, a sensor monitoring process for monitoring a detection signal (detection information) from the operation detection sensor 351 of the operation switch unit 40 is executed. In step S408, the presence / absence of a pressing operation is determined based on the result of the sensor monitoring process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S409, the operation region expansion effect process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S409, the process proceeds to step S410. In step S410, a return waiting state setting process is performed.

  In the return wait state setting process, the return wait flag is stored in the return wait flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414. Thereafter, the operation area expansion effect process is terminated. The return waiting flag is a flag that is referred to when monitoring whether or not the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum protruding position.

  After performing the return waiting state setting process in step S410, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S408, the operation waiting state canceling process is executed in step S411, and then the operation region expansion effect process is performed. Exit. In the operation waiting state canceling process, the pressing operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414 is deleted. Thereby, the monitoring of the subsequent pressing operation is released.

  Returning to the description of step S407, if a negative determination is made in step S407, that is, if it is determined that the operation is not waiting, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, it is determined whether or not a return waiting state is set. Specifically, it is determined whether a return waiting flag is stored in the return waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 425. If an affirmative determination is made in step S412, that is, if it is determined that the device is waiting for a return, the process proceeds to step S413.

  In step S413, it is determined whether or not the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum protruding position. Specifically, the timer interrupt process is set in the MPU 412 of the display control device 410, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring a detection signal (detection information) from the operation detection sensor 352 of the operation switch unit 40 is executed. Yes. In step S408, it is determined whether or not there is a return to the maximum protruding position based on the result of the sensor monitoring process.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S413, that is, if it is determined that the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum protruding position, the process proceeds to step S414. In step S414, an operation completion image setting process is performed. As a result, an image indicating that the pressing operation is completed is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94.

  After the operation completion image setting process is performed in step S414, the process proceeds to step S415, and the return waiting state canceling process is executed. In the return wait state release process, the return wait flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414 is erased. Thereby, the monitoring of the subsequent return of the push button member 320 is cancelled.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S413, it is determined in step S416 whether or not it is the start timing of pressing operation release suggestion. Specifically, with reference to the value of the release operation suggestion timing counter in the timing counter area 426, it is determined whether or not the suggestion timing has been reached. The release operation suggestion timing counter is set to a predetermined value in accordance with the return waiting state setting process, and is updated each time a negative determination is made in step S416. If the value of the release operation suggestion timing counter is a predetermined value, an affirmative determination is made in step S416.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S416, the process proceeds to step S417. In step S417, a pressing operation release suggestion image setting process is performed. As a result, an image prompting the end of the pressing operation is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94.

  After executing the setting process of step S417, or when a negative determination is made in step S416, the process proceeds to step S418. In step S418, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the return waiting state. The end timing of the return waiting state is a timing earlier than the limit timing at which it is not possible to secure a period during which the effect based on the pressing operation can be completed before the end timing of the variable display time.

  If a negative determination is made in step S418, the operation region expansion effect process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S418, an operation incomplete image setting process is performed in step S419. As a result, an image indicating that the operation has not been completed is displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 94. Note that the display of the image ends when the game round ends, that is, when the game result is confirmed and displayed.

  After the process of step S419 is executed, the return waiting state cancel process is executed in step S415, and then the operation region expansion effect process is terminated.

  Returning to step S412, the process proceeds to step S420 if a negative determination is made in step S412. In step S420, it is determined whether it is the display end timing of the operation completion image or the operation incomplete image. If an affirmative determination is made in step S420, a result display image setting process is executed in step S421, and then the operation region expansion effect process is terminated.

  By executing the process of step S421, a result display image is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. As the display of the image, for example, when the variable display time is a variable display time in which a jackpot state occurs, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot state, When the variable display time is a variable display time in which the big hit state does not occur, the moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character is the same as before the operation suggesting image is started. In the result display image setting process, when an operation completion image is displayed, a process for displaying the result display image corresponding to the operation completion is executed, and an operation incomplete image is displayed. , A process for displaying a result display image corresponding to incomplete operation is executed. That is, different images are displayed when the operation is completed and when the operation is not completed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S420, the process proceeds to step S422, and it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display. If it is not the end timing of the variable display, the operation region expansion effect process is ended as it is. If it is the end timing of the variable display, an end display image setting process is executed in step S423, and a return process from the expanded state to the normal state is executed in step S424. Exit.

  In the setting process of the end display image in step S423, when the variation display time is a variation display time in which a big hit state occurs, display setting is performed so that a moving image display that the occurrence of the big hit state is confirmed is performed. . In this case, when the result display image setting process is executed and the moving image display is set to correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot state in the result display image setting process, The moving image display is set so as to have a series of contents with the moving image display. On the other hand, when the operation incomplete image setting process is executed, there is a moving image display that dramatically switches from the incomplete operation image to a moving image display indicating that the occurrence of the big hit state is confirmed. .

  In the return processing in step S424, the return flag is stored in the return flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 425. In the timer interrupt processing described above, when this return flag is stored, processing for returning the operation switch unit 40 to the normal state is performed. In the return process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing after the game result is displayed. When it is determined that the timing is after the game result is displayed, the following process is performed.

  First, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 352, it is determined whether or not the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum protruding position. When it is determined that the push button member 320 has not returned to the maximum projecting position, the return process is terminated as it is. That is, when the player continues the pressing operation by placing a hand on the push button member 320, the return to the normal state is avoided.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum protruding position, the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 340 is stopped and the solenoid 340 is brought into a non-excited state. As a result, the shutter member 330 moves to the closed position by the biasing force of the shutter spring member 335, and the return from the expanded state to the normal state is completed. After executing the output stop process of the drive signal, the return flag stored in the various flag storage areas 425 is erased, and the return process ends.

  When the return flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 425, the operation area expansion effect is restricted, and in the variable display times in which the operation area expansion effect is executed, an alternative effect is executed instead. It will be. By the way, when the variable display time in which the operation area expansion effect is performed is finished and the next pressing operation is not performed until the next variable display time is started, the next variable display time is started. It is set so that the return from the expanded state to the normal state is completed by the time it is performed. For this reason, when the return process is completed as it is after the game result is displayed, the operation area expansion effect is not restricted in the next game round.

  Here, the display contents and the state of the operation switch unit 40 in the symbol display device 94 when the operation area expansion effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 18A, a case where the hand is released from the operation switch unit 40 after the pressing operation is performed will be described.

  When the variable display times (game times) in which the operation area expansion effect is executed at the timing of ta1 are started, the variable display of each symbol row that has been stopped and displayed until then is started. Thereafter, the left symbol row is first stopped and displayed, and then the right symbol row is stopped and displayed at the timing ta2. At this time, the same symbol (the symbol “3” in FIG. 18) is stopped and displayed on the above-described effective line, thereby starting reach display. In the reach display, the reach symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper portion of the display screen 94a, and a character image imitating a girl is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 94a. Thereafter, the operation switch unit 40 is switched from the normal state to the expanded state at the timing ta3.

  At the timing ta4 after the switching of the operation switch unit 40 to the expanded state is completed, the display of the pressing operation suggestion image is started. Thereafter, when the player performs the pressing operation of the push button member 320 at the timing of ta5, the display of the pressing operation suggestion image is completed and an image indicating that the operation has been effectively received is displayed (this book). In the embodiment, the display screen 94a is white-out).

  Here, when the player releases his / her hand from the push button member 320, the push button member 320 returns to the maximum projecting position, and an operation completion image is displayed according to the game result at the subsequent timing of ta6. Specifically, if the current game time is not a game time in which a jackpot state occurs, the display content before the display of the operation suggestion image is started, and the game time in which the current game time occurs in a jackpot state In the case of, display of an image corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit state is started.

  After that, at the timing of ta7, the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed, and the game result is clearly indicated. Specifically, if the current game time is not a game time in which a jackpot state occurs, the combination of symbols corresponding to the losing is stopped and displayed, and the current variation display time is a variable display time in which a jackpot state occurs The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the push button member 320 is not operated at the timing when the game result is displayed (that is, when waiting at the maximum projecting position), the operation switch unit 40 is operated at the timing ta8 thereafter. Will return to the normal state.

  Next, the case where the operation switch unit 40 is maintained in the pressed state when the pressing operation is performed will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol variation display is started at the timing tb1, and the normal variation display is switched to the reach display at the timing tb2. Thereafter, the operation switch unit 40 switches from the normal state to the expanded state at the timing tb3, and the operation suggestion image is displayed on the display screen 94a at the timing tb4. The flow of the timing from tb1 to tb4 is the same as the flow of the timing from ta1 to timing ta4, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the pressing operation is started at the timing tb5 and the push button member 320 is kept pressed to the maximum pressing position, first, the display screen 94a is white-out to indicate that the pressing operation has been accepted effectively. To do. If the push button member 320 has not returned to the maximum protruding position even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the pressing operation was received, the pressing operation is released at the timing tb6 when the predetermined period has elapsed (the push button member 320). Is displayed on the display screen 94a.

  If the release waiting period has passed without the pressing operation being released, an image indicating that the operation has not been completed is displayed on the display screen 94a, and the display screen 94a is displayed at the timing when the variable display cycle ends. If the image of the girl displayed at the center of the screen is not displayed and the current variation display time is not a variation display time in which a big hit state occurs, the combination of symbols corresponding to the detachment is stopped and displayed. Is a variable display time in which a jackpot state occurs, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, when the pressing operation is continued even at the timing when the next variable display time is started at the timing tb8, the return of the operation switch unit 40 to the normal state is postponed. In this case, since the operation switch unit 40 has not returned to the normal state at the start of the next variable display time, the operation area expansion effect is restricted from being performed at the next variable display time. Become. That is, even if a command for performing an operation area expansion effect is output from the main control device 162, an alternative effect in place of the operation area expansion effect is executed.

  Thereafter, when the pressing operation is released at the timing of tb9, the operation switch unit 40 is returned to the normal state at the timing of tb10 when the push button member 320 is returned to the maximum projecting position. In this case, the restriction on the operation area expansion effect is canceled.

  As already described, as the operation corresponding effect in the present embodiment, in addition to the operation region expansion effect described above, the flow of the rough effect is the same as that of the operation region expansion effect, but the operation region is expanded. A normal operation response effect (single operation response effect) is set. Here, with reference to Fig.18 (a), this normal operation corresponding | compatible effect is demonstrated.

  The normal operation corresponding effect starts at the timing ta1, and shifts to reach display at the timing ta2. Thereafter, in the operation area expansion effect, the operation area is expanded at the timing ta3. However, in the normal operation corresponding effect, the operation area is not expanded and is maintained in the normal state. It should be noted that the display content of the normal operation corresponding effect and the display content of the operation area expansion effect are completely the same until at least the timing of ta3.

  At the timing ta4, a display prompting the user to operate the extended push button member 320 is displayed on the display screen 94a in the extended operation compatible effect, while the non-expanded (normal state) push button is displayed in the normal operation compatible effect. A display prompting the operation of the member 320 is displayed on the display screen 94a. Further, after the timing of ta4, the content of the operation area expansion effect (reach display mode) and the content of the normal operation corresponding effect (reach display mode) are different. Thereafter, the contents of effects executed by operating the push button member 320 are different for each effect.

  In this way, by using together the effect that the operation area is not expanded and the effect that the operation area is expanded, the player determines whether or not the operation switch unit 40 is deformed (the operation area is expanded) as the effect progresses. A game will be played while paying attention. Therefore, improvement in the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 40 can be expected.

  In the present embodiment, as the effect using the operation switch unit 40, the above-described continuous operation-compatible effect is adopted in addition to the operation region expansion effect. Therefore, hereinafter, the continuous operation corresponding effect processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the continuous operation corresponding effect production process is executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

(Processing for continuous operation effects)
In the processing for continuous operation corresponding effect, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being generated in which the continuous operation corresponding effect is generated. If the change display is not being performed, the continuous operation corresponding effect production process is terminated, and if the change display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S502. As already described, the continuous operation-compatible effect is a combination of a continuous operation and a specific single operation.

  In step S502, it is determined whether or not the suggestion of the continuous operation has been performed. In this pachinko machine 10, when starting a continuous operation corresponding effect, a repetitive operation suggesting image (repetitive operation prompting image) that prompts the player to repeatedly operate the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 a plurality of times is displayed. It is displayed on the display screen 94a of the display device 94. For example, as the continuous operation suggestion image, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and characters such as “please hit the button repeatedly” are displayed. The suggestion of the repetitive operation is not limited to that on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, but may be performed on the sound output from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of that on the display screen 94a. Also good.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the continuous operation has not been suggested, the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing for suggesting the continuous operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pattern variation display mode on the display screen 94a is a predetermined timing after switching from the normal variation display to the reach display.

  If it is not the start timing for suggesting the repetitive operation, the present continuous operation-corresponding effect processing ends. If it is the start timing for suggesting the repetitive operation, in step S504, a setting operation for the repetitive operation suggestion image is executed. Thereby, the image for repetitive operation suggestion is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94. The display of the image is continued for a predetermined suggestion period.

  In a succeeding step S505, a process for setting a continuous operation waiting state is executed. Specifically, the continuous operation waiting flag is stored in the continuous operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414. Thereafter, the continuous operation-compatible effect process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S502 that the continuous operation has been suggested, the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, it is determined whether or not the continuous operation waiting flag is stored in the continuous operation waiting flag storage area of the RAM 414, thereby determining whether or not the continuous operation waiting state is set.

  If it is in the continuous operation waiting state, the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, it is determined whether or not the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 has been operated. Whether or not the push button member 320 is operated is monitored by the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process in the MPU 412 as described above. In step S507, if the processing result of the monitoring process is a processing result indicating that the operation of the push button member 320 has occurred (specifically, the operation is performed in the operation flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414). When the presence flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S508, and the operation reception image setting process is executed. Thereby, the operation acceptance image is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. As the display of the image, for example, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of the operation.

  After executing the process of step S508, the process proceeds to step S509, and it is determined whether or not the number of repeated operations has reached the specified number of operations determined in the command determination process. Specifically, the counter value in the counter area 427 for continuous operation in the RAM 414 is configured to be incremented by “1” every time an affirmative determination is made in step S507. Make a comparison. The value in the counter operation counter area 427 is initialized when the continuous operation waiting flag is deleted.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S509, the process advances to step S510 to perform a process for setting a continuous operation completion image. As a result, an image prompting the end of the continuous operation is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94.

  After executing the process of step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, and a process for setting a specific single operation waiting state is performed. Specifically, the specific single operation waiting flag is stored in the specific single operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414. That is, in the continuous operation corresponding effect, the specific single operation is allowed as the specific single operation on the condition that the continuous operation is completed.

  In the subsequent step S512, the specific single operation suggestion image setting process is executed. By performing such processing, a specific single operation suggesting image (specific single operation prompting image) that prompts the player to operate the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 once is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. Is displayed. For example, as the single operation suggestion image, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and characters such as “please press a push button” are displayed. The suggestion of the specific single operation is not limited to that on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, but is performed on the sound output from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of that on the display screen. Also good.

  The image set by the setting process of the specific single operation suggestion image is displayed at a timing after the continuous operation completion image is displayed over a predetermined period.

  If a negative determination is made in each process of step S507 and step S509, the process proceeds to step S513. In step S513, it is determined whether or not it is the reception end timing of the continuous operation. Specifically, with reference to the value of the counter for continuous operation reception period provided in the timing counter area 426 of the RAM 414, it is determined whether or not the reception end timing is reached. The counter for continuous operation acceptance period is updated each time a predetermined value is input when the process for setting the continuous operation waiting state is performed and a negative determination is made in step S513. Then, when the value of the counter for continuous operation acceptance period becomes a predetermined value, an affirmative determination is made in step S513, and a negative determination is made if it is not the predetermined value.

  If a negative determination is made in step S513, the continuous operation-corresponding effect processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S513, the process proceeds to step S514. In step S514, a reception end suggestion image setting process is performed. As a result, an image indicating that the acceptance period of the continuous operation has ended is displayed on the display screen 94a.

  After performing the process of step S514 or step S512, after performing the cancellation | release process of a continuous operation waiting state in step S515, this continuous operation corresponding | compatible production | generation process is complete | finished. In the release process of the continuous operation wait state, the continuous operation wait flag stored in the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414 is erased.

  Returning to the description of step S506 again, if a negative determination is made in step S506, that is, if it is determined that the process is not in a state of waiting for repeated operations, the process proceeds to step S516. In step S516, it is determined whether or not the specific single operation waiting state is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the specific single operation waiting flag is stored in the specific single operation waiting flag storage area of the RAM 414, thereby determining whether or not the specific single operation waiting state is set.

  If it is waiting for a specific single operation, the process proceeds to step S517. In step S517, it is determined whether the wait period has elapsed. When the specific single operation waiting state setting process is performed, a predetermined value is input to the wait period counter in the timing counter area 426. The value of the counter for the wait period is updated (subtracted by “1”) every time a negative determination is made in step S517, and affirmative in step S517 when the value becomes a predetermined value (for example, “0”). Determined. Thus, by setting the wait period, there is a period in which the pressing operation is invalid between the continuous operation → the specific single operation.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S517, that is, if it is determined that it is not in the wait period, the process proceeds to step S518. In step S518, it is determined whether or not a specific single operation has been performed, that is, whether or not the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 has been operated. Whether or not the push button member 320 is operated is monitored by the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process in the MPU 412 as described above. In step S518, when the process result of the monitoring process is a process result indicating that the operation of the push button member 320 has occurred (specifically, the operation is performed in the operation flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414). If the presence flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made, and the process proceeds to step S519. By executing the operation reception image setting process in step S519, the operation reception image is displayed on the display screen 94a. As the display of the image, for example, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of the operation.

  After executing the setting process in step S519, the process proceeds to step S520, and a specific single operation waiting state canceling process is executed. Specifically, the specific single operation waiting flag stored in the specific single operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414 is deleted.

  After that, a result display image setting process is executed in step S521. By executing the processing of step S521, the result display image is displayed on the display screen 94a. As the display of the image, for example, when the variable display time is a variable display time in which a jackpot state occurs, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot state, When the variable display time is a variable display time in which the big hit state does not occur, the moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character is the same as before the operation suggesting image is started.

  After performing the process of step S521, if a negative determination is made in steps S516 and S518, if a negative determination is made in step S517, the process proceeds to step S522. In step S522, it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display. If a negative determination is made in step S522, the continuous operation corresponding effect processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S523, that is, when it is the end timing of the variable display, an end display image setting process is executed in step S523, and the continuous operation corresponding effect processing is ended.

  In the setting process of the end display image in step S523, when the variation display time is a variation display time in which a big hit state occurs, display setting is performed so that a moving image display that the occurrence of the big hit state is confirmed is performed. . In this case, when the result display image setting process is executed and the moving image display is set to correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot state in the result display image setting process, The moving image display is set so as to have a series of contents with the moving image display. On the other hand, when the operation incomplete image setting process is executed, there is a moving image display that dramatically switches from the incomplete operation image to a moving image display indicating that the occurrence of the big hit state is confirmed. .

  Here, the display content in the symbol display device 94 and the operation mode of the operation switch unit 40 when the continuous operation-corresponding effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

  When the game round in which the continuous operation corresponding effect is executed is started at the timing of tc1, the variable display of each symbol sequence that has been stopped and displayed until then is started. Thereafter, the left symbol row is first stopped and displayed, and then the right symbol row is stopped and displayed at the timing tc2. At this time, the same symbol (the symbol “3” in FIG. 18) is stopped and displayed on the above-described effective line, thereby starting reach display. After the reach display is started, the reach symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper portion of the display screen 94a, and a character image imitating a girl is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 94a. Thereafter, at the timing of tc3, a message prompting repeated hitting of the push button member 320 is displayed on the display screen 94a (for example, “please hit consecutively!”), And at the same time, the state is switched to the waiting state for repeated operation.

  Thereafter, the player repeatedly presses the push button member 320, thereby changing the display of the operation reception count display portion 94b corresponding to the continuous operation arranged on the side of the display screen 94a. Specifically, the number of operations is suggested to the player by switching the light-emitting body (LED), which has been turned off until then, to the lighting state according to the number of operations. In accordance with this, an effect is displayed so as to surround the character in the character image imitating the girl displayed on the display screen 94a, and the effect is displayed to increase as the number of operations increases.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the expectation of winning the jackpot is set to be higher as the number of operations until the operation is completed after the consecutive operation is suggested is increased. For this reason, it is assumed that the player performs the operation while expecting to perform the pressing operation as many times as possible, and the degree of attention to the pressing operation is improved.

  At the timing of tc5 when the number of operations by repeated pressing operations reaches a preset specified number of operations, an image indicating that the repeated operation has been completed is displayed on the display screen 94a. At the timing of tc5, the pressing operation of the push button member 320 is temporarily invalidated, and thereafter, at the timing of tc6, the state is switched to a state of accepting the specific single operation. Accordingly, an image prompting a specific single operation (one press operation) is displayed on the display screen 94a.

  When the push button member 320 is operated at the timing of tc7 after the image prompting the specific single operation is displayed, an operation completion image is displayed according to the game result. Specifically, if the current game time is not a game time in which a jackpot state occurs, the display content before the display of the operation suggestion image is started, and the game time in which the current game time occurs in a jackpot state In the case of, display of an image corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit state is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of tc8, the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed, and the game result is clearly indicated. Specifically, if the current game time is not a game time in which a jackpot state occurs, the combination of symbols corresponding to the losing is stopped and displayed, and if the current game time is a game time in which a jackpot state occurs The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

  According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The operation switch unit 40 as the production operation means is configured to be switchable between a normal state and an expanded state. When the game state is switched to the expanded state, the operation area that can be operated by directly touching the player (accessed) is expanded. As described above, if the operation area is expanded in accordance with the game situation, an improvement in the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 40 can be expected. In particular, when the operation area expansion effect is executed, by changing the area that can be directly touched and operated, it is possible to enhance the impact when the operation area is expanded and to improve the interest.

  Depending on the player, there is a case where the game is performed with the hand held on the push button member 320 for the purpose of quickly operating the push button member 320 or the like. Here, with respect to the operation switch unit 40 shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide not only visual and auditory effects but also tactile effects to the player.

  In the game times in which the operation area expansion effect is executed, the possibility of winning the jackpot at that game time becomes high, so the player advances the game while expecting the operation switch unit 40 to operate. As a result, it is possible to contribute to improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  Regarding the operation switch unit 40, the operable area in the normal state is included in the operable area in the expanded state. Compared with the case where the operation area in the normal state and the operation area in the expanded state are provided separately and independently, the player is less likely to be confused about which part to operate.

  As for the push button member 320, the upward protrusion increases by switching from the normal state to the expanded state. Thereby, not only can the function suggesting that it is in the expanded state be improved, but also the operation in the expanded state can be promoted by facilitating the operation.

  In the expanded state, the operation stroke of the push button member 320 increases. The player can feel that the amount of displacement necessary for displacing the push button member 320 to a specific position is changed by a hand operating the push button member 320 or the like. Therefore, by using the change in the operation amount of the push button member 320 as an effect that increases the degree of attention to the game, it is possible to provide the player with not only visual or auditory effects but also tactile effects.

  By adopting a configuration in which the movement of the push button member 320 in the protruding direction is restricted by the shutter member 330, the above-described configuration for realizing the expansion of the operation region and the increase of the operation stroke can be avoided. Yes. Further, when the operation switch unit 40 is returned to the normal state, the push button member 320 can be moved in the retracting direction by the shutter member 330 pressing the operation surface portion 322 of the push button member 320. Thereby, the complication of the structure concerning a return is suppressed.

  In the configuration in which the operation area is changed using the movable shutter member 330, there is a possibility that the return is hindered by the player's hand or the like. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the operation switch unit 40 is returned to the normal state on the condition that the push button member 320 is waiting at the maximum projecting position, that is, the push button member 320 is not pressed. Adopted the configuration. Thereby, it can suppress that the return to the normal state of the operation switch unit 40 is prevented by a player's hand etc.

  In particular, when the operation area expansion effect is performed, the effect based on the pressing operation is executed on the condition that the push button member 320 is returned to the maximum projecting position. Thereby, it is suppressed that the push button member 320 is maintained in the pressed state, and the return function to the normal state is easily exhibited.

  An effect corresponding to continuous operation is adopted as an effect using the operation switch unit 40, and a specific single operation is urged in the gaming machine when the player performs a continuous operation (a repetitive operation of a specified number of times). As described above, since at least the continuous operation is executed and the specific single operation is prompted, when the push button member 320 is repeatedly operated aiming at reaching the specified number of times, the same operation can be given a meaning that leads to the next operation. It is possible to make it difficult to give the player an impression that the repeated operation is useless. Thereby, it can suppress that the attention degree to the operation switch unit 40 (specific operation) falls.

  In addition, in the continuous operation corresponding effect, a configuration is adopted in which a specific single operation can be performed by performing a pressing operation a predetermined number of times. The specified number of operations is set so that the number increases according to the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. For this reason, when performing a repetitive operation (sequential operation), the player performs the operation while expecting that the pressing operation is effectively accepted even once. Thereby, the attention degree with respect to pressing operation itself can be improved, and it can suppress that a player repeats operation mechanically.

<Second Embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the configuration relating to the push button member as the operation means is different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the push button member will be described below with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment as viewed from the front, FIG. 22A is a plan view showing the upper bulge and the related configuration, and FIG. 22B is FIG. ) Of FIG. 22 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line C-C of FIG. 22 (a), and FIG. 23 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 22 (b). is there. In the following description, the description of the configuration related to the same reference numeral as that of the first embodiment is simplified or omitted by using the description, and the difference from the first embodiment is mainly described. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the upper bulging portion 500 includes an upper plate 501 provided with a function as a storage portion for storing game balls. As shown in FIG. 22A, the upper plate 501 has an upper plate body 510 in which a bottom portion 511 and a peripheral wall portion 512 that rises upward from the peripheral edge portion of the bottom portion 511 are formed. The upper plate main body 510 has a box shape opened upward as a whole (see FIG. 21), and a storage area RE for game balls is defined by the upper plate main body 510.

  The peripheral wall portion 512 of the upper plate body 510 includes a front side wall portion 513, a rear side wall portion 514, a right side wall portion 515, and a left side wall portion 516, and the rear side wall portion 514 is the frame body 20 of the front door frame 14. The upper plate 501 and the frame body 20 are integrated with each other. A game ball discharge port 521 that communicates with the front door side upper dish passage 35 formed in the frame body 20 is formed in the rear side wall portion 514, and the game ball discharged from the payout device 224 is placed on the front door side. The storage area RE is reached through the dish passage 35 → the game ball discharge port 521.

  The front door side upper dish passage 35 is provided with a ball detection sensor 36 that detects that game balls have accumulated up to a predetermined position of the front door side upper dish passage 35. The sphere detection sensor 36 is electrically connected to the display control device 410. In the display control device 410, the upper plate 501 is filled based on detection information (detection signal) from the sphere detection sensor 36. It is the composition which can grasp that it is tongue. That is, the ball detection sensor 36 is provided with a function as a full tank detecting means for detecting that the upper plate 501 is full.

  A partition portion 522 is provided at the center of the bottom portion 511. The partition portion 522 has a wall shape that rises upward from the bottom portion 511 and partitions the storage region RE in the front-rear direction. In the storage area RE, the area on the front side of the partition portion 522 is set to have a front-rear width so that a plurality of game balls can stand by in a front-rear direction, and the area on the rear side of the partition portion 522 is An alignment passage 523 is provided for guiding the game balls in a line along the rear side wall portion 514. The front-rear width of the front region is larger than the front-rear width of the rear region.

  A game ball inlet 524 is formed at a location constituting the most downstream portion of the alignment passage 523 in the rear side wall portion 514. The game balls that have flowed into the storage area RE through the game ball discharge port 521 bypass the partition 522 from the front, flow into the alignment passage 523, and then move along the alignment passage 523, thereby playing the game ball intake port 524. To reach. The game ball taken in from the game ball take-in port 524 is guided to the ball feeding device 113 of the game ball launching mechanism 110.

  Part of the upper plate body 510 described in detail above (specifically, the front side wall portion 513) is covered with a cover body 530 from the front of the gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 22B, the cover body 530 has a bottom plate portion 531 that faces the bottom portion 511 of the upper plate body 510 from below, and a ceiling plate that faces the bottom plate portion 531 with the front side wall portion 513 interposed therebetween. It has a plate portion 532 and a front plate portion 533 that faces the front side wall portion 513 with a gap from the front of the gaming machine and connects both plate portions 531 and 532, and the bottom plate portion 531 is the upper plate body 510. Between the upper plate body 510 and the frame body 20, and more specifically, the bottom plate portion 531 is inserted into a slit 538 formed between the upper plate body 510 and the frame body 20. The front side wall portion 513 is sandwiched between the bottom plate portion 531 and the top plate portion 532 so as to be attached to the upper plate body 510 in a state where sliding movement in the front-rear direction is permitted.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, a slit 538 is also present at the left end of the upper plate 501, and the bottom plate portion 531 of the cover body 530 is located between the upper plate main body 510 and the frame body 20. It is movable. On the other hand, at the right end of the upper plate 501, the right wall 515 of the upper plate main body 510 enters the cover body 530 so that the cover body 530 is allowed to move backward in the gaming machine (FIG. 22 ( a)).

  The upper plate 501 is provided with a stopper that prevents the cover body 530 from moving forward in the gaming machine. By preventing the forward movement of the gaming machine in this way, the cover body 530 is prevented from falling off the upper plate body 510. The upper plate 501 is provided with a spring member (not shown) as urging means for urging the cover body 530 forward. As a result, the cover body 530 is maintained in contact with the stopper. As for the cover body 530, the position in contact with the stopper from the rear of the gaming machine is the initial position.

  Further, at the back of the slit 538, a cover stopper device 540 that can be switched between a blocking state in which the sliding movement of the cover body 530 to the rear of the gaming machine and a permission state in which sliding movement to the rear of the gaming machine is allowed. Is provided. In the blocking state, the stopper piece 541 of the cover stopper device 540 is inserted between the back wall 539 of the slit 538 and the rear end portion of the bottom plate portion 531, and one end of the stopper piece 541 contacts the back wall 539, Since the other end abuts on the rear end portion of the bottom plate portion 531, the backward movement of the cover body 530 is prevented. That is, the stopper and cover stopper device 540 prevents the cover body 530 from moving from the initial position.

  A push button member 550 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape is disposed in a region sandwiched between the front plate portion 533 of the cover body 530 and the front side wall portion 513 of the upper plate body 510. The push button member 550 is sandwiched between the top plate portion 532 and the bottom plate portion 531 of the cover body 530, and the vertical position is defined by both the plate portions 531 and 532.

  An opening 534 is formed in the cover body 530 so as to straddle the front plate portion 533 and the top plate portion 532, and a part of the push button member 550 is exposed to the front side of the gaming machine through the opening 534. It has become. Thereby, access to the push button member 550 from the front side of the gaming machine is allowed.

  Abutting portions 536 that abut against the push button member 550 from the side are formed on both the left and right sides of the push button member 550 (opening portion 534). The contact portion 536 is configured by a pair of opposing plate-like portions. When the push button member 550 contacts the contact portion 536, movement of the push button member 550 to the left and right is restricted. ing. The contact portion 536 is formed so as to straddle the plate portions 531 to 533, and has a function as a reinforcing portion that reinforces the cover body 530. In particular, the holding strength or the like of the push button member 550 is likely to decrease around the opening 534. This causes distortion of the cover body 530 and the like, and becomes a factor that hinders the movement of the push button member 550. In this respect, in the present embodiment, a reduction in operability of the push button member 550 is suppressed by providing a reinforcing function to the contact portion 536.

  Further, the push button member 550 is formed such that its rear surface faces the front side wall portion 513 with a gap therebetween, and a movement path in the front-rear direction is ensured. Thereby, the push button member 550 can move in the same direction as the sliding direction of the cover body 530.

  The push button member 550 has a front surface portion that is slightly larger than the opening 534, and left and right ends of the front surface portion are in contact with the front plate portion 533 of the cover body 530 from the rear. . This prevents the push button member 550 from falling off the opening 534.

  Between the push button member 550 and the front side wall portion 513, a button spring member 555 is provided as a biasing means for biasing the push button member 550 forward. The push button member 550 is pressed against the front plate portion 533 of the cover body 530 by being biased by the button spring member 555. As for the push button member 550, the position where the cover body 530 is in contact with the front plate portion 533 in the state where the cover body 530 is in the initial position is the initial position.

  When the cover body 530 slides backward to the gaming machine, the push button member 550 moves rearward following the cover body 530. More specifically, when the cover body 530 slides backward, the push button member 550 is pushed backward by the front plate portion 533 of the cover body 530, and the push button is pressed against the urging force of the button spring member 555. The member 550 will move backward. In other words, the push button member 550 is allowed to have two movement patterns, that is, backward movement alone and backward movement following the cover body 530.

  The front side wall portion 513 of the upper plate body 510 is for a button that can be switched between a blocking state in which the push button member 550 is prevented from sliding backward in the gaming machine and an allowable state in which sliding movement is allowed backward in the gaming machine. A stopper device 560 is provided (see FIG. 23B). The button stopper device 560 is electrically connected to the display control device 410, and is configured to switch from an allowable state to a blocking state when a drive signal is input from the display control device 410. Note that the button stopper device 560 is normally maintained in an allowable state, and is controlled to switch to a blocking state in accordance with the gaming situation (specifically, when a predetermined condition is satisfied).

  As shown in FIG. 22B, when the button stopper device 560 is in the blocking state, the stopper piece 561 of the button stopper device 560 has a front surface of the front side wall portion 513 and a rear surface of the push button member 550. The one end of the stopper piece 561 contacts the front surface of the front side wall portion 513 and the other end contacts the rear surface of the push button member 550, thereby preventing the cover body 530 from moving backward. . By adopting such a configuration, the stress generated when the push button member 550 is pressed in the blocked state can be transmitted to the front side wall portion 513 through the stopper piece 561, and the stress is distributed.

  The operation switch mechanism 502 corresponding to the operation switch unit 40 is configured by the cover body 530, the cover spring member, the push button member 550, the button spring member 555, and the stopper devices 540 and 560 described in detail above.

  Here, the relationship between the upper plate body 510 and the cover body 530 will be supplementarily described. The cover body 530 is configured such that the rear end portion of the top plate portion 532 does not protrude rearward (storage region RE side) from the front side wall portion 513 in a state of waiting at the initial position. When the cover body 530 is moved rearward, the top plate portion 532 protrudes toward the storage region RE as shown by a one-dot chain line in FIG. As described above, when waiting at the initial position, the protrusion to the storage area RE side is avoided, and the top plate portion 532 protrudes to the storage area RE side when a backward pressing operation is performed. This is a device for realizing stabilization of the holding posture of the cover body 530 by the front side wall portion 513 and avoiding the compression of the storage area RE due to securing the moving area of the cover body 530.

  However, when the top board portion 532 protrudes toward the storage area RE, there is a possibility that the movement of the top board section 532 or the movement of the game ball may be hindered by the game balls existing in the storage area RE. is there. Therefore, one of the features of the present embodiment is that a device for suppressing the occurrence of these various inconveniences is provided. Hereinafter, a configuration according to the feature will be described with reference to FIG.

  The storage area RE is partitioned forward and backward by the partition part 522 described above. For this reason, even if the game ball being stored (hereinafter referred to as “storage ball”) is pushed backward by the top plate portion 532, pressure is transmitted to the stored balls existing in the alignment passage 523. And the inconvenience that the supply of the game ball is stopped when the game ball is launched is less likely to occur.

  When the structure that secures the function of taking in the game ball by the partition portion 522 is adopted as described above, the influence of the movement of the cover body 530 can be suppressed from affecting the alignment passage 523, but the partition portion 522 in the storage region RE In the region on the front side, the influence of the movement of the cover body 530 is easily achieved. In view of this, the partition portion 522 and the top plate portion 532 are provided with various devices for suppressing such influence.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22B, the top plate portion 532 is positioned above the upper end portion of the partition portion 522, and the top plate portion 532 with respect to the bottom portion 511 and the upper end portion of the partition portion 522 The height difference H is set larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball. Thereby, even when the top plate portion 532 slides backward, the inconvenience that the stored ball pushed backward by the top plate portion 532 can be used between the partition portion 522 is suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), the portion located in front of the partition portion 522 at the rear end portion of the top plate portion 532 has a linear shape extending left and right, whereas the partition portion The front surface of 522 has a curved surface that is convex forward of the gaming machine, and the distance between the rear end portion of the top plate portion 532 and the front surface of the partition portion 522 gradually increases toward the side. More specifically, the distance dimension between the rear end portion of the top plate portion 532 and the front surface of the partition portion 522 is gradually increased toward the upstream side (the game ball discharge port 521 side) in the storage region RE.

  For this reason, even if the stored ball is sandwiched between the top plate portion 532 and the partition portion 522 due to the rearward movement of the top plate portion 532, the game ball moves along the front surface of the partition portion 522. It will be guided to the side, that is, the direction crossing the moving direction of the top plate portion 532. Thereby, it can suppress that the movement of the top-plate part 532 is prevented. Furthermore, the game ball moving along the front surface of the partition portion 522 is pushed to the upstream side of the storage area RE, and it is possible to suppress the transmission of the pressing force to the game ball on the downstream side.

(Operation mode of operation switch mechanism 502)
In the present embodiment, the operation mode of the operation switch mechanism 502 is changed according to the game situation. Therefore, the operation mode of the operation switch mechanism 502 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic view showing an operation mode of the operation switch mechanism 502.

  First, the operation mode in the normal state of the operation switch mechanism 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 24A, when the operation switch mechanism 502 is in the normal state, the stopper piece 541 of the cover stopper device 540 is waiting at the blocking position, and the pressing operation of the cover body 530 is performed. It is regulated. On the other hand, since the stopper piece 541 of the button stopper device 560 is waiting at the allowable position, the pushing operation of the push button member 550 is permitted.

  When the portion of the push button member 550 exposed from the opening 534 is pushed rearwardly, the push button member 550 is pushed by the button spring member 555 as shown in FIG. 24 (a) → FIG. 24 (b). Slide backwards against the urging force of. Then, when the rear surface of the push button member 550 comes into contact with the front side wall portion 513 of the upper plate body 510, further pushing operation is restricted. When the push button member 550 reaches the maximum pressing position where the push button member 550 contacts the front side wall portion 513, the push button member 550 is detected by the detection sensor 557 (see FIG. 23B), and the detection sensor 557 transfers to the display control device 410. A detection signal is output. Thereafter, by releasing the hand from the push button member 550, the push button member 550 returns to the position before the movement (initial position) by the urging force of the button spring member 555.

  Next, a case where the operation of the cover body 530 is allowed will be described. When a preset condition is satisfied, the normal state is switched to the extended state in which the operation area in the operation switch mechanism 502 is expanded. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 24A to 24C, the stopper piece 541 of the cover stopper device 540 moves from the blocking position to the allowable position, and the movement restriction of the cover body 530 is released. Thus, the operation area is changed from the push button member 550 to the push button member 550 + the cover body 530.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (c) → FIG. 24 (d), when the cover body 530 is pushed backward, the cover body 530 slides backward against the biasing force of the cover spring member. Further, when the bottom plate portion 531 of the cover body 530 comes into contact with the inner wall 539 of the slit 538, further pushing operation is restricted.

  At this time, the push button member 550 is pushed by the front plate portion 533 of the cover body 530, the push button member 550 also moves rearward following the cover body 530, and the bottom plate portion 531 of the cover body 530 is moved to the back wall 539. Simultaneously with the contact, the push button member 550 contacts the front side wall portion 513 of the upper plate body 510. The movement of the cover body 530 (movement of the push button member 550) is detected by the detection sensor 557 when the push button member 550 reaches the maximum pressing position where the push button member 550 comes into contact with the front side wall portion 513. A detection signal is output at.

  Thereafter, when the cover body 530 is released, the cover body 530 is returned to the position before the operation (initial position) by the urging force of the cover spring member, and the urging force of the button spring member 555 is also applied to the push button member 550. To return to the position before the operation (initial position). In this way, after the cover body 530 and the push button member 550 are respectively returned to the initial positions, the cover stopper device 540 is blocked as shown in FIG. 22D → FIG. This prevents the cover body 530 from moving. That is, the operation switch mechanism 502 is switched from the expanded state to the normal state.

  In the normal state and the expanded state described in detail above, at least the former operation of the push button member 550 and the cover body 530 is allowed. On the other hand, it is possible to switch to a state in which the operation of the push button member 550 and the cover body 530 is disabled, that is, a reduced state in which the operation region is reduced compared to the normal state.

  Specifically, a drive signal is output from the display control device 410 to the button stopper device 560 (see FIG. 23B), and as shown in FIGS. 22A to 22E. The stopper piece 561 of the button stopper device 560 is disposed at the blocking position. Thereby, the pressing operation of the push button member 550 is restricted. In such a state, the pressing operation of the push button member 550 and the pressing operation of the cover body 530 are both restricted.

  Thereafter, when the output of the drive signal to the button stopper device 560 is stopped as the game progresses, the stopper piece 561 of the button stopper device 560 is moved to the allowable position as shown in FIG. 22 (e) → FIG. 22 (a). Returning, the operation restriction of the push button member 550 is released.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

  On the input side of the display control device 410 (specifically, the MPU 412), there is a position for the push button member 550 provided in the ball detection sensor 36 and the operation switch mechanism 502 disposed in the front door side upper dish passage 35 of the frame body 20. Detection means is connected.

  Based on the detection information from the ball detection sensor 36, it is possible to determine whether or not the upper plate 501 is full.

  The position detecting means includes a detection sensor 557A that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the display control device 410 when the push button member 550 is present at the maximum pressed position, and the push button member 550 is present at the initial position. The detection sensor 557B that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the display control device 410.

  Stop devices 540 and 560 provided in the operation switch mechanism 502 are connected to the output side of the MPU 412. The stopper devices 540 and 560 are operated by the drive signal output from the display control device 410.

  Next, among the various processes executed by the MPU 412 of the display control apparatus 410, various processes related to setting of the operation corresponding effect related to the operation switch mechanism 502 will be described.

  First, the command determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Command judgment processing)
In the command determination process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not a change start command is input. Various commands input from the voice lamp control device 143 are stored in a command storage area provided in the RAM 414, and are erased by being read out in the command determination process.

  If the change start command has been input, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the change start command includes information related to the continuous operation support effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value information of the first variation type counter CS1 included in the variation start command is included in the information on the value group for continuous operation corresponding effects stored in the ROM 413.

  If the information related to the continuous operation corresponding effect is included, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the upper plate 501 is full. Specifically, it is determined based on the detection information from the ball detection sensor 36 whether the upper plate 501 is full.

  If a negative determination is made in step S603, that is, if it is determined that the upper plate 501 is not full, a specific process for the first continuous operation-compatible effect is executed in step S604. In the specific process for the first continuous operation corresponding effect, the first continuous operation corresponding effect flag is stored in the first continuous operation corresponding effect flag storage area among the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S603, that is, if it is determined that the upper plate 501 is full, a specific process for the second continuous operation-compatible effect is executed in step S605. In the specific process for the second continuous operation corresponding effect, the second continuous operation corresponding effect flag is stored in the second continuous operation corresponding effect flag storage area among the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the cover body 530 of the upper plate 501 is utilized as the operation means, it is not preferable that the pushing operation of the cover body 530 is hindered by the game balls stored in the upper plate 501. Therefore, in step S603, when the upper plate 501 is full, the first continuous operation corresponding effect corresponding to the expansion of the operation area is not performed, that is, the second continuous operation is supported as an alternative effect. By performing the production, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience.

  In the specific process of steps S604 and S605, the following process is executed along with the storage of the continuous operation corresponding effect flag. That is, based on the random number generated by the MPU 412, the reference number determination table (see FIG. 16B) stored in the various table storage areas 421 of the ROM 413, and the presence / absence of jackpot occurrence, The number of times is determined. In such a determination process, when the jackpot is won, the reference number is likely to increase as compared to the case where the jackpot is not won. Note that the reference number of times is determined within a range that can be substantially achieved within the continuous operation corresponding effect execution period in consideration of the return speed of the push button member to the standby position, the detection information reading timing, and the like.

  When it is determined in step S602 that the information related to the continuous operation corresponding effect is not included, or after the specific processing in steps S604 and S605 is executed, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, the variation display specific process is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S601 that the change start command has not been input, the process proceeds to step S607, and after executing other specific processing, this command determination processing ends.

  In addition, about each process of step S606, S607, since it is the same as that of each process of step S306, S307 in 1st Embodiment, description is used.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, when the continuous operation-corresponding effect is executed, the first continuous operation-corresponding effect and the first effect are determined depending on whether the upper plate 501 is full or not. Either of the two continuous operation-compatible effects is selected. About the effect corresponding to both continuous operation, although the point that subsequent specific single operation is validated by performing continuous operation is common, the aspect of continuous operation-> specific single operation differs.

  Specifically, for the second continuous operation corresponding effect, when the number of operations of the push button member 550 reaches the specified number of operations, the operation of the push button member 550 is validated as a specific single operation. On the other hand, for the first continuous operation corresponding effect, the operation of the cover body 530 is validated as a specific single operation when the number of operations of the push button member 550 reaches the specified number of operations. In other words, in the second continuous operation compatible effect, there is no change in the operation area by the continuous operation → specific single operation, but in the first continuous operation compatible effect, the operation area is expanded by the continuous operation → specific single operation. It is different.

  Since the second continuous operation corresponding effect is the same as the continuous operation corresponding effect (see FIGS. 19 and 20) shown in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted, and the process for the first continuous operation corresponding effect will be described. To do.

(Processing for production corresponding to the first continuous operation)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, in the first continuous operation corresponding effect processing, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being generated in which the first continuous operation corresponding effect is generated. If the variable display is not being performed, the first continuous operation corresponding effect processing is terminated as it is, and if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S702.

  In step S702, it is determined whether or not the suggestion of the continuous operation has been performed. If it is determined in step S702 that the continuous operation has not been suggested, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing for suggesting the continuous operation. If it is not the start timing for suggesting the continuous operation, the continuous operation corresponding effect production process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the start timing for suggesting the repetitive operation, in step S704, the setting process of the repetitive operation suggestion image is executed. In a succeeding step S505, a process for setting a continuous operation waiting state is executed.

  Note that the processes in steps S702 to S705 are the same as the processes in steps S502 to S505 in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  If it is determined in step S702 that the continuous operation has been suggested, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether or not a continuous operation waiting state is set. When it is in the state of waiting for repeated operations, the process proceeds to step S707, and it is determined whether or not the push button member 550 of the operation switch mechanism 502 has been operated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, an operation accepting image setting process is executed in subsequent step S708, and the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, it is determined whether the number of repeated operations has reached the specified number of operations determined in the command determination process. If an affirmative determination is made in step S709, the process advances to step S710 to perform a process for setting a continuous operation completion image.

  Note that the processes in steps S706 to S710 are the same as the processes in steps S506 to S510 described in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In a succeeding step S711, a specific single operation suggestion image setting process is executed. By performing such processing, a specific single operation suggestion image that prompts the player to operate the push button member 550 of the operation switch mechanism 502 once is displayed on the display screen 94a. For example, as the single operation suggestion image, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and characters such as “Please operate the push button” are displayed. The suggestion of the specific single operation is not limited to that on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, but is performed on the sound output from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of that on the display screen. Also good. The image set by the specific single operation suggestion image setting process is displayed at the timing after the continuous operation completion image is displayed over a predetermined period.

  After executing the processing of step S711, the process proceeds to step S712, and it is determined whether or not the current variation display time is a variation display time corresponding to jackpot. When an affirmative determination is made in step S712, the process proceeds to step S713, and a movement restriction release process for the cover body 530 is executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the cover stopper device 540 to switch the cover stopper device 540 to an allowable state. Thereby, the pressing operation of the cover body 530 is permitted, and the operation area is expanded from the push button member 550 to the push button member 550 + the cover body 530.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S712, that is, if it is determined that the current fluctuation display time is a deviation-related fluctuation display time, the process proceeds to step S714. In step S714, a movement restriction process for the push button member 550 is executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the button stopper device 560 to switch the button stopper device 560 to the blocking state. Thereby, the pressing operation of the push button member 550 is restricted, and the operation area is reduced so that the push button member 550 → None.

  In addition, when the driving process of the stopper devices 540 and 560 is executed in steps S713 and S714, the stopper device 540 is displayed after the continuous operation completion image is displayed until the specific single operation suggestion image is displayed. , 560, the output timing of the drive signal is set so that the state switching is completed.

  After executing the process of step S713 or step S714, the process proceeds to step S715, and a process for setting a specific single operation waiting state is performed. Then, in the subsequent step S716, after canceling the continuous operation waiting state, the first continuous operation corresponding effect processing is ended. Note that the processes in steps S715 and S716 are the same as the processes in steps S511 and S515 in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If a negative determination is made in any one of steps S707 and S709, that is, if the repetitive operation is not performed or if the repetitive operation has been performed, the number of operations has not reached the specified operation number, step S717 is performed. It is determined whether or not it is the reception end timing of the continuous operation. Specifically, with reference to the value of the counter for continuous operation reception period provided in the timing counter area 426 of the RAM 414, it is determined whether or not the reception end timing is reached. As for the counter for continuous operation reception period, a predetermined value is input when the processing for waiting for continuous operation is performed, and is updated (subtracted by “1” each time the determination processing in step S707 is executed). ) When this value becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S513, and when it is not “0”, a negative determination is made.

  If a negative determination is made in step S717, the first continuous operation-compatible effect process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S717, the process proceeds to step S718 to execute a reception end suggestion image setting process. As a result, an image indicating that the acceptance period of the continuous operation has ended is displayed on the display screen 94a. Then, after executing the release process of step S716, the first continuous operation corresponding effect process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S706 again, if a negative determination is made in step S706, that is, if it is determined not to be in a state of waiting for a repetitive operation, the process proceeds to step S719. In step S719, it is determined whether or not it is waiting for a specific single operation. If it is waiting for a specific single operation, the process proceeds to step S720. In step S720, it is determined whether the wait period has elapsed.

  Note that the processes in steps S719 and S720 are the same as the processes in steps S516 and S517 of the continuous operation corresponding effect process in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S720, that is, if it is determined that it is not in the wait period, the process proceeds to step S721. In step S721, it is determined whether or not a specific single operation has been performed, that is, whether or not the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 has been operated, and the movement of the push button member 550 is restricted (the reduced state described above). ) To determine whether or not the operation waiting period has elapsed. If it is determined that the specific single operation has been performed, or if it is determined that the operation waiting period has elapsed in the reduced state, the process proceeds to step S722.

  The presence / absence of the specific single operation is monitored by the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process in the MPU 412 as described above. In step S721, when the processing result of the monitoring processing is a processing result indicating that the operation of the push button member 320 has occurred (specifically, the operation is performed in the operation flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414). If the presence flag is stored), an affirmative determination is made and processing proceeds to step S722.

  In step S722, a specific single operation waiting state release process is executed. Specifically, the specific single operation waiting flag stored in the specific single operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414 is deleted.

  Thereafter, a result display image setting process is executed in step S723. By executing the process of step S723, the result display image is displayed on the display screen 94a. As the display of the image, for example, when the variable display time is a variable display time in which a jackpot state occurs, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot state, When the variable display time is a variable display time in which the big hit state does not occur, the moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character is the same as before the operation suggesting image is started.

  After performing the process of step S723 or when making a negative determination in any of steps S719, S720, and S721, the process proceeds to step S724. In step S724, it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display. If a negative determination is made in step S724, the first continuous operation-compatible effect process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S724, that is, if it is the end timing of the variable display, an end display image setting process is executed in step S725, and the first continuous operation corresponding effect processing is ended. .

  In the setting process of the end display image in step S725, when the fluctuation display time is a fluctuation display time in which a big hit state occurs, display setting is performed so that a moving image display that the occurrence of the big hit state is confirmed is performed. . In this case, when the result display image setting process is executed and the moving image display is set to correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot state in the result display image setting process, The moving image display is set so as to have a series of contents with the moving image display. On the other hand, when the operation incomplete image setting process is executed, there is a moving image display that dramatically switches from the incomplete operation image to a moving image display indicating that the occurrence of the big hit state is confirmed. .

  After executing the process of step S725, the process for returning the operation switch mechanism 502 to the normal state is executed in step S726, and the first continuous operation corresponding effect process is terminated. In the return processing in step S725, the return flag is stored in the return flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 425. In the timer interrupt process described above, when this return flag is stored, a process for returning the operation switch mechanism 502 to the normal state is performed. In the return process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing after the game result is displayed, and when it is determined that it is the timing after the game result is displayed, the following process is performed.

  First, based on detection information from the position detection sensor 557A, it is determined whether or not the push button member 550 and the cover body 530 have returned to the maximum projecting position. When it is determined that the push button member 320 and the cover body 530 have not returned to the maximum projecting position, the return processing is ended as it is. That is, when the player continues the pressing operation by placing a hand on the push button member 550 or the cover body 530, the return to the normal state is avoided.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the push button member 550 and the cover body 530 are returned to the maximum projecting position, the output of the drive signal to the stopper devices 540 and 560 is stopped, and the button stopper device 560 is allowed to be in the permitted state. The stopper device 540 is set to the blocking state. As a result, the pressing operation of the cover body 530 is restricted. After the drive signal output stop process is executed, the return flags stored in the various flag storage areas 425 are erased, and the return process ends.

  When the return flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 425, the operation area expansion effect is restricted, and when the continuous operation corresponding effect is executed, the first continuous operation corresponding effect is replaced with the first effect. An effect corresponding to two continuous operations will be executed. However, if the game operation in which the operation area expansion effect has been performed ends and the next game operation is not started, if the pressing operation is not performed again until the next game operation is started. Is set to complete the return process. For this reason, when the return process is completed as it is after the game result is displayed, the operation area expansion effect is not restricted in the next game round.

  Here, the flow of the first continuous operation corresponding effect will be briefly described focusing on the difference from the continuous operation corresponding effect in the first embodiment.

  At a predetermined timing after the symbol variation display is started and the display is shifted to the reach display, a message suggesting repeated operations is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. In accordance with this, the operation of the push button member 550 is validated. When the push button member 550 is repeatedly operated, the display modes of the operation reception number display portion 94b and the display screen 94a change according to the number of operations. When the number of operations reaches the specified number of operations, an image that prompts a specific single operation is displayed on the display screen 94a. However, the greater the specified number of operations, the higher the expected number of occurrences of jackpots. The operation is repeated with the expectation that many operations can be performed.

  After the image prompting the specific single operation is displayed, the cover body 530 can be operated when the jackpot is won, and the cover body 530 cannot be operated when the jackpot is not won. Become. In these two cases, since there is no difference in appearance, the player cannot determine whether or not the jackpot has been won until the cover body 530 is actually operated. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won based on the feeling transmitted to the hand when the operation of the cover body 530 is attempted. When the specific single operation is performed or when the acceptance period of the specific single operation has elapsed, the result is clearly displayed on the display screen 94a.

  When the operation area is expanded, the return process is executed on the condition that the cover body 530 is returned to the position before the operation.

  In the second embodiment described above in detail, the following effects can be expected in addition to the effects similar to the effects shown in the first embodiment. That is, the player can acquire the right to operate the specific single operation (cover body 530) by performing the continuous operation. At this time, whether or not the specific single operation is possible is suggested depending on how many times the continuous operation satisfies the specified number of times. Thereby, a player's attention degree with respect to continuous operation can be improved suitably.

  Furthermore, it is not known whether or not the cover body 530 is moved until the cover body 530 is actually pushed because there is no difference in appearance. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree with respect to specific single operation.

<Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, the operation mode of the operation switch unit and the operation corresponding effect relating to the operation switch unit are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 27, the configuration and operation mode of the operation switch unit 40A in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 27A is a schematic outside plan view of the operation switch unit 40A, FIG. 27B is an external schematic view showing the internal structure of the operation switch unit 40A, and FIG. 27C shows the number of operations, the operation area AE, and the operation stroke S. It is a graph which shows the relationship.

  In the following description, the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be referred to, and the description of the configuration will be simplified or omitted, and the difference from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the first embodiment, the solenoid 340 is employed as the driving means for the shutter member 330. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a stepping motor 340A is employed as a driving unit for the shutter member 330 (see FIG. 27B). The stepping motor 340A is electrically connected to the display control device 410 in the same manner as the solenoid 340, and the number of rotations and the rotation angle are controlled by the number of pulses of the drive signal input from the display control device 410. ing. By controlling the rotation speed and rotation angle in this way, the shutter member 330 can be stopped at an arbitrary position (intermediate position) from the initial position (closed position) to the maximum extended position (open position). Yes. In other words, by adopting the stepping motor 340A as the driving means, the position of the shutter member 330 can be switched in a stepwise manner not only at the initial position and the maximum extended position but also at a number of positions including both positions. It is possible.

  Further, the shutter member 330 is a portion that is easily touched by the player during operation or the like, and there is a concern that the position may be displaced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the shutter detection sensor 355A is employed as means for monitoring whether or not the shutter member 330 is in the initial position, and when the shutter member 330 is returned to the initial position, a stepping motor is used. A configuration is adopted in which output of a drive signal for returning to 340A is started, and then output of the drive signal is stopped based on a detection signal from the shutter detection sensor 355A. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a failure in the rendering function due to, for example, an abnormal movement of the shutter member 330 when the operation area AE is expanded.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of the effect relating to the operation switch unit is different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, when an effect corresponding to a repetitive operation is executed, the operation area is expanded every time an operation is effectively received in a state where the next operation is possible. This suggests to the player that the operation has been accepted effectively and that the next operation is allowed. In this way, by giving a suggestion function such as that the next operation is permitted to the operation of the operation switch unit 40A, it is possible to make not only a visual suggestion but also a tactile suggestion to the player. It has become. Since the visual and auditory suggestion function is exhibited by the operation switch unit 40A, it is possible to improve the suggestion function while suppressing complication of the configuration. In the following description, an effect in which the operation area AE is expanded for each operation is referred to as a “continuous expansion effect”.

  As already introduced, a large number of opening positions of the shutter member 330 are set in the operation switch unit 40A so that the operation area AE is expanded in multiple stages. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 27C, the first opening position, the second opening position to the eighth opening position, and the ninth opening position are set in the entire movement range between the initial position and the maximum opening position. Thus, the shutter member 330 moves to the adjacent open position (open position on the side where the operation area becomes larger) by effectively receiving the operation by the player in a state where the next operation is possible. Thereby, the stepwise expansion of the operation area AE is realized.

  As described above, since the operation area AE is increased, the access to the push button member 320 can be facilitated. Thereby, when performing a continuous expansion effect, it is hard to produce the inconvenience that the operation corresponding effect is ended in the middle (finished incompletely) by making an operation mistake during the repeated operation.

  The movement amount of the shutter member 330 is constant between the initial position and the ninth opening position, and is larger than the movement amount between the respective positions at the ninth opening position to the maximum opening position. Is set to However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of movement between all positions, that is, the amount of expansion can be the same.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, the operation surface portion 322 of the push button member 320 has a spherical shape that protrudes upward, and the shutter member 330 comes into contact with the operation surface portion 322, thereby the shutter member 330. Protrusion of is regulated. For this reason, when the operation area AE is expanded, the shutter member 330 moves and the contact portion with respect to the operation surface portion 322 changes, so that the operation stroke of the push button member 320 increases. As the operation stroke amount increases in this way, the period required for one operation becomes longer, and the degree of attention to each operation in the repetitive operation is reached, for example, when the predetermined number of times is reached by the repetitive operation entrusted with momentum. It can suppress that it falls.

  In particular, the rate of increase of the stroke accompanying the movement of the shutter member 330 is not constant and increases as the maximum open position is approached (see FIG. 27C). This makes it possible to increase the independence of each operation when the number of operations increases, while enabling a quick operation with a small number of operations.

  The stepwise expansion of the operation area AE described in detail above is executed in a continuous operation-compatible effect. When performing such an effect, the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 selects the specified number of operations, thereby determining how many steps the above-described expansion of the operation area AE is. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 28, a configuration related to selection of the prescribed number of operations will be described. FIG. 28 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a table for selecting the number of specified operations, FIG. 28 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display time and the effect mode, and FIG. 28 (c) is suggested by the number of specified operations and the effect. It is the schematic which shows the relationship with the expectation degree of the jackpot result.

  First, the selection of the prescribed number of operations will be described with reference to FIG. When selecting the prescribed operation count, the value of the prescribed count selection counter provided in the other various counter areas 428 (see FIG. 12) of the RAM 414 of the display control device 410 and the operation regulation shown in FIG. Refer to the number selection table. The counter for selecting the specified number of times is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the value is updated within a range of “0” to “99” by being updated by a periodic process executed by the display control device 410.

  The specified operation count selection table is stored in various table storage areas 421 of the ROM 413 of the display control device 410, and the specified operation count is set corresponding to the value of the specified count selection counter. In the MPU 412 of the display control device 410, the value of the specified number of times selection counter is compared with the specified number of times of operation selection table stored in the various table storage areas 421 of the ROM 413 of the display control device 410, so Simply referred to as “prescribed number of times”) is selected from the range of “1 time” to “10 times”.

  Further, in the specified number of operations selection table, the selection mode is different depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the table to be referred to is different when the lottery result is a jackpot result and when the lottery result is an outlier result. In FIGS. 28A and 28B, both tables are collectively displayed for convenience of explanation.

  It is easy to select a relatively large number of times as the specified number of times in the specified number-of-operations selection table for the jackpot result, and it is easy to select a relatively small number of times in the specified number-of-operations selection table for the missed result. That is, when the result is a jackpot result, it is easy to select a larger number of times as the specified number of times than when the result is a loss result. For example, if the value of the specified number of times selection counter is “60”, “9 times” is selected as the specified number of times when the jackpot result is obtained, and as the specified number of times when the result is an outlier result. “3 times” is selected.

  By selecting the specified number of times in this way, there is a correlation between the specified number of times at the time of performance execution and the winning expectation degree of jackpot, and a large number is selected as the specified number of times, resulting in a jackpot result A configuration with high expectation is realized. This is because, when the expectation level of jackpot is low, many operations are unnecessarily urged, and the attention to the operation (operation switch unit 40A) is reduced by giving the player the feeling that it is annoying. It is a device to suppress.

  In the present embodiment, the relationship between the jackpot winning expectation degree and the specified number of times is not proportional, and a configuration in which the rate of increase in the degree of expectation increases at a specific number of times is adopted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), the specified number of times is “1” to “5”, “5” to “8”, “8” to “9”. , “9 times” to “10 times” have different expected rate of increase. For this reason, the player performs the operation in expectation of reaching the “6th” or “9th” increase rate of increase, and it can be expected that the operation will not be retired.

  In addition, regarding the expectation level of the jackpot winning, the “9th” is the maximum, and when reaching the “10th”, the expectation is slightly lowered. As a result, the player expects that the continuous operation will be completed at the “9th” time, that is, expects not to reach the “10th” time. However, there is a switch from a game in which operations are performed with the expectation that many operations will be accepted to a game in which operations are performed in the hope that no further operations will be accepted. Thereby, a tension can be suitably given to the player even during the “9th” operation.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 28B and 28C, the relationship between the repetitive operation and effects executed on the symbol display device 94 (display screen 94a) will be described.

  As shown in the first embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10, the variation display time is determined by the second variation type counter CS2. The fluctuation display time is roughly divided into a first fluctuation display time, a second fluctuation display time longer than the first fluctuation display time, and a third fluctuation display time longer than the second fluctuation display time. The first variation display time is completely off, the second variation display time corresponds to reach display (specifically, normal reach display), and the third variation display time corresponds to reach display (specifically, super reach display). Note that the super reach display is more likely to occur during a big win than the normal reach display. For this reason, when the super reach display is generated, the expectation of occurrence of the jackpot is increased.

  Execution conditions are determined so that the operation-corresponding effects are executed at least in the variable display times that are reach display, and the specified number of operations set to be “1” to “10” is performed. When it is completed or when the operation acceptance valid period ends, it is determined according to the variable display time whether to end with normal reach or end with super reach. That is, when the second variation display time is selected as the variation display time, the variation display time is completed without developing to the super reach with the normal reach, and the third variation display time is selected as the variation display time. In this case, the variable display time is completed by developing from normal reach to super reach.

  In particular, when “10 times” is selected as the specified number of times, the production mode is partially different from the case where “1 time” to “9 times” are selected. If the variable display time is the second variable display time, the operation area is expanded to the maximum on condition that the result is a jackpot result, and the jackpot finalizing effect is executed from the normal reach, and the result is a missed result. As a condition, the operation area is reduced so as to be minimized, and a definite effect is executed out of normal reach. On the other hand, when the variable display time is the third variable display time, the operation area is maintained as it is, and the process proceeds to super reach. That is, the game result is not immediately notified, but is notified at the end of the variable display time.

(Continuous expansion effect processing)
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29, the process for continuous expansion effects as an operation corresponding effect executed by the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 will be described. The continuous expansion effect process is a process for executing an effect of expanding the operation area AE of the operation switch unit 40A based on the above-described continuous operation, and is executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

  In the process for continuous extended effect, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being generated in which the continuous extended effect is generated. If the variable display is not being performed, the continuous expansion effect process is terminated as it is, and if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S802.

  In step S <b> 802, it is determined whether a suggestion of continuous operation has been performed. If it is determined in step S802 that the continuous operation has not been suggested, the process proceeds to step S803. In step S <b> 803, it is determined whether it is a start timing for suggesting a continuous operation. If it is not the start timing for suggesting the continuous operation, the continuous operation corresponding effect production process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is the start timing of suggesting the repetitive operation, in step S804, a setting operation of the repetitive operation suggestion image is executed. As an image for suggesting repeated operations, for example, a character image of a girl is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a, and characters such as “Take a button together!” Are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 94a. In accordance with this, the left, middle, and right symbols displayed in the center of the display screen 94a are reduced and displayed on the upper portion of the display screen 94a.

  The suggestion of the repetitive operation is not limited to that on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, but may be performed on the sound output from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of that on the display screen 94a. Also good.

  In the subsequent step S805, the process for setting the continuous operation waiting state is executed. Specifically, the continuous operation waiting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414 of the display control device 410, and the continuous extended effect processing is terminated. .

  Incidentally, since each process of step S802 to step S805 is the same as each process of step S502 to S505 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Returning to the description of step S802, if an affirmative determination is made in step S802, that is, if it is determined that the continuous operation has been suggested, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, it is determined whether or not a continuous operation waiting state is set. When it is in the state of waiting for repeated operations, the process proceeds to step S807, and it is determined whether or not the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40A has been operated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the value of the counter operation counter area (that is, the operation number counter) 427 is updated in a subsequent step S808. Specifically, “1” is added to the value in the counter operation counter area. After performing step S808, the process proceeds to step S809, where it is determined whether the number of operations has reached the specified number selected in the command determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the specified number of times determined with reference to the specified number-of-operations selection table and the value of the counter operation counter area 427 are the same.

  If a negative determination is made in step S809, an operation reception image setting process is executed in step S810, and the process proceeds to step S811. Then, after the operation area expansion process is executed in step S811, the continuous expansion effect process is terminated.

  In the operation area expansion process, output of a drive signal is started to the stepping motor 340A of the operation switch unit 40A. By operating the stepping motor 340A based on this drive signal, the shutter member 330 moves in the opening direction, specifically toward the adjacent open position, and the operation area AE is expanded and the operation stroke S is increased.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S809, that is, if it is determined that the number of operations matches the specified number, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, a process for setting a continuous operation completion image is executed. For example, as the continuous operation completion image, characters such as “COMPLETE!” Are displayed instead of the character and the operation count suggestion image. The suggestion of completion of the repetitive operation is not limited to that on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, but may be performed on the sound output from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of that on the display screen 94a. May be.

  After performing the process of step S812, it progresses to step S813 and performs the cancellation | release process of a continuous operation waiting state. Specifically, the continuous operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 of the RAM 414 of the display control device 410 is deleted.

  In a succeeding step S814, it is determined whether or not the specified operation count is the maximum specified count (“10 times”). If a negative determination is made in step S814, the process for transitioning to the normal reach display is executed in step S815, and then the continuous extended effect process is terminated. By performing the process of step S815, in the case of the variable display times corresponding to the normal reach, the state is changed from the state in which the consecutive operation suggestion image is displayed to the state in which the normal reach display is performed. Specifically, in the case of the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach, the operation completion message displayed at the center of the display screen 94a is not displayed, and each of the messages displayed at the top of the display screen 94a is reduced accordingly. The symbol returns to the center of the display screen 94a. In the case of the variable display times corresponding to the super reach, the state is changed from the state in which the continuous operation suggestion image is displayed to the state in which the super reach display is performed. Specifically, the operation completion message displayed at the center of the display screen 94a is hidden, and the character image is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a accordingly.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S814, the process proceeds to step S816, and after executing the special setting process for the maximum specified number of times, this continuous extended effect process is terminated. Here, the special setting process for the maximum specified number of times will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Special setting process for the maximum specified number of times)
In the maximum specified number of times special setting process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the final operation by the player corresponds to the operation area expansion. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the present variation display time corresponds to the jackpot result and the second variation display time is selected as the variation display time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the operation region maximum expansion process is executed in the subsequent step S902.

  In the operation region maximum expansion process, a process for moving the shutter member 330 waiting at the ninth opening position to the maximum opening position is performed. Specifically, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 340A is started, and the output of the drive signal is stopped when the shutter member 330 reaches the maximum open position. In step S811, the position management of the shutter member 330 is performed based on the number of steps of the drive signal (the amount of movement is defined), but in this step S902, the position management mode of the shutter member 330 is different.

  After the process of step S902 is executed, the jackpot result preceding display image setting process is executed in the subsequent step S903, and the special setting process for the maximum specified number of times is terminated. In the process of setting the jackpot result preceding display image, an image indicating that the jackpot is won (for example, a message such as “Congratulations!”) Is set. The image set in this process is displayed on the display screen 94a immediately after the shutter member 330 reaches the maximum open position.

  When the operation area is expanded, even if the player keeps his hand on the push button member 320, the shutter member 330 is less likely to be prevented from moving in the opening direction. The inconvenience of not reaching the position and not displaying the big hit result preceding display image is less likely to occur. Incidentally, when the shutter member 330 does not reach the maximum open position, the display of the preceding display image of the jackpot result is canceled, but even in this case, the player can visually or tactilely move the shutter member 330. It is possible to know that the player has won the jackpot. In other words, the advance notification function for generating jackpots is secured.

  Returning to the description of step S901, if a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the final operation corresponds to the reduction of the operation area AE. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second variation display time is selected as the variation display time while the variation display time corresponds to the deviation result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, an operation area reduction process is executed in the subsequent step S905. In the operation area reduction process, a process for moving the shutter member 330 waiting at the ninth open position to the initial position is performed. Specifically, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 340A is started, and the output of the drive signal is stopped when the shutter member 330 reaches the initial position.

  After the processing of step S905 is executed, in step S906 that follows, the setting process for the detachment result preceding display image is executed, and the special setting processing for the maximum specified number of times is terminated. In the setting process of the display result display image of the detachment result, setting processing of an image (for example, a message such as “sorry ...”) indicating that the jackpot is not won is performed. The image set in this process is displayed on the display screen 94a immediately after the shutter member 330 reaches the initial position.

  As described above, when the second variable display time is selected as the variable display time and the maximum specified number of times (“10 times”) is selected as the specified number of operations, the result of this variable display time is displayed as the variable display. It is specified immediately after the operation is completed without waiting for the end of the operation.

  Returning to the description of step S904 again, if a negative determination is made in step S904, the process for shifting to the normal reach display is executed in step S907, and then the special setting process for the maximum specified number of times is terminated. The process in step S907 is similar to the process in step S815, but when the negative determination is repeated in steps S901 and S904, it is determined that the variable display time is the third variable display time. To do. Therefore, the shift to the reach display does not shift to the normal reach but shifts to the super reach.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart of FIG. 29, if a negative determination is made in step S807, that is, if it is determined that the operation switch unit 40A is not operated, the process proceeds to step S817. In step S817, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the effective period of the continuous operation set in step S805. If a negative determination is made in step S817, the continuous extended effect process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S817, that is, if the repetitive operation is not performed or if the repetitive operation has been performed but the number of times has not reached the specified number, the repetitive operation is performed in subsequent step S818. Executes the wait release process. Specifically, the continuous operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 of the RAM 414 is deleted. In step S819, after executing the setting process of the consecutive operation incomplete image, the continuous extended effect process is executed, and the continuous extended effect process is terminated.

  By executing the setting process of the continuous operation incomplete image, a message (for example, “INCOMPLETE!”) Is displayed on the display screen 94a indicating that the effective period has ended without the continuous operation being completed.

  Returning to the description of step S806, if a negative determination is made in step S806, the process proceeds to step S820. In step S820, it is determined whether it is the display end timing of the operation completion image or the operation incomplete image. If an affirmative determination is made in step S820, after performing the image display process set in each process of steps S815, S903, S906, and S907, the continuous expansion effect ends. By executing the processing of step S821, a character image or the like is displayed on the display screen 94a instead of the operation completion / incomplete message.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S820, the process proceeds to step S822, and it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display. If a negative determination is made in step S822, the continuous extended effect processing is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S822, that is, if it is the end timing of variable display, end display image setting processing is executed in step S823. In the process of step S823, when the fluctuation display time is a fluctuation display time in which a jackpot state occurs, display setting is performed so that a moving image display indicating that the jackpot result is obtained is performed. In this case, the result display image setting process is being executed, and in the result display image setting process, the video display is set so as to correspond to the big win (occurrence of a special gaming state). If there is, the moving image display is set so as to have a series of contents with the moving image display. On the other hand, when the operation incomplete image setting process is being executed, there is a moving image display that dramatically switches from the incomplete operation image to a moving image display indicating that the occurrence of the special gaming state is confirmed. Become.

  After performing the process of step S823, it progresses to step S824, the process for the return to the normal state of the operation switch unit 40A is performed, and this continuous expansion effect process is complete | finished. In the return processing in step S823, the return flag is stored in the return flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 425. In the above-described timer interrupt process, when this return flag is stored, a process for returning the operation switch unit 40A to the normal state is performed. In the return process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing after the game result is displayed, and when it is determined that it is the timing after the game result is displayed, the following process is performed.

  First, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 557A, it is determined whether or not the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum protruding position. When it is determined that the push button member 320 has not returned to the maximum projecting position, the return process is terminated as it is. That is, when the player continues the pressing operation by placing a hand on the push button member 320, the return to the normal state is avoided.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum projecting position, output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 340A is started, and output of the drive signal until the shutter member 330 returns to the initial position. Is continued. Thereby, the shutter member 330 returns to the initial position. When the return of the shutter member 330 to the initial position is completed, the output of the drive signal is stopped and the return flags stored in the various flag storage areas 425 are erased, and the return processing ends.

  Here, with respect to the effect content (display content) in the symbol display device 94 and the state change of the operation switch unit 40A when the continuous expansion effect (operation-corresponding effect) is executed, referring to the time charts of FIG. 31 and FIG. explain. The state change state of the operation switch unit 40A is different between the case where the maximum prescribed number of times is selected as the prescribed number of operations and the case where the maximum prescribed number is not selected. Therefore, in the following description, first, the case where the maximum specified number of operations is not selected as the specified number of operations will be described, and then the maximum specified number of operations as the specified number of operations centered on differences from the pattern where the maximum specified number of operations is not selected. A case where the number of times is selected will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the variable display time corresponding to the continuous operation corresponding effect is started at the timing of td1, each symbol sequence that has been stopped and displayed on the display screen 94a starts the variable display. Thereafter, the left symbol row is first stopped and then the right symbol row is stopped and displayed at the timing td2. At this time, the same symbol (the symbol “3” in FIG. 31) is stopped and displayed on the above-described effective line, so that the normal variation display is shifted to the reach display.

  In the example of FIG. 31, since the continuous expansion effect is executed, the reach symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper part of the display screen 94a at the timing td3 after the reach display is started, and the girl is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. Is displayed. At the timing immediately after that, a message prompting repeated hitting of the push button member 320 (for example, “Press the button repeatedly!”) Is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 94a, and the operation of the operation switch unit 40A is validated along with this.

  Thereafter, by repeating the pressing operation of the push button member 320 by the player within the effective period of the continuous operation, the operation reception count display image that appears in the lower portion of the display screen 94a instead of the message is changed. Specifically, the light emission portion of the meter unit constituting the operation reception count display image increases according to the number of operations, and the character image imitating a girl displayed on the display screen 94a surrounds the character. Is displayed, and the effect is displayed to increase as the number of operations increases.

  Further, every time the player presses the operation switch unit 40, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S in the operation switch unit 40 are expanded. The expansion of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S not only suggests that the operation of the operation switch unit 40 has been accepted effectively, but also suggests that the next operation is allowed. In the present embodiment, the expectation of winning the jackpot is set to be higher as the number of operations from the time when the continuous operation is suggested until the operation is completed increases. For this reason, it is assumed that the player performs the operation while expecting to perform the pressing operation as many times as possible. Therefore, improvement in the degree of attention to the reaction (movement) of the operation switch unit 40 after the pressing operation can be expected.

  In the example of FIG. 31, “seven times” is selected as the prescribed number of operations. For this reason, for example, when the “fourth” operation is performed at the timing of td5, the next operation is permitted, and immediately after the operation is received at the timing of td5 (almost simultaneously timing). The operation area AE and the operation stroke S are enlarged. At this time, if the player holds a hand on the operation switch unit 40A (specifically, the push button member 320 or the shutter member 330), it is possible to prompt the user to grasp the expansion of the operation area AE through the sense of touch.

  In more detail, when the suggestion of acceptance on the display screen 94a is compared with the suggestion of acceptance on the operation switch unit 40A, the latter is executed at a slightly earlier timing than the former. Furthermore, the display screen 94a is provided with a function that suggests that the operation has been effectively accepted, but is not provided with a function that suggests that the next operation is allowed. In this way, the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 40A is further improved by differentiating both functions.

  When the number of operations by repeated pressing operations reaches the preset specified number of operations at the timing td6, an image indicating that the continuous operation has been completed is displayed on the display screen 94a immediately after the final operation. . Specifically, the character image displayed at the center of the display screen 94a and the operation reception count display image displayed at the bottom of the display screen 94a are not displayed, and instead a message indicating the completion of the operation (more details) “COMPLETE!”) Is displayed. In addition, the operation of the push button member 320 is not accepted until the pressing operation is validated again after the pushing operation of the push button member 320 is invalidated at the timing of td6.

  At the timing of td7 after the timing of td6, a display effect corresponding to the operation result is executed on the display screen 94a, but the content of the display effect changes according to the variable display time of the main variable display time.

  Specifically, when the variation display time of the present variation display time corresponds to the second variation display time, the display shifts to the normal reach display at the timing td7. Specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and the symbol that has been reduced and displayed on the upper portion of the display screen 94a is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. At this time, on the condition that the continuous operation is completed, the display shifts to the normal reach display corresponding to high-speed fluctuation. After that, the middle symbol variation display stops at the timing of td8, and either the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot or the symbol combination corresponding to losing is displayed according to the game result, and this variation display time ends. To do.

  On the other hand, when the variation display time of the present variation display time corresponds to the third variation display time, the display shifts to super reach display at the timing td7. Specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and the character image is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a in accordance with this. At this time, on the condition that the continuous operation has been completed, the transforming girl is displayed as the character image. After that, if the jackpot is won, the image that the girl succeeded in transformation is enlarged at the timing of td9 and the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot is not won In this case, at the timing of td9, an image in which the girl failed to transform and returned to the original is displayed, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the detachment is stopped and displayed, and this variation display time ends.

  When the continuous operation is not completed during the effective period, that is, when the operation is not performed and when the operation is performed but the number of times does not reach the specified number, when the operation is completed on the display screen 94a, Different display effects are executed.

  Specifically, first, an image indicating that the continuous operation has not been completed is displayed on the display screen 94a at the timing of tdX when the effective period has ended. Specifically, the character image displayed at the center of the display screen 94a and the operation reception count display image displayed at the bottom of the display screen 94a are not displayed. Instead, a message indicating that the operation has not been completed (for example, “INCOMPLETE”). ! ”) Is displayed.

  At the timing tdY after the timing tdX, different display effects are executed according to the variation display time of the variation display times.

  Specifically, when the variation display time of the present variation display time corresponds to the second variation display time, the display shifts to the normal reach display at the timing tdY. More specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and each symbol that has been reduced and displayed on the upper portion of the display screen 94a is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. At this time, the display shifts to the normal reach display corresponding to the low speed fluctuation on condition that the continuous operation is not completed. Thereafter, the middle symbol variation display stops at the timing of td8, and either the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot or the symbol combination corresponding to losing is displayed according to the game result.

  Note that the above-described normal reach for high-speed fluctuations and normal reach for low-speed fluctuations are also executed in a variable display time in which continuous expansion effects are not performed. The normal reach for high-speed fluctuations is set to have a higher probability of being selected when winning the big hit, and the probability of being selected for being off is set lower than the normal reach for low-speed fluctuations. For this reason, the degree of expectation that is won in the big hit when the production occurs is higher in the normal reach corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation. When continuous operation is completed, it shifts to normal reach that supports high-speed fluctuation, and when continuous operation is not completed, it shifts to normal reach that supports low-speed fluctuation. In order to increase the degree of expectation, a differentiation is made so that an effect with a low appearance frequency is executed.

  On the other hand, when the variation display time of the present variation display time corresponds to the third variation display time, the display shifts to super reach display at the timing of tdY. Specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and the character image is displayed in the center of the display screen 94a. At this time, because the continuous operation is not completed, a girl moving across the heel is displayed as a character image. After that, when the jackpot is won, an image of the girl encountering the fairy at the timing of td9 is displayed. When the jackpot is not won, the image of the girl continuing to move at the timing of td9 is displayed. Will be displayed.

  Note that the above-described super reach relating to the transformation of the girl and the super reach relating to the movement of the girl are also executed in a variable display time in which the continuous expansion effect is not performed. And the probability that the super reach concerning transformation will be selected at the time of winning the big hit and the probability that it will be selected when going off is set lower than the super reach concerning the movement. For this reason, the expectation degree for winning a jackpot when the production occurs is higher in the super reach for transformation. If the continuous operation is completed, the system shifts to super reach for transformation, and if the continuous operation is not completed, the system shifts to super reach for movement. Differentiation is planned so that the expectation of

  When the fluctuation display time is completed at the timing td8 or the timing td9, the operation switch unit 40A is returned to the initial state. In the present embodiment, when a continuous operation-corresponding effect (operation area expansion effect) is executed, the operation switch unit 40A continues in subsequent variable display times until it returns to the initial state (the state before expansion). Operation corresponding effects will be limited.

  Next, a case where the maximum specified number of times is selected as the specified number of operations will be described.

  As shown in the timing chart of FIG. 32, when the variable display time in which the continuous operation corresponding effect is executed at the timing of te1 is started, each symbol sequence that has been stopped and displayed on the display screen 94a is changed. Start displaying. Thereafter, the left symbol row is first stopped and displayed, and then the right symbol row is stopped and displayed at the timing of te2. At this time, the same symbol (the symbol “3” in FIG. 31) is stopped and displayed on the above-described effective line, so that the normal variation display is shifted to the reach display.

  In the example of FIG. 32, since the continuous expansion effect is executed, the reach symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper part of the display screen 94a at the timing of te3 after the reach display is started, and the girl is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. Is displayed. At the timing immediately after that, a message prompting repeated hitting of the push button member 320 (for example, “Press the button repeatedly!”) Is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 94a, and the operation of the operation switch unit 40A is validated along with this.

  Thereafter, by repeating the pressing operation of the push button member 320 by the player within the effective period of the continuous operation, the operation reception count display image that appears in the lower portion of the display screen 94a instead of the message is changed. Specifically, the light emission portion of the meter constituting the operation reception count display image increases according to the number of operations, and an effect is provided so that the character image imitating a girl displayed on the display screen 94a surrounds the character. As the number of operations increases, the effect is displayed so as to increase.

  Further, each time an operation is performed, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S in the operation switch unit 40 are increased. The increase in the operation area AE and the operation stroke S not only suggests that the operation has been effectively received, but also suggests that the next operation is allowed. In the present embodiment, the expectation of winning the jackpot is set to be higher as the number of operations from the time when the continuous operation is suggested until the operation is completed increases. For this reason, it is assumed that the player performs the operation while expecting to perform the pressing operation as many times as possible. Thereby, the attention degree with respect to the reaction (movement) of the operation switch unit 40 after the pressing operation is improved.

  It should be noted that the manner of progress of the display effects at the timings te1 to te4 is the same as the manner of progress of the display effects at the timings td1 to td4.

  In the example of FIG. 32, the maximum number of operations: “10 times” is selected as the prescribed number of operations. Therefore, when the “fourth” operation is performed at the timing of te5, the next operation is permitted, and the operation area immediately after the operation is received at the timing of te5 (almost simultaneously timing). AE and operation stroke S are enlarged. At this time, if the player holds the operation switch unit 40A (specifically, the push button member 320 or the shutter member 330), the expansion of the operation area AE can be grasped tactilely.

  In more detail, when the suggestion of acceptance on the display screen 94a is compared with the suggestion of acceptance on the operation switch unit 40A, the latter is executed at a slightly earlier timing than the former. Furthermore, the display screen 94a is provided with a function that suggests that the operation has been effectively accepted, but is not provided with a function that suggests that the next operation is allowed. Thereby, the attention degree with respect to the operation switch unit 40A is further improved.

  After that, when the number of operations by repeated pressing operations reaches the “eighth” th time, when the prescribed number of operations becomes the “9th” th, the winning expectation degree of the jackpot is maximized. The operation is performed with the expectation that expansion of the operation area AE due to ("9th") does not occur, that is, the deformation of the operation switch unit 40A does not occur.

  In the example of FIG. 32, since the maximum number of operations: “10 times” is selected as the prescribed number of operations, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are expanded by the “9th” operation. When the “10th” operation is performed, the game result can be instantly specified. Therefore, the player who wants to know the result quickly performs the “10th” operation, and the player who wants to postpone the explicit result is It is assumed that the “10th” operation is not performed.

  When the “tenth” operation is performed at the timing of te6, an image indicating that the continuous operation has been completed is displayed on the display screen 94a immediately after the operation. Specifically, the character image displayed at the center of the display screen 94a and the operation reception count display image displayed at the bottom of the display screen 94a are not displayed, and instead a message indicating the completion of the operation (more details) “COMPLETE!”) Is displayed. Note that the operation of the push button member 320 is not accepted until the pressing operation is enabled again by the pressing operation of the push button member 320 being invalidated at the timing of te6.

  At the timing of te7 after the timing of te6, an effect corresponding to the operation result is executed, but the content of the effect changes according to the variable display time of the main variable display time.

  Specifically, when the variation display time of the present variation display time corresponds to the second variation display time, the current game result is clearly indicated at the timing of te7. That is, when the display time is a variable display time corresponding to the jackpot result, a message indicating that the jackpot is won (for example, “Congratulations!”) Is displayed on the display screen 94a. Displays a message (for example, “sorry ...”) indicating that the jackpot is not won on the display screen 94a.

  Further, slightly before the timing of te7, the operation area AE is changed, that is, the operation switch unit 40A is deformed. Specifically, the operation area AE is expanded so as to be maximized when it is a variable display time corresponding to a jackpot result, and the operation area AE is minimized when it is a variable display time corresponding to a loss result. To be reduced. That is, a game result is notified tactilely by putting a hand on the operation switch unit 40A. Thereby, the player's attention to the operation switch unit 40A and its movement can be urged.

  At the timing of te8 after the game result is clearly indicated, the above message is not displayed, and the symbol that has been reduced and displayed at the top of the display screen 94a until then is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. Then, the variation display of the middle symbol is stopped, and either the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot or the symbol combination corresponding to losing is displayed according to the game result, and this variation display time is ended.

  When the second variation display time corresponding to the reach display and the third variation display time are set to a relatively short second variation display time, the above-described result is immediately notified. Thus, it is avoided that the period from the notification timing to the end timing of the variable display time is excessively long. This is because, for example, if the message corresponding to the result of the outage is displayed for an excessively long period and the transition to the next variable display time is not made, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. This is a device for suppressing the occurrence of such inconvenience.

  In addition, when the number of operations reaches the maximum specified number of times, the notification period or the waiting period until the start of the next variable display time after notification is extended by adopting a configuration in which the advance notification before the end of the variable display times is executed. Can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the variation display time of the present variation display time corresponds to the third variation display time, the display shifts to super reach display at the timing of te7. Specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and the character image is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a in accordance with this. At this time, on the condition that the continuous operation has been completed, the transforming girl is displayed as the character image. After that, if the jackpot is won, the image that the girl succeeded in transformation and enlarged at the timing of te9 is displayed and the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and not won the jackpot In this case, at the timing of te9, an image in which the girl failed to transform and returned to the original is displayed, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the detachment is stopped and displayed, and this variation display time ends.

  Here, in the variation display time corresponding to the second variation display time, the operation region AE and the operation stroke S are expanded or reduced by the deformation of the operation switch unit 40A as the operation is completed. The change of the operation area AE with respect to the operation does not occur in the variable display times corresponding to. That is, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are maintained as they are.

  At the time when the player performs the continuous operation, the current variation display time corresponds to either the second variation display time or the third variation display time based on the flow of the game after the variation display time has started. It is not possible to determine whether For this reason, when performing the “tenth” operation, it is possible to grasp whether the result is expansion (big hit decision), reduction (deletion decision), or current status maintenance (result announcement suspended). Can not. Therefore, the operation is performed while expecting that the response to the operation is expansion or maintenance of the current state, and the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 40A can be suitably increased.

  When the continuous operation is not completed during the effective period, that is, when the operation is not performed and when the operation is performed but the number of times does not reach the specified number, when the operation is completed on the display screen 94a, Different display effects are executed.

  Specifically, first, an image indicating that the continuous operation has not been completed is displayed on the display screen 94a at the timing of teX when the validity period ends. Specifically, the character image displayed at the center of the display screen 94a and the operation reception count display image displayed at the bottom of the display screen 94a are not displayed. Instead, a message indicating that the operation has not been completed (for example, “INCOMPLETE”). ! ”) Is displayed.

  At the timing of teY after the timing of teX, different effects are executed according to the variation display time of the main variation display times.

  Specifically, when the variation display time of the present variation display time corresponds to the second variation display time, the display shifts to the normal reach display at the timing of teY. Specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and the symbol that has been reduced and displayed on the upper portion of the display screen 94a is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. At this time, the display shifts to the normal reach display corresponding to the low speed fluctuation on condition that the continuous operation is not completed. Thereafter, the change display of the middle symbol stops at the timing of te8, and either the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot or the symbol combination corresponding to losing is displayed according to the game result.

  On the other hand, when the variation display time of the present variation display time corresponds to the third variation display time, the display shifts to super reach display at the timing of teY. Specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and the character image is displayed in the center of the display screen 94a. At this time, because the continuous operation is not completed, a girl moving across the heel is displayed as a character image. After that, when the jackpot is won, an image of the girl encountering the fairy at the timing of te9 is displayed and a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the display screen 94a, and the jackpot is not won In this case, an image in which the girl continues to move at the timing of te9 is displayed, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the detachment is displayed.

  Note that when the variable display time is completed at the timing of te8 or the timing of te9, the operation switch unit 40A is returned to the initial state. In the present embodiment, when a continuous operation-corresponding effect (operation area expansion effect) is executed, the operation switch unit 40A continues in subsequent variable display times until it returns to the initial state (the state before expansion). Operation corresponding effects will be limited.

  According to the third embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are produced.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a portion exposed on the player side (upper) in the operation switch unit 40A is deformed according to the game situation. Thus, by deforming the operation switch unit 40A, the change of the operation switch unit 40A is visually and tactilely suggested to the player, and the player's attention to the operation switch unit 40A is improved. Can contribute.

  In the continuous expansion effect, a configuration in which the above-described deformation of the operation switch unit 40A is generated by the player's operation is adopted. In this way, by setting the player's operation as an opportunity for deformation, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the operation corresponding effect of the operation switch unit 40A.

  Some players may play a game with their hands placed on the operation switch unit 40A (for example, the push button member 320) so that the operation can be performed immediately when the operation is suggested. In such a configuration, there is a concern that even if the operation switch unit 40A is caused to emit light, it is difficult for the player to grasp it. In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the operation switch unit 40A is “deformed”, a change in appearance can be transmitted not only as a visual change but also as a tactile change to the player. This makes it difficult for the player to miss the change of the operation switch unit 40A.

  Furthermore, the deformation of the operation switch unit 40A is started when the push button member 320 reaches the maximum pressed position, that is, the operation detection position. As a result, for example, compared to a configuration in which the deformation is started after returning to the position before the operation, the player's hand has more opportunities to touch during the deformation, and the function to suggest the fact that the deformation has occurred to the player. It can be made to exhibit more suitably.

  When the operation switch unit 40A is deformed, the shutter member 330 moves in the opening direction and the operation area AE is expanded. In such a configuration, if the movement of the shutter member 330 is hindered by the player's hand or the like, it may be difficult to exert the effect function provided to the operation switch unit 40A. In particular, when the deformation is performed at a timing when the hand touches the operation switch unit 40A as described above, such an inconvenience can be remarkable. In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the shutter member 330 moves to the side where the operation area AE is expanded at the time of deformation, for example, compared with the case where the shutter member 330 moves to the side where the operation area AE is reduced. The movement of the shutter member 330 can be prevented from being hindered by the hand. Thereby, the presentation function provided to the operation switch unit 40A can be suitably exhibited.

  In the continuous expansion effect, the operation switch unit 40 </ b> A is deformed based on the player's operation to suggest that the next operation is permitted. In the continuous expansion effect, there is a correlation between the number of operations and the degree of expectation that is won in the jackpot, and the expectation degree that is won in the jackpot is set to increase as the number of operations increases. For this reason, it is considered that the player performs the operation with the expectation that many operations will be effective, that is, with the expectation that the next operation is allowed. Thereby, the attention degree with respect to a deformation | transformation of the operation switch unit 40A can be improved suitably.

  In particular, when the maximum number of specified operations (“10 times”) is selected, the expectation of winning the jackpot at the previous number of times (“9 times”) is maximized. Was set as follows. As a result, the player operates while expecting that the operation switch unit 40A is deformed when the number of operations is “8 times” or less, while the operation switch unit 40A is used when performing the “9th” operation. It is assumed that the operation is performed with the expectation that will not be deformed. As a result, a game in which an operation is performed while expecting deformation of the operation switch unit 40A and a game in which an operation is performed while expecting no deformation of the operation switch unit 40A are realized, and a series of continuous operations are performed. It is possible to suppress the production from becoming monotonous.

  Further, when the “tenth” operation is performed, the game result is notified in advance (clearly) based on the operation before the end of the variable display time, so that attention is paid to the final operation. The degree can be improved dramatically.

  However, when the advance notice of the game result is made in this way, a factor that causes annoyance to the player that the period from when the advance notice is made until the variable display time ends is excessively long Can be. Such an inconvenience is assumed to be particularly prominent when an advance notice of the outlier result is made. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the advance notification is made in the variable display time corresponding to the second variable display time in which the variable display period is set to be relatively short, and the third variable display time is set to be relatively long. By adopting a configuration that does not make a prior notification at the variable display time corresponding to the variable display time, it is possible to avoid extending the period from the advance notification to the end of the variable display time. Is suppressed.

  The operation switch unit 40A is configured such that the operation stroke S is expanded in accordance with the expansion of the operation area AE. Depending on how the hand is attached to the operation switch unit 40A, there is a possibility that the outer edge of the operation area AE is not touched, and the extension of the operation area AE may not be grasped tactilely. On the other hand, when the pressing operation is performed, it is necessary to touch the push button member 320 without fail. Here, not only the operation area AE but also the configuration in which the operation stroke S is expanded makes it easy to convey the tactile change of the operation switch unit 40A to the player, and the hand to the operation switch unit 40A Depending on how to attach (how to operate), it is difficult to cause inconvenience that the suggested function does not work well.

  In particular, for the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40A, as the operation stroke S increases, the amount of protrusion to the opposite side (upward) of the operation direction increases. This makes it easier to show not only a tactile change based on the enlargement of the operation stroke S but also a visual change to the player as compared with the case where the operation stroke S is enlarged to the front side in the operation direction. be able to. Therefore, the fact that the operation switch unit 40A is deformed can be more easily transmitted to the player.

  The increase amount of the operation stroke S is set so as to increase as the number of operations increases. This is a device for clarifying the above change when the degree of expectation is high.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when the continuous expansion effect is being executed, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S based on the operation until at least a preset specified number of operations (excluding “10 times”) is reached. However, in this embodiment, a function for temporarily stopping the expansion of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S is added. Hereinafter, a configuration for temporarily stopping the expansion of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a diagram showing the extended effect skip setting table, and FIG. 33B is a graph showing the relationship between the number of operations, the operation area AE, and the operation stroke S.

  Note that in the following description, descriptions of matters common to the third embodiment are omitted or simplified, and differences between the present embodiment and the third embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the present embodiment, when the display control device 410 determines that the continuous expansion effect is to be executed, a response to some operations during the execution of the continuous expansion effect, that is, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S. It is determined whether or not to produce an effect that restricts the enlargement of the image (hereinafter simply referred to as “skip”). When the player repeats the pressing operation, when the player reaches the preset number of times, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are expanded even if the next operation is permitted. In the following explanation, it is also simply referred to as “skip effect”.

  With regard to the determination of whether or not the skip effect can be performed and the skip mode when the skip effect is performed, the extended effect skip setting table provided in the ROM 413 (specifically, various table storage areas 421) of the display control device 410, the RAM 414, and other various types. The value of the skip lottery counter provided in the counter area 428 is referred to.

  The skip lottery counter is updated each time periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is executed in the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 (specifically, “1” is added to the previous value), and the value reaches the maximum value. The loop counter returns to “0” later. Specifically, the value is updated within the range of “0” to “19”.

  As shown in FIG. 33A, the extended effect skip setting table refers to the specified number of operations, whether or not the jackpot is won, and the value of the skip lottery counter. It is configured to determine which of them is to be skipped.

  Specifically, when the specified number of operations is “1” to “6”, the skip effect is avoided, and when the specified number of operations is “7” to “10”, the skip lottery counter is referred to. Then, whether or not to perform the skip effect is determined, and further, when the skip effect is performed, the target range is determined. In the present embodiment, the first operation (“first operation”) and the last operation (operation of the specified number of operations) are excluded from the range to be skipped.

  Next, a skip mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33B illustrates a case where “eight times” is selected as the prescribed number of operations and the “sixth” operation is a skip target.

  When the continuous expansion effect is executed, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are set on condition that the next operation is permitted every time the operation is performed until the number of operations to be skipped is reached. Enlarged. In the example of FIG. 33B, in the “first” operation to the “fifth” operation that are not skipped, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are enlarged for each operation. When the “sixth” operation that is the subject of skipping is performed, it is normally accepted as the “sixth” operation inside the gaming machine, and the next operation is permitted. If so, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are enlarged, but the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are not actually enlarged. Therefore, when the “sixth” operation is performed, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are maintained in the state before the operation.

  Subsequently, when the “seventh” operation is performed, the operation region AE and the operation stroke S are expanded again because the “seventh” operation is not a skip target. This suggests that the “eighth” operation is allowed. When the “seventh” operation is performed, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are expanded by adding the amount that should have been expanded by the “sixth” operation to enlarge by the operation. Therefore, the change becomes remarkable.

(Setting process for continuous expansion production)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34A, a setting process for continuous expansion effect executed by the MPU 412 of the display control apparatus 410 will be described. The setting process for continuous expansion effect is a process executed in the command determination process in the MPU 412 of the display control device 410.

  In the setting process for continuous expansion effects, first, in step S1001, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a continuous expansion effect. Specifically, when the second variation display time or the third variation display time is selected as the variation display time, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the continuous expansion effect. As a result of the lottery, when it is determined that the display time is not the variable display time corresponding to the continuous expansion effect, the setting process for the continuous expansion effect is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if a winning lottery for continuous expansion effect is won, the process proceeds to step S1002.

  In step S1002, a prescribed operation frequency setting process is executed. Specifically, the specified operation count is set with reference to the specified operation count selection table and the specified count selection counter shown in FIG. In this case, the selected number of specified operations is biased depending on whether the result is a jackpot result or a miss result. Specifically, it is easy to select a small number of times such as “1”, “2 times”, etc. as the number of specified operations in the case of a missed result, and “8 times” as the number of specified operations in the case of a big hit result. , “9 times” and the like are easily selected.

  After setting the specified number of operations in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the specified number of operations set in step S1002 is “7 times” to “10 times”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1004.

  In step S1004, skip lottery processing is executed. In the skip lottery process, the skip setting table for extended effects shown in FIG. 33A and the value of the skip lottery counter are referenced to determine whether or not to skip, and to be skipped. Determine the range.

  After performing the process of step S1004 or when a negative determination is made in step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1005, and after executing the continuous extended effect mode setting process, the setting process for the continuous effect is ended.

  In the continuous extended effect mode setting process, as information to be referred to in the continuous extended effect process, various information such as the prescribed number of operations, the presence / absence of skip, the range where the skip occurs, various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414 and other various types Store in the counter area 428. The various pieces of stored information are referred to at the time of continuous expansion effect processing or the like, and are erased at the end of the continuous expansion effect.

(Operation area expansion processing)
Next, an operation area expansion process executed by the MPU 412 of the display control apparatus 410 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The operation area expansion process is a process executed as part of the continuous expansion effect process (see S811 in FIG. 29).

  In the operation area expansion process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the current operation is a skip target operation. Specifically, referring to the skip flags stored in the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414, it is determined in which operation times the skip is generated, and whether or not the current operation corresponds to it. judge.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, an extension amount carry-over process is executed in the subsequent step S1102, and then the operation area extension process ends. As a result, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 340A is avoided, and the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are maintained as they were before this operation was performed.

  In the extended amount carry-over processing, the drive that is output when the next operation is performed on condition that the next operation is not the same as the specified number of operations, that is, the last operation in this continuous expansion effect. Execute signal addition processing. Thereby, when the next operation is performed, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are expanded at a stretch including the skipped portion.

  In this way, by adding the skip amount to the increase amount of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S, the change of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S is made more remarkable. For this reason, when giving a player the impression of having returned to a state in which it can be manipulated in a pseudo manner, the impact is increased to prevent such a change from being overlooked.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, that is, if it is determined that the operation is to be skipped, the process proceeds to step S1103, where it is determined whether or not the current operation is an operation immediately after skipping.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1104 to execute a drive signal output process corresponding to skip. In this process, the drive signal output period is corrected by adding the drive signal output period (that is, the number of pulses) added during the skip operation. By outputting the drive signal corrected (added or added) in this manner, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are expanded at a stretch as described above (see FIG. 33B).

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, a skip signal non-corresponding drive signal output process is executed. In this process, since the drive signal corresponding to the current operation is output, the increase amounts of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are smaller than when the process of step S1104 is executed.

  After executing the processing of step S1104 and step S1105, the operation area expansion processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, a display effect executed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94 at the time of this skip effect will be described. When the skip effect is executed, the reception suggestion effect on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94 is avoided. That is, the process in step S810 becomes invalid.

  As described above, when the number of operations reaches the specified number of operations, the operation completion image is displayed after a short interval. As described above, avoiding the suggestion effect for reception is a device for giving the player the impression that the specified number of operations has been reached by this operation temporarily, but adopting such a configuration. Therefore, it is difficult to instantaneously determine whether it is due to the skip effect or due to the completion of the operation.

  In the continuous expansion effect, when the result is a detachment, a relatively small number of times is easily selected as the prescribed number of operations. For this reason, when a continuous expansion effect is performed, there is a high possibility that the specified number of operations will be reached immediately with a small number of operations. For this reason, there is room for further improvement to stimulate the player's willingness to operate.

  In the present embodiment, even when the specified number of operations has been reached, the fact that the operation has been completed is not immediately notified on the display screen 94a, but from the completion of the operation until the notification of the operation completion is made. A short time (for example, 3 sec) occurs. Here, if the skip effect shown in the present embodiment is adopted, the case where the operation is completed and the case where the skip effect is executed are performed as cases where the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are not enlarged. Will exist. For this reason, it is considered that the player performs the operation in expectation that the operation can be performed again even when the operation is completed. Thus, if the continuous expansion effect is set, the attention degree with respect to the operation switch unit 40A and its operation and the like can be further improved.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the said 1st Embodiment, the structure which the operation switch unit 40 deform | transforms according to a game condition was employ | adopted. In the present embodiment as well, the configuration in which the operation switch unit is deformed according to the game situation is adopted as in the first embodiment. However, the configuration and the mode of the deformation are the same as those in the first embodiment. Is different. Hereinafter, the operation switch unit 600 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a schematic view of the operation switch unit 600 as viewed from above, and FIG. 35B is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG.

  First, the basic configuration of the operation switch unit 600 will be described. As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the operation switch unit 600 in this embodiment is disposed on the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. A housing portion 28c for housing the operation switch unit 600 is formed in the central portion of the upper bulging portion 28, and the operation switch unit 600 housed in the housing portion 28c has a part of the operation portion 601 on the upper bulge. It is in a state of being exposed upward through a substantially circular opening 28e formed in the upper surface portion 28d of the protruding portion 28.

  As shown in FIG. 35B, the operation switch unit 600 includes an operation unit 601 and a holder unit 602 that holds the operation unit 601 so that the operation unit 601 is movable. The operation switch unit 600 and the upper bulging portion 28 are integrated by being fixed to the upper surface portion 28d and the like from below.

  The operation unit 601 includes operation members 610 and 620 that can be operated by direct contact with the player, and a base unit 630 that constitutes a mounting portion of the operation members 610 and 620. The base portion 630 is formed with a substantially hemispherical pedestal portion 631 having an end surface facing upward, and operation members 610 and 620 are assembled to the pedestal portion 631. The pedestal portion 631 is formed with a cylindrical portion 635 that protrudes on the side opposite to the side on which the operation members 610 and 620 are attached, that is, on the side opposite to the opening 28 e side of the upper bulging portion 28. On the other hand, the holder portion 602 is formed with an insertion portion 651 through which the cylindrical portion 635 is inserted.

  The insertion portion 651 is configured such that its inner surface abuts against the outer surface of the cylindrical portion 635, and vertical movement along the insertion portion 651 of the cylindrical portion 635 is allowed. That is, the movement direction of the operation unit 601 is defined so as to increase or decrease the amount of protrusion of the operation unit 601 from the opening 28e. The holder portion 602 has a surrounding portion 652 formed so as to surround the pedestal portion 631 from the side. However, the operation portion 601 is allowed to move between the pedestal portion 631 and the surrounding portion 652. Movement space is secured.

  The cylindrical portion 635 incorporates a spring member 636 as an urging means, and the operating portion 601 is urged toward the side (upward) protruding from the opening 28e by the spring member 636. An opening flange 28f is formed on the upper surface portion 28d of the upper bulging portion 28 so as to protrude downward from the opening 28e. Since the upper end portion of the base portion 630 (specifically, the pedestal portion 631) abuts against the tip end portion of the opening flange 28f from below, further upward displacement is restricted. That is, the opening flange 28f is provided with a function as a stopper portion, and the maximum protrusion position of the operation portion 601 from the opening 28e is defined by the opening flange 28f.

  When the operation unit 601 is pressed downward, the operation unit 601 moves downward against the biasing force of the spring member 636. Further, when the base portion 630 comes into contact with the surrounding portion 652 from above, further movement is restricted. Thus, the position where the base portion 630 and the surrounding portion 652 are in contact with each other is the maximum pressing position of the operation portion 601.

  The operation switch unit 600 is provided with a detection sensor 648 for detecting that the operation unit 601 is at the maximum protruding position and a detection sensor 649 for detecting that the operation unit 601 is at the maximum pressing position. These detection sensors 648 and 649 are electrically connected to the display control device 410. In the display control device 410, it is possible to grasp where the operation unit 601 exists based on detection signals (detection information) from these detection sensors 648 and 649.

  One feature of the operation switch unit 600 according to the present embodiment is that a mechanism for deforming the operation switch unit 600 according to the gaming situation is employed as described above. Therefore, the configuration according to the modification will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 35B, an operation member 610 made of a resin material such as rubber that is easily deformed is fixed to the end surface of the base portion 630. The operation member 610 has a substantially hemispherical shape similar to the pedestal portion 631, and the virtual spherical surface G is formed by integrating the operation member 610 and the pedestal portion 631.

  The operation member 610 has transparency, and light from a light emitting body 634 such as an LED embedded in the end surface of the base portion 630 passes through the operation member 610 as if the operation member 610 is emitting light. It is possible to look like. A plurality of hemispherical concave portions are formed on the surface of the operation member 610, and the light from the light emitting body 634 described above is diffused by passing through the concave portions.

  An operation member 620 that forms an outline of the operation unit 601 is provided outside the operation member 610, and the operation member 610 is covered from above by the operation member 620. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the operation member 610 is referred to as “inner operation member 610”, and the operation member 620 is referred to as “outer operation member 620”.

  The outer operation member 620 is a pair of left and right, and is configured so as to form a bowl shape along the virtual spherical surface G including the inner operation member 610 and the pedestal portion 631 by combining the two.

  The outer operation member 620 is provided with a light shielding function. When the inner operation member 610 is covered with the outer operation member 620, the light from the light emitter 634 is outside the operation unit 601. There is no ejaculation. Further, the outer operation member 620 is formed of a hard resin material as compared with the inner operation member 610, and the surface thereof has a smooth curved surface with no unevenness. Accordingly, the touch is different between when the inner operation member 610 is touched and when the outer operation member 620 is touched.

  Here, the configuration of the base unit 630 will be described supplementarily. The base portion 630 includes a substantially hemispherical inner base member 630X and an outer base member 630Y having a substantially bowl shape, and the inner base member 630X is integrated with the outer base member 630Y. Yes. Here, a gap portion 632 opened upward is formed between the inner base member 630X and the outer base member 630Y, and the lower end portion of the outer operation member 620 is inserted into the gap portion 632. Yes.

  The size of the gap 632 is set to be equal to the thickness dimension of the outer operation member 620, and a space in which the outer operation member 620 can move is secured by the gap 632. In other words, the movement of the outer operation member 620 in the radial direction of the outer operation member 620 is restricted by the gap 632, and the movement path of the outer operation member 620 is determined.

  The base 630 is driven to move the outer operation member 620 between a closed position that covers the inner operation member 610 and restricts the exposure of the inner operation member 610 and an open position that allows the inner operation member 610 to be exposed. A mechanism is provided. This drive mechanism has a stepping motor 641 as a drive unit, and a pinion 642 as a transmission means for transmitting power from the stepping motor 641 to the outer operation member 620. On the other hand, a rack portion 621 that has a plurality of teeth and engages with the pinion 642 is formed on the inner surface of the outer operation member 620.

  The stepping motor 641 is electrically connected to the display control device 410 and is configured to operate based on a drive signal input from the display control device 410. When the stepping motor 641 rotates and power is transmitted from the pinion 642 to the rack portion 621, the outer operation member 620 moves from the closed position to the open position.

  The pedestal 631 is provided with a stopper piece 645 that comes into contact with the outer operation member 620 from the open position side (lower side) when the outer operation member 620 is in the closed position. The stopper piece 645 is provided movably between a blocking position that protrudes to a position overlapping the movement path of the outer operating member 620 and prevents the outer operating member 620 from moving, and an allowable position that allows the outer operating member 620 to move. It is constantly urged to the contact position by an urging member (not shown). By waiting at the blocking position by the biasing force of the biasing member, the movement of the outer operation member 620 to the open position is blocked.

  The stopper piece 645 is coupled to a movable shaft of a solenoid 646 that is electrically connected to the display control device 410. The solenoid 646 receives the drive signal from the display control device 410 and moves the stopper piece 645 from the blocking position to the allowable position against the urging force of the urging member. For this reason, at least during the period when the drive signal is output, the stopper piece 645 is maintained at the allowable position, and the movement of the outer operation member 620 to the open position is allowed.

  Here, a modification of the operation switch unit 600 will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  The operation switch unit 600 is in a normal state in which the exposure of the inner operation member 610 is avoided by the outer operation member 620 (see FIG. 36A). When a drive signal is output from the display control device 410 to the solenoid 646, the stopper piece 645 moves from the blocking position to the allowable position. Thereby, the movement from the closed position of the outer side operation member 620 is permitted. After the movement restriction is released in this way, a drive signal is input to the stepping motor 641, so that the outer operation member 620 passes between the inner operation member 610 and the opening flange 28 f, and the gap portion It moves to the back side of 632.

  In the present embodiment, the outer operation members 620 are arranged in a pair of left and right, and the outer operation members 620 are rotated in opposite directions by the operation of the stepping motor 641. Specifically, the left outer operation member 620 rotates counterclockwise around the center portion of the base portion 630 (specifically, a hemispherical portion), and the right outer operation member 620 moves the center portion of the base portion 630. It rotates clockwise as the center. If attention is paid to such movement, it can be said that the outer operation member 620 has a function as a shutter.

  When the outer operation member 620 reaches the innermost position (that is, the open position) of the gap portion 632, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 641 and the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 646 are stopped. In this state, the end of the outer operation member 620 abuts against the inner wall of the gap portion 632, thereby preventing further movement of the outer operation member 620.

  When the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 646 is stopped, the stopper piece 645 tries to move to the blocking position by the urging force of the urging member, but the outer operation member 620 exists on the movement path. Therefore, the stopper piece 645 stops in a state in which the stopper piece 645 is in contact with the inner surface of the outer operation member 620. Thus, when the outer operation member 620 reaches the open position, the inner operation member 610 is exposed (see FIG. 36B). Hereinafter, this state is referred to as a deformed state.

  In the deformed state, exposure of the outer operation member 620 is avoided, so that the operation target is substantially switched from the outer operation member 620 to the inner operation member 610. However, even when the operation target (press target) is switched, the displacement mode of the operation unit 601 based on the press operation is the same, and the operation detection mode is not changed. That is, an operation is detected by the same configuration (detection sensor 649) in the normal state and the deformed state.

  When switching from the normal state shown in FIG. 36A to the deformed state shown in FIG. 36B is performed, the exposure amount of the inner operation member 610 increases as the outer operation member 620 moves. By reducing the shielding range by the outer operation member 620 to which the light shielding function is provided, the light from the light emitter 634 is emitted outside the operation unit 601 and the amount is increased. Thereby, the visual change at the time of switching from a normal state to a deformation | transformation state is made more remarkable. In realizing such a change in the light emission range, the light emission control for adjusting the light emission range is not required, so that an increase in control load can be suppressed.

  Further, the inner operation member 610 is formed of a softer resin material than the outer operation member 620 and has a different feel when touched. Thereby, the touch when the operation unit 601 is touched is changed from the normal state.

  Furthermore, while the surface of the outer operation member 620 has a smooth curved surface (spherical shape), a plurality of recesses 611 are formed on the surface of the inner operation member 610. This not only diffuses the light from the light emitter 634 described above, but also makes the tactile sense between the normal state and the deformed state larger.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (b) → FIG. 36 (a), when returning from the deformed state to the normal state, a drive signal is output from the display control device 410 to the stepping motor 641. Thereby, the outer side operation member 620 moves to a closed position. When the outer operating member 620 reaches the closed position, the stopper piece 645 that has been prevented from moving to the blocking position by the outer operating member 620 until then moves to the blocking position by the biasing force of the biasing member. As a result, the return to the normal state is completed, and the operation target moves from the inner operation member 610 to the outer operation member 620.

  By returning to the normal state, light from the light emitter 634 is blocked by the outer operation member 620, and the operation unit 601 is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, not only the pressing operation in the normal state is allowed as shown in FIG. 36 (a) → FIG. 36 (c), but also FIG. 36 (b) → FIG. 36 (d). As shown in FIG. 5, the pressing operation in the deformed state is also permitted. More specifically, even in the deformed state, the same operation stroke as that in the normal state is ensured, and movement to the maximum pressing position is allowed.

  The effects using the operation switch unit 600 described in detail above are roughly divided into the following three items.

(1) Normal effect without switching to the deformed state In this effect, first, an image prompting the operation of the operation switch unit 600 is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, which is predetermined by the player. When an operation is performed within the period, a specific display effect is executed on the display screen 94a based on the operation.

(2) Specific effect in which switching from the normal state to the deformed state occurs at a preset timing regardless of the player's operation In this effect, an image prompting the operation of the operation switch unit 600 on the display screen 94a Is displayed, and the operation switch unit 600 is switched to the deformed state. Thereafter, when the operation switch unit 600 is operated within a predetermined period by the player, a specific display effect is executed on the display screen 94a based on the operation.

(3) Specific effect in which switching from the normal state to the deformed state occurs based on the player's operation In this effect, an image prompting the operation of the operation switch unit 600 is first displayed on the display screen 94a, and the player When the operation switch unit 600 is operated within a predetermined period of time, the operation switch unit 600 is switched to the deformed state based on the operation. Then, an image prompting the operation is displayed again on the display screen 94a, and when an operation is performed within a predetermined period by the player, a specific effect is executed based on the operation.

  In these effects (1) to (3), the probability of being selected as an effect when the jackpot results are in the order of (1) <(2) <(3) increases, and (3) <(2 ) <(1) The probability of being selected as an effect when the results are out of order is high. As a result, the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot at the time of production is configured to increase in the order of (1) <(2) <(3).

  By setting the degree of expectation of the effect (1) and the effect (2) as described above, it is assumed that the player plays a game while expecting the effect (2) to occur. That is, it is assumed that the player plays the game while conscious of whether the operation switch unit 600 is deformed. Thereby, improvement in the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 600 can be expected.

  Further, by using the effects of (1) and (3) together, the player can expect the operation switch unit 600 to switch to the deformed state when the operation is suggested on the display screen 94a. It is assumed that the unit 600 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to expect an improvement in the degree of attention to the reaction (action) when operating the operation switch unit 600.

(Operation switch form change effect processing)
Here, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 37, the effect (3) (hereinafter referred to as “operation switch form change effect”) among the various effects processing executed by the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 is applied. An example of processing will be described. The operation switch form changing effect process is executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

  In the operation switch form change effect process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not it is during variable display (game play) in which the operation switch form change effect occurs. If the change display is not being performed, the operation switch form change effect processing is terminated as it is. If the change display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1202.

  In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the first single operation is suggested. If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, a first single operation suggestion image setting process is performed. Thereby, a pressing operation suggestion image (a pressing operation prompting image) that prompts the player to press the operation switch unit 600 is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. For example, as the pressing operation suggestion image, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and characters such as “Press the button!” Are displayed on the display screen 94a. Note that the display of the image ends when a predetermined suggestion period elapses or a pressing operation is performed.

  Incidentally, the suggestion of the pressing operation is not limited to that on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, and may be performed by outputting sound from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of that on the display screen 94a. Alternatively, the push button member 320 may emit light. Further, these various suggestion patterns may be used in combination.

  After executing the process of step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204 to perform the setting process of the first single operation waiting state. In the first single operation waiting state setting process, the first single operation waiting flag is stored in the first single operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414. Thereafter, the operation switch form change effect processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, that is, if it is determined that the first single operation has been suggested, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, it is determined whether the first single operation waiting flag is stored in the first single operation waiting flag storage area of the RAM 414, thereby determining whether the first single operation waiting flag has been suggested.

  If it is waiting for the first single operation, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, it is determined whether or not a pressing operation on the operation unit 601 (specifically, the outer operation member 620) has been performed. Specifically, the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 interrupts the normal process periodically (for example, 2 msec) in addition to the normal process in which the command determination process and the operation switch form change effect process are repeatedly executed. Timer interrupt processing that is started by is set. In the timer interruption process, a sensor monitoring process for monitoring a detection signal (detection information) from the detection sensor 649 of the operation switch unit 40 is executed. In step S1205, the presence / absence of the first single operation is determined based on the result of the sensor monitoring process, that is, based on whether the operation unit 601 has reached the maximum pressing position.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, the process advances to step S1207 to execute the first single operation completion image setting process. As a result, an operation completion image (for example, a message such as “COMPLETE!”) Is displayed on the display screen 94a instead of the operation suggestion image.

  In a succeeding step S1208, processing for setting the operation switch unit configuration change timing is performed. In the present embodiment, one of the features is that a plurality of timings for changing the form are provided, and the timings for changing the form at the time of performance execution are diversified. Specifically, at which timing after the first single operation is performed in this process, the operation switch unit configuration change is selected from a plurality of preset patterns. More specifically, three timings are stored as the above timing, the same time as the first single operation, 0.5 sec after the first single operation, and 1.0 sec after the first single operation, and one of these three timings is selected by lottery. Selected by.

  When a hand is placed on the operation unit 601 (specifically, the outer operation member 620) when a form change occurs, the fact that the form change has occurred can be transmitted to the player as a tactile change. . If attention is paid to this point, it is preferable to cause a form change at the same time as the first single operation is performed. However, if an attempt is made to change the form at the same time as the first single operation every time, if the operation unit 601 is repeatedly hit, the second single operation described later is effectively accepted and the impact of the form change is immediately received. There is concern that will weaken. Therefore, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a slight interval may occur between the first single operation and the occurrence of the form change. As a result, the operation unit 601 is prevented from being repeatedly hit by the player. Thereby, while suppressing random operation, the attention degree with respect to the operation switch unit 600 can be raised suitably. Further, it is possible to contribute to ensuring the durability of the operation switch unit 600 provided with the form changing function.

  Returning to the description of step S1206, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, that is, if it is determined that the first single operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, it is determined whether it is the reception end timing of the first single operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined valid reception period has elapsed since the execution of step S1204. If a negative determination is made in step S1209, the operation switch form change effect process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, a reception end image setting process is executed. As a result, the suggestion image (“Press the button!”) Is not displayed on the display screen 94a, and a reception end image (for example, a message such as “INCOMPLETE!”) Is displayed instead.

  After executing the process of step S1210 or step S1208, the process proceeds to step S1211. After the first single operation waiting state is canceled, the operation switch form change effect process is terminated. In the release processing of the first single operation waiting state, the first single operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414 is erased. Thereby, subsequent 1st single operation becomes invalid.

  Returning to the description of step S1205, if a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if it is determined that the first single operation waiting state is not established, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S <b> 1212, it is determined whether it is time to start changing the configuration of the operation switch unit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the timing set by the process of step S1211 has come.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1212, the process advances to step S1213 to execute form change processing. Here, the form change processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the form change process, first, a light emission start process is executed in step S1301. In the light emission start process, the supply of electric power to the light emitter 634 built in the operation switch unit 600 is started. As a result, light is emitted from the light emitter 634 to the inner operation member 610. However, since the inner operation member 610 is covered with the outer operation member 620 at the timing of starting the light emission in this way, and the irradiation of light to the outside of the operation unit 601 is restricted, the player emits the light emission. It cannot be confirmed.

  After executing the process of step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1302, and the movement restriction release process of the outer operation member 620 is executed. In the movement restriction release processing, output of a drive signal to the solenoid 646 is started. As a result, the solenoid 646 is excited for a preset period (in this embodiment, a period equivalent to the period required for the outer operation member 620 to reach the open position). When the solenoid 646 is excited, the stopper piece 645 moves from the blocking position to the allowable position, and the movement restriction of the outer operation member 620 is released.

  Next, it progresses to step S1304 and the switching process to the open state of the outer side operation member 620 is performed. In this processing, a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 641. Thereby, the outer side operation member 620 moves to an open position. The output of the drive signal is stopped when the outer operation member 620 reaches the open position.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 37 again, after executing the process of step S1213, the process proceeds to step S1214, and a second single operation suggestion image setting process is performed. By executing the processing, an image suggesting the second single operation (for example, a message such as “Press again!”) Is displayed on the display screen 94a.

  Then, after executing the setting process of the second single operation waiting state in step S1214, the operation switch form change effect process is terminated. In the setting process of the second single operation waiting state, the second single operation waiting flag is stored in the second single operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the detection sensor 649 rises from the LOW level to the HI level when the operation unit 601 reaches the maximum pressing position, and the operation is performed by this rise. It is the structure which grasps that. For this reason, even if the operation unit 601 is kept pushed into the maximum pressing position in the first operation, it is not determined that the second operation has been performed. That is, in order to effectively receive the second operation, it is necessary to move the operation unit 601 from the maximum pressing position, for example, to the initial position after performing the first operation. Thus, the mode of operation detection is different from that of the first embodiment.

  Returning to the description of step S1212, if a negative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is determined that it is not the timing for changing the configuration of the operation switch unit, the process proceeds to step S1216. In step S1216, it is determined whether or not the second single operation waiting state is set. Specifically, it is determined whether the second single operation waiting flag is stored in the second single operation waiting flag storage area of the RAM 414.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1216, the process proceeds to the second single operation process in step S1217. Here, the second single operation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the second single operation process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the second single operation (pressing operation) of the operation unit 601 (specifically, the inner operation member 610) has been performed. Specifically, in the MPU 412 of the display control device 410, in addition to the normal process in which the command determination process and the operation area expansion effect process are repeatedly executed, the normal process is periodically interrupted (for example, 2 msec) and started. Timer interrupt processing to be performed is set. In the timer interruption process, a sensor monitoring process for monitoring a detection signal (detection information) from the detection sensor 649 of the operation switch unit 40 is executed. In step S1205, the presence / absence of the second single operation is determined based on the result of the sensor monitoring process.

  In the present embodiment, the same detection sensor is used both when the outer operation member 620 is pressed by the first single operation and when the inner operation member 610 is pressed by the second single operation. Detection is performed. This is a device for suppressing the complication of the configuration caused by adopting the inner and outer operation members 610 and 620 and making it appear as if the operation modes are diversified.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1402, and the second single operation completion image setting process is executed. As a result, an operation completion image (for example, a message such as “COMPLETE!”) Is displayed on the display screen 94a instead of the operation suggestion image. After executing the process of step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403, and a result display image setting process is executed.

  By executing the processing of step S1402, the result display image is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. As the display of the image, for example, when the variable display time is a variable display time in which a jackpot state occurs, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot state, When the variable display time is a variable display time in which the big hit state does not occur, the moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character is the same as before the operation suggesting image is started. In the result display image setting process, when an operation completion image is displayed, a process for displaying the result display image corresponding to the operation completion is executed, and an operation incomplete image is displayed. , A process for displaying a result display image corresponding to incomplete operation is executed. That is, different images are displayed when the operation is completed and when the operation is not completed.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1404, and it is determined whether it is the reception end timing of the second single operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined valid period has elapsed since the execution of step S1215. If a negative determination is made in step S1404, the second single operation process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1404, an acceptance end image setting process is executed. As a result, the suggestion image (“Press the button!”) Is not displayed on the display screen 94a, and a reception end image (for example, a message such as “INCOMPLETE!”) Is displayed instead.

  After executing the process of step S1405 or step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1406, and after the second single operation waiting state is canceled, the second single operation process is terminated. In the second single operation waiting state release process, the second single operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414 is erased. As a result, the subsequent second single operation becomes invalid.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 37 again, after executing the second single operation process in step S1217 or when a negative determination is made in step S1216, the process proceeds to step S1218. In step S1218, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display. If it is not the end timing of the variable display, the operation switch form change effect processing is ended as it is.

  If it is the end timing of the variable display, an end display image setting process is executed in step S1219, and after the return process from the deformed state to the normal state is executed in step S1220, the operation region expansion effect process is executed. Exit.

  In the setting process of the end display image in step S1219, when the fluctuation display time is a fluctuation display time in which a big hit state occurs, display setting is performed so that a moving image display that the occurrence of the big hit state is confirmed is performed. . In this case, when the result display image setting process is executed and the moving image display is set to correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot state in the result display image setting process, The moving image display is set so as to have a series of contents with the moving image display. On the other hand, when the operation incomplete image setting process is executed, there is a moving image display that dramatically switches from the incomplete operation image to a moving image display indicating that the occurrence of the big hit state is confirmed. .

  In the return processing in step S1220, the return flag is stored in the return flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 425. In the timer interrupt processing described above, when this return flag is stored, processing for returning the operation switch unit 600 to the normal state is performed. In the return process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing after the game result is displayed. When it is determined that the timing is after the game result is displayed, the following process is performed.

  First, based on detection information from the position detection sensor 648, it is determined whether or not the operation unit 601 has returned to the maximum protruding position. If it is determined that the operation unit 601 has not returned to the maximum projecting position, the return process is terminated. That is, when the player continues the pressing operation by placing a hand on the operation unit 601, the return to the normal state is avoided.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation unit 601 has returned to the maximum projecting position, a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 641. As a result, the outer operation member 620 moves to the closed position, and the return from the deformed state to the normal state is completed. After executing the output stop process of the drive signal, the return flag stored in the various flag storage areas 425 is erased, and the return process ends.

  Note that when the return flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 425, the operation switch form change effect is restricted, and in the variable display times in which the operation switch form change effect is executed, an alternative effect (for example, for example) The effect (1) above is executed. By the way, when the variable display time in which the operation area expansion effect is performed is finished and the next pressing operation is not performed until the next variable display time is started, the next variable display time is started. It is set so that the return from the expanded state to the normal state is completed by the time it is performed. For this reason, when the return process is completed as it is after the game result is displayed, the operation area expansion effect is not restricted in the next game round.

  According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a portion of the operation switch unit 600 exposed on the player side (upward) is deformed according to the game situation. In this way, by deforming the operation switch unit 600, a change in the operation switch unit 600 is suggested visually or tactilely to the player, and the player's attention to the operation switch unit 600 is improved. Can contribute.

  In the operation switch form change effect, the above-described deformation of the operation switch unit 600 is generated by the player's operation. In this way, by setting the player's operation as an opportunity for deformation, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the operation corresponding effect of the operation switch unit 600.

  Some players may play a game with their hands placed on the operation switch unit 600 (for example, the operation unit 601) so that the operation can be performed immediately when the operation is suggested. In such a configuration, there is a concern that even if the operation switch unit is caused to emit light, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp it. In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the operation switch unit 600 is “deformed”, a change in appearance can be transmitted not only as a visual change but also as a tactile change to the player. This makes it difficult for the player to cause a problem that the change of the operation switch unit 600 is overlooked.

  Furthermore, the deformation of the operation switch unit 600 is started when the operation unit 601 reaches the maximum pressed position, that is, the operation detection position. As a result, for example, compared to a configuration in which the deformation is started after returning to the position before the operation, the player's hand has more opportunities to touch during the deformation, and the function to suggest the fact that the deformation has occurred to the player. It can be made to exhibit more suitably.

  This is a case where the inner operation member 610 and the outer operation member 620 are used in combination and the texture (hardness and surface shape) of the two is different, so that the movement of the outer operation member 620, that is, the deformation of the operation unit 601 is overlooked. However, when the player touches the operation unit 601, it can be suitably suggested to the player that some change has occurred in the operation unit 601.

  When the configuration in which the inner operation member 610 is covered by the outer operation member 620 is adopted, it is assumed that the outer operation member 620 is movable and it is difficult to secure the holding composition, so that chattering or the like during operation is likely to occur. . In this regard, in the present embodiment, the inner operation member 610 made of a softer material than the outer operation member 620 is configured to abut against the outer operation member 620 from the inner side, whereby the chatter of the outer operation member 620 is performed. It is possible to provide a vibration suppression function that suppresses the above. In addition, by bringing the inner operation member 610 into contact with the outer operation member 620, it is possible to distribute the load when the outer operation member 620 is pressed to the entire operation unit 601 through the inner operation member 610. Yes. Thereby, the outer operation member 620 is protected.

  The outer operation member 620 is configured to have a hemispherical appearance, and is configured to rotate along the virtual spherical surface G when switching from the normal state to the deformed state. The stress when the outer operation member 620 is pressed is distributed into a force toward the center of the virtual spherical surface G and a force toward the rotation direction. Thereby, it is avoided that stress concentrates on the stopper piece 645.

  In particular, the outer operation member 620 is formed to have a smoother surface than the inner operation member 610. For this reason, even if the stress in the rotation direction is applied, the hand pressing the outer operation member 620 slides on the surface of the outer operation member 620, that is, the friction between the outer operation member 620 and the hand is suppressed. It is possible to reduce the stress acting substantially in the direction of rotation. This contributes to improving the durability of the operation switch unit 600.

  Regarding the outer operation member 620 in the present embodiment, the operation unit 601 is moved to the maximum open position regardless of the position between the maximum protruding position (initial position) and the maximum pressing position. An acceptable configuration is adopted. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to generate restrictions such as a movable timing when switching from the normal state to the deformed state, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of freedom in applying the form change (deformation) of the operation switch unit 600 to the game effect. It has become.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the number of operation objects in the normal state (specifically, the number of parts that can be operated by the player and displaced independently of the part based on the operation) and the operation objects in the deformed state However, the operation switch unit 600A in the present embodiment has a different number of operation objects in each state. Specifically, the operation target is increased from one operation target to three operation targets by switching (deforming) from the normal state to the deformation state. Hereinafter, the configuration of operation switch unit 600A in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is a schematic diagram illustrating the internal structure of the operation switch unit 600A, and FIG. 39B is a schematic diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of the operation switch unit 600A. The operation switch unit 600A according to the present embodiment has the same configuration as that of the operation switch unit 600 according to the fifth embodiment. Then, about these common structures, description in 5th Embodiment is used and it demonstrates centering on difference with the said 5th Embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, the operation switch unit 600A has a pair of outer operation members 620. The arrangement of these outer operation members 620 is different from that of the fifth embodiment. Specifically, in the fifth embodiment, the outer operation members 620 are arranged side by side, whereas in the present embodiment, the outer operation members 620 are arranged side by side. Note that FIG. 39A corresponds to a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 35A, but for the boundary between the outer operation members 620, refer to the two-dot chain line in FIG. I want to be.

  The inner operation member 610A is a button member provided so as to be movable up and down. Specifically, an insertion hole 633A for the inner operation member 610A opened upward is provided on the end surface of the base portion 630A (specifically, the pedestal portion 631A), and the inner operation member is provided with respect to the insertion hole 633A. 610A is fitted. A partition portion 634A is formed in the insertion hole 633A so as to divide the region in the insertion hole 633A into three front and rear regions. A spring member 637A that urges the inner operation member 610A to the side (upward) protruding from the insertion hole 633A is disposed in the front region and the rear region among the three regions partitioned by the partition portion 634A. ing.

  The insertion hole 633A has a stopper portion (not shown) that restricts the upward displacement of the inner operation member 610A by contacting the inner operation member 610A from above, and the insertion hole is formed by the stopper portion. Disengagement from 633A is avoided. The inner operation member 610A is pressed against the stopper portion by the biasing force of the spring member 637A, and the operation surface portion 611A of the inner operation member 610A is pressed from above so that the inner operation member 610A is spring-loaded. It is configured to retreat into the insertion hole 633A against the urging force of the member 637A.

  The inner operation member 610A is covered with the outer operation member 620 in a normal state, and exposure of the inner operation member 610A is suppressed. For this reason, in the normal state, the operation by the player is substantially impossible. On the other hand, when the state is shifted to the deformed state, the outer operation member 620 is accommodated in the gap 632 so that access to the inner operation member 610A is permitted. Here, a plurality (in detail, three) of inner operation members 610A are provided side by side, and the inner operation members 610A are configured to be independently displaced. According to such a configuration, the operation target is changed from single to plural by switching from the normal state to the deformed state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 39 (b), a configuration related to operation detection when the outer operation member 620 is pressed and when each inner operation member 610A is pressed will be described.

  In the holder portion 602A in the present embodiment, a detection sensor 655A that constitutes an operation detection unit is disposed. The detection sensor 655A is an optical sensor (photosensor) including a light emitting element 656A and a light receiving element 657A, and is electrically connected to the display control device 410.

  A through-hole 638A penetrating left and right is formed in the base portion 630A of the operation portion 601A, and the respective elements 656A and 657A are arranged with the through-hole 638A interposed therebetween. The light emitted from the light emitting element 656A passes through the through hole 638A and reaches the light receiving element 657A when the operation unit 601 has not reached the maximum pressing position. On the other hand, when the operation portion 601A has reached the maximum pressing position, light from the light emitting element 656A is blocked by the outer wall of the base portion 630 and does not reach the light receiving element 657A. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether or not the operation unit 601A is operated on the display control device 410, more specifically, whether or not the outer operation member 620 is pressed.

  Further, the through hole 638A communicates with the insertion hole 633A for the inner operation member 610A (specifically, the central region partitioned by the partition portion 634A), and when the inner operation member 610A reaches the maximum pressing position. Is configured such that the through hole 638A is cut by the inner operation member 610A.

  Here, since the inner operation member 610A is configured not to allow light to pass therethrough, the light from the light emitting element 656A does not reach the light receiving element 657A when the through hole 638A is cut off (see FIG. 39 (b), see the two-dot chain line).

  Further, the insertion portion 651 of the holder portion 602A has a lock device 660A that can be switched between a locked state in which the operation unit 601A cannot move from the initial position to the maximum pressing position and an unlocked state in which the movement is allowed. Is arranged. The lock device 660A is electrically connected to the display control device 410, and is configured to be switched between a lock state and an unlock state based on a drive signal from the display control device 410.

  More specifically, when the operation switch unit 600 is in the normal state, the locking device 660A is maintained in the unlocked state, and when the switching from the normal state to the deformed state is performed, the locking device 660A is moved from the unlocked state. It will be switched to the locked state. Thereby, the movement to the maximum pressing position of the whole operation part 601A becomes impossible. In other words, the locked state prevents the light from the light emitting element 656A from reaching the light receiving element 657A from being blocked by the outer wall of the base portion 630A.

  On the other hand, in the locked state, the operation target moves from the outer operation member 620 to the inner operation member 610A. For this reason, the transmission and reception of the light can be blocked by the inner operation member 610A.

  Note that the configuration corresponding to the locking device 660A is not necessarily an essential configuration. At least in the deformed state, it is sufficient if the operation of the inner operation member 610A is ensured. For example, the biasing force of each spring member 636A is set sufficiently smaller than the biasing force of the spring member 636 for the entire operation unit 601A. Accordingly, a configuration may be adopted in which the entire operation unit 601A is prevented from moving in the pressing direction when the inner operation member 610A is operated. Further, the locking device 660 </ b> A may be arranged in any detail as long as its function is secured, and is not necessarily arranged in the insertion portion 651.

  In the configuration described above in detail, the electrical configuration (sensors and signal lines) used for operation detection is shared in both the normal state and the deformed state. Here, although the number of operation objects increases in appearance as described above, an operation-corresponding effect using a configuration in which the operation system is substantially limited to one will be briefly described.

  When performing an operation-corresponding effect, a message suggesting an operation is displayed on the display screen 94a at a timing after the reach display is changed from the normal variation display. Thereafter, when the player operates the operation unit 601A within a preset valid reception period, a process for switching the operation switch unit 600A from the normal state to the deformed state is triggered by the operation. Executed. As a result, the operation target moves from the outer operation member 620 to the inner operation member 610A. Here, on the display screen 94a, an image simulating a reel of a spinning-reel game machine is displayed. That is, a moving picture is displayed so that the left picture string, the middle picture string, and the right picture string are individually variably displayed.

  Here, on the display screen 94a, a message that prompts the user to operate the left inner operation member 610AL (for example, “press the left button to stop the picture!”) Is displayed. When the left inner operation member 610AL is operated by the player, the operation is detected by the detection sensor 655A, and the left picture sequence that is variably displayed on the display screen 94a based on this operation is stopped and displayed. That is, the inner operation member 610AL functions as a stop operation unit that stops the variable display of the pattern row.

  If the game result of this variable display time is a jackpot result, the pattern that is stopped and displayed based on the player's operation is a pattern combination corresponding to the jackpot result (for example, “heart mark”, “heart mark”, “heart” Mark ”), and in the case of an outlier result, it becomes a pattern constituting a pattern combination (for example,“ heart mark ”,“ heart mark ”,“ star mark ”) corresponding to the outlier result. That is, the player's operation is only an opportunity for the timing to stop the pattern, and the pattern that is actually stopped and displayed is determined in advance according to the game result.

  After the left picture is stopped and displayed, a message for prompting the operation of the inner inner operation member 610AM is displayed on the display screen 94a. When the inner operation member 610AM is operated by the player, the operation is detected by the detection sensor 655A, and the middle picture string that is variably displayed on the display screen 94a based on this operation is stopped and displayed.

  After the middle pattern is stopped and displayed, a message prompting the user to operate the right inner operation member 610AM is displayed on the display screen 94a. When the player operates the right inner operation member 610AR, the operation is detected by the detection sensor 655A, and the right pattern row that is variably displayed on the display screen 94a based on this operation is stopped and displayed.

  Since the pattern stop mode based on the operation of the inner operation members 610AM and 620AR corresponding to the middle pattern and the left pattern is the same as the pattern stop mode based on the operation of the left inner operation member 610AL, Description is omitted.

  According to the sixth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the operation switch unit 600A is switched from the normal state to the deformed state, the number of operation objects increases. In this way, if the configuration is such that the number of operation targets that can be accessed increases according to the gaming situation, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 600A.

  When a large number of operation objects are employed, the above-described effect of improving the degree of attention can be expected, but there is a concern that the configuration related to electrical control becomes complicated. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the configuration relating to operation detection is shared, the electrical configuration and electrical control related thereto can be simplified.

  In particular, the above-described configuration can be easily simplified by making the operation directions the same when the outer operation member 620 is the operation target and when the inner operation member 610A is the operation target. .

  Although the transmission system of signals from a plurality of operation objects is unified, the display effect on the display screen 94a is simulated as if the signals from each operation object are handled separately. In this way, in practice, a simple configuration is used, and the accompanying production obsolescence is avoided.

  In general, in a swivel-type gaming machine, the order in which the stop operation is performed among a plurality of stop operation buttons is arbitrarily selected by the player. In the present embodiment, since the electric signal transmission system is shared as described above, it is not possible to specify which of the plurality of inner operation members 610A corresponding to the stop operation button has been operated. Therefore, on the display screen 94a, by specifying (assisting) an object to be operated, the object that the player will operate is guided to a predetermined object, so that the transmission system of electric signals is small. Overcoming.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the said 1st Embodiment, the structure which the operation switch unit 40 deform | transforms according to a game condition was employ | adopted. In the present embodiment as well, the configuration in which the operation switch unit is deformed according to the game situation is adopted as in the first embodiment. However, the configuration and the mode of the deformation are the same as those in the first embodiment. Is different. Hereinafter, the operation switch unit 700 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 40A is a schematic view of the operation switch unit 700 as viewed from above, and FIG. 40B is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 40A.

  First, the basic configuration of the operation switch unit 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the operation switch unit 700 is disposed in the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. A housing portion 28c for housing the operation switch unit 600 is formed at the central portion of the upper bulging portion 28, and the operation switch unit 700 housed in the housing portion 28c has a portion of the operation portion 701 partially in the upper bulge. It is in a state of being exposed upward through a substantially circular opening 28e formed in the upper surface portion 28d of the protruding portion 28.

  As shown in FIG. 40B, the operation switch unit 700 includes an operation unit 701 and a holder unit 702 that holds the operation unit 701 so that the operation unit 701 is movable. The operation switch unit 700 and the upper bulging portion 28 are integrated with each other by being fixed.

  The operation unit 701 includes a button member 720 that protrudes from a central opening 711 formed in the holder unit 702. The button member 720 has a hollow shape opened to the back side of the holder portion 702, and the open portion is closed by a lid 730 fixed to the button member 720.

  The lid 730 is formed with a plurality of cylindrical portions 731 that stand on the side opposite to the button member 720 side, and a protrusion 713 formed on the bottom portion 712 of the holder portion 702 with respect to each cylindrical portion 731. It is inserted. The protrusion 713 has an outer peripheral surface that abuts against an inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 731, whereby the movement direction of the operation portion 701 is defined to be the vertical direction.

  A spring member 741 is disposed in a space surrounded by the cylindrical portion 731. Due to the biasing force of the spring member 741, the operation portion 701 is biased in a direction (upward) protruding from the central opening 711.

  The holder portion 702 is provided with a contact portion 714 that comes into contact with the flange portion 721 formed on the button member 720 from the front side (upper side) in the protruding direction, and the flange portion 721 hits the contact portion 714. Therefore, further protrusions are restricted. In other words, the contact portion 714 has a function of defining the maximum protruding position of the operation portion 701.

  When the operation portion 701 is pressed, the operation portion 701 moves backward against the urging force of the spring member 741, and the distal end portion of the cylindrical portion 731 is moved with respect to the bottom portion 712 of the holder portion 702. The further movement is restricted by the contact. That is, the position where the tip of the cylindrical portion 731 contacts the bottom 712 is the maximum pressing position of the operation unit 701.

  Also in the operation switch unit 700 in the present embodiment, a position detection sensor 708 that detects that the operation unit 701 is located at the maximum projecting position and a position detection sensor 709 that detects that the operation unit 701 is located at the maximum pressing position. And have. Each of these position detection sensors 708 and 709 is electrically connected to the display control device 410, and in the display control device 410, an operation is performed based on a detection signal from the position detection sensor 709. It is configured to detect.

  Next, a configuration for realizing a modification of the operation switch unit 700 (operation unit 701) will be described.

  A plurality of horizontally long slits 723 are arranged in parallel on the upper surface 722 of the button member 720. In these slits 723, upright portions 724 extending in the inner direction (downward) of the operation portion 701 are integrally formed, and the upright portions 724 are opposed to each other with the slits 723 interposed therebetween.

  A movable member 750 is built in the operation unit 701. The movable member 750 includes a plate-like base portion 751 that faces the lid 730, and a protruding portion 752 that protrudes from the base portion 751 and is exposed to the outside of the operation portion 701 through a gap between the standing portions 724 to the slit 723. Yes. The projecting portion 752 is in contact with the opposing surfaces of the upright portion 724, and is allowed to move in the same direction as the direction in which the upright portion 724 extends (up and down direction), but in a direction intersecting with it. Movement is regulated. In other words, the rising portion 724 forms a movement path for the protruding portion 752.

  The lid 730 is provided with a spring member 761 as an urging means for urging the movable member 750 upward. The base portion 751 of the movable member 750 is pressed against the tip of the upright portion 724 by the biasing force of the spring member 761, and further upward movement is restricted.

  The protrusion 752 of the movable member 750 is formed such that the tip 753 of the protrusion 752 is located on the same plane as the upper surface 722 of the button member 720 in a state where upward movement is restricted. Yes. That is, the operation surface portion 705 is formed by the distal end portion 753 of the movable member 750 (projecting portion 752) and the upper surface portion 722 of the button member 720.

  The ratio (occupancy ratio) occupied by the upper surface portion 722 of the button member 720 in the operation surface portion 705 is set to be larger than the ratio occupied by the distal end portion 753 of the movable member 750 (see FIG. 40 (a)). Has been. That is, what constitutes mainly the operation unit 701 (a player's operation target) is the button member 720, and the movable member 750 is attached to the button member 720.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the relationship between the upper surface portion 722 and the distal end portion 753 constituting the operation surface portion 705. Both arrangement patterns are set so that when the player touches the operation surface portion 705 with a finger, both the upper surface portion 722 and the tip portion 753 are included in the contact range. For this reason, when the player presses the operation surface portion 705 with a finger, the finger comes into contact with both the upper surface portion 722 and the tip portion 753. This is a contrivance for preventing the player from overlooking that there is a difference in the operational sensation (sense of touch) between the normal state and the deformed state of the operation switch unit 700.

  In addition to the movable member 750 and the spring member 761, a solenoid 770 that is electrically connected to the display control device 410 is disposed inside the operation unit 701. The solenoid 770 is disposed such that the movable shaft thereof is connected to the movable member 750, and the movable member 750 is attached to the spring member 761 by operating the solenoid 770 based on a drive signal from the display control device 410. Move against the power.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of effects using the operation switch unit 700 are set. Specifically, the normal member without the movement of the movable member 750, the first special effect in which the movable member 750 operates at a predetermined timing regardless of the player's operation, and the movable member based on the player's operation. The second special effect in which 750 operates is set. Therefore, hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 41, an example of a deformation mode of the operation switch unit 700 and a mode of display effect executed on the display screen 94a when the operation corresponding effect using the operation switch unit 700 is executed will be illustrated. To do. In addition, about each said production | presentation, when the production is performed, the expectation degree that has been won in the jackpot is set such that the normal production <the first special production / the second special production.

  First, the normal production will be described. In the normal performance, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the operation screen 701 is displayed on the display screen 94a under the situation where the operation portion 701 exists at the maximum projecting position and the operation surface portion 705 is formed by the button member 720 and the movable member 750. When the symbol variation display is started, a message indicating the operation of the operation switch unit 700 is displayed on the display screen 94a at a predetermined timing (for example, at a timing after shifting to reach display).

  Thereafter, when the operation switch unit 700 is operated by the player, the operation unit 701 reaches the maximum pressing position as shown in FIG. 41 (a) → FIG. 41 (b), so that the operation is effectively accepted. Then, after a message indicating that the operation is effectively accepted is displayed on the display screen 94a, a display effect (for example, super reach) corresponding to the operation is executed on the display screen 94a.

  In the process of executing a series of effects and operations, the movable member 750 waits at a position where the operation surface portion 705 is formed together with the button member 720.

  Next, the first special effect will be described. In the first special effect, as shown in FIG. 41A, the display screen is displayed under the situation where the operation portion 701 exists at the maximum projecting position and the operation surface portion 705 is formed by the button member 720 and the movable member 750. When the symbol variation display is started at 94a, the movable member 750 moves to the retracted position at a predetermined timing (for example, at a timing after shifting to reach display). Specifically, when a drive signal is output from the display control device 410 to the solenoid 770, the movable member 750 moves as shown in FIG. 41 (a) → FIG. 41 (c), and the operation surface portion 705 is moved. Unevenness will occur.

  After the movable member 750 is retracted, a message suggesting the operation of the operation switch unit 700 is displayed on the display screen 94a. When the operation switch unit 700 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 41 (c) → FIG. 41 (d), the operation unit 701 reaches the maximum pressing position, so that the operation is effectively accepted. Then, after a message indicating that the operation is effectively accepted is displayed on the display screen 94a, a display effect (for example, super reach) corresponding to the operation is executed on the display screen 94a.

  When a player touches the operation surface portion 705 when performing the operation, the player feels that the operation surface portion 705 has changed from a smooth curved surface shape to an uneven shape, that is, the operation switch unit 700 (operation portion 701) has been deformed. Can be grasped. Thereby, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility that this variation display time corresponds to the jackpot result.

  As described above, by using the normal effect and the first special effect in combination, the operation unit 701 branches when the operation unit 701 is deformed and when it is not deformed at the timing after the shift to the reach display. In these two cases, since the degree of expectation that is a jackpot result is different, the player who wants to predict the result of the variable display times related to the reach display more quickly and accurately should pay attention to the trend of the operation unit 701. You will pay. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 700.

  In the second special effect, as shown in FIG. 41A, the display screen 94a is displayed under the situation where the operation portion 701 exists at the maximum projecting position and the operation surface portion 705 is formed by the button member 720 and the movable member 750. The symbol variation display starts at. Thereafter, a message indicating the operation of the operation switch unit 700 is displayed on the display screen 94a at a predetermined timing (for example, at a timing after shifting to reach display).

  When the operation switch unit 700 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 41 (a) → FIG. 41 (b), when the operation unit 701 reaches the maximum pressing position, the operation is effectively accepted, After a message indicating that the operation is effectively received is displayed on the display screen 94a, a display effect (for example, super reach) corresponding to the operation is executed on the display screen 94a.

  Further, at the timing when the operation unit 701 reaches the maximum pressing position, the operation unit 701 is deformed when the movable member 750 starts to retreat as shown in FIG. At this timing, it is assumed that the player's hand is likely to touch the operation unit 701, and the player touches the operation unit 701 so that the operation surface unit 705 changes from a smooth curved surface to an uneven shape. That is, it is possible to tactilely grasp that the operation switch unit 700 (operation unit 701) has been deformed. Thereby, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility that this variation display time corresponds to the jackpot result.

  When the operation surface portion 705 is formed by the button member 720 and the movable member 750, the entire surface has a curved surface that is convex upward. For this reason, when the movable member 750 moves backward and the operation surface portion 705 is uneven, a slight step is generated on the operation surface portion 705. By creating a step in the operation surface portion 705 in this way, it is easy to grasp that there is a difference between before and after deformation when the operation surface portion 705 is touched.

  According to the seventh embodiment described in detail above, by adopting a configuration in which the deformation of the operation unit 701 occurs, the operation unit 701 constituting the “operation unit” as in the other embodiments described above is employed. It is possible to suitably increase the attention level of all players. For example, when the operation unit 701 is operated or not, the operation unit 701 can be deformed regardless of whether the operation unit 701 is operated.

  About the movable member 750 which comprises the operation part 701, a retreat can be started at the timing which the operation part 701 arrived at the maximum press position. In such a configuration, it is more likely that the player's hand is still touching the operation unit 701 compared to a configuration in which the operation unit 701 is deformed after returning to the maximum projecting position. The effect that the deformation of 701 can be easily transmitted to the player in a tactile manner can be expected.

  However, if the movable member 750 is to be moved at a timing at which the player's hand is likely to be touching, the movement of the movable member 750 may be hindered by the player's hand. In this regard, in the present embodiment, since a configuration in which the movable member 750 is retracted with respect to the upper surface portion 722 of the button member 720, such inconvenience does not occur. Moreover, since it deform | transforms in a press direction, it does not apply a load to a player's hand resulting from a deformation | transformation, and it can avoid suitably that a deformation | transformation obstructs operation.

  Furthermore, since the movable member 750 is moved away from the player's hand, there is no inconvenience that the player's hand is pushed even if the moving speed of the movable member 750 is set high. Thereby, the period required for the deformation can be shortened, and the production using the operation switch unit 700 can be smoothed.

  In the operation unit 701, a pressing operation is allowed in any state before deformation, during deformation, or after deformation. For this reason, there is no inconvenience that the hitting of the operation unit 701 is restricted due to the provision of the deformation function. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both the deformation function and the operability.

  The ratio of the operation surface portion 705 is set so that the button member 720 is larger than the movable member. For this reason, it is suppressed that the operativity of the operation part 701 falls due to the deformation | transformation of the operation part 701.

  When the movable member 750 forms a series of operation surface portions 705 together with the button member 720, the movable member 750 is not fixed at that position but is held at the same position by the urging force of the spring member 761. For this reason, when a large load is applied to the movable member 750 when the player performs a pressing operation, the movable member 750 moves backward against the urging force of the spring member 761, thereby absorbing the load. Will be. Thereby, not only the protection of the movable member 750 but also the protection of the operation unit 701 is realized.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the start timing of the form change of the operation switch unit 600 based on the first single operation is selected from a plurality of patterns. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the timing of changing the configuration of the operation switch unit 600 is set to a specific timing, so that it is easy to convey to the player a tactile change due to the configuration change. One. The main configuration of the operation switch unit in the present embodiment is the same as that of the operation switch unit in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, the description of the fifth embodiment is used for the common configuration, and the configuration different from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  The detection sensor 649 according to the fifth embodiment displays detection information indicating that the operation unit 601 has been operated when the operation unit 601 reaches the maximum pressing position (maximum displacement position). Although the structure which outputs to 410 was employ | adopted, about the detection sensor 649 in this Embodiment, the detection position of the operation part 601 differs. Specifically, in the detection sensor 649 shown in this embodiment, a position between the initial position and the maximum pressed position in the entire movement range of the operation unit 601 is set as the detection position. For this reason, when the player presses the operation unit 601, detection information is output from the detection sensor 649 before the operation unit 601 reaches the maximum pressing position.

  More specifically, the detection sensor 649 is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and light from the light emitting element reaches the light receiving element while the operation unit 601 is in the initial position (standby position) to the detection position. The operation unit 601 prevents the light from the light emitting element from reaching the light receiving element while the operation unit 601 exists in the range from the detection position to the maximum pressing position. The detection signal as detection information output from the detection sensor 649 to the display control device 410 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level when the operation unit 601 reaches the detection position, and the operation unit 601 is switched from the detection position to the maximum pressed position. Is maintained at the HI level while it is present.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42, the process concerning the operation switch form change effect performed by the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 will be described. The operation switch form changing effect process is executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

  In the operation switch form change effect process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not it is during variable display (game play) in which the operation switch form change effect occurs. If the change display is not in progress, the operation switch form change effect processing is terminated as it is, and if the change display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1502.

  In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the first single operation is suggested. If a negative determination is made in step S1502, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, a first single operation suggestion image setting process is performed. Thereby, a pressing operation suggestion image (a pressing operation prompting image) that prompts the player to press the operation switch unit 600 is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. For example, as the pressing operation suggestion image, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and a character such as “Press and hold the button!” Is displayed on the display screen 94a.

  In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the operation switch unit 600 is changed on condition that the operation unit 601 has reached the operation detection position (maximum pressing position). In this form, the form of the operation switch unit 600 is changed on the condition that the period during which the operation unit 601 exists from the detection position to the maximum pressing position is a predetermined pressing period. The suggestion image displayed on the display screen 94a is when the reception end timing of the first single operation is reached without any operation (that is, when the condition for the pressing period is not satisfied), or the above When the condition for the pressing period is satisfied, the information is not displayed.

  Incidentally, the suggestion of the pressing operation is not limited to that on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, and may be performed by outputting sound from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of that on the display screen 94a. Alternatively, the push button member 320 may emit light. Further, these various suggestion patterns may be used in combination.

  After executing the process of step S1503, the process proceeds to step S1504 and the first single operation waiting state setting process is performed. In the first single operation waiting state setting process, the first single operation waiting flag is stored in the first single operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414. Thereafter, the operation switch form change effect processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, that is, if it is determined that the first single operation has been suggested, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the first single operation waiting flag is stored in the first single operation waiting flag storage area of the RAM 414, thereby determining whether or not it is after the first single operation is suggested.

  If it is waiting for the first single operation, the process proceeds to step S1506. In step S1506, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation of the operation unit 601 (specifically, the outer operation member 620) has been performed. Specifically, the presence / absence of the first single operation is determined based on a detection signal (detection information) from the detection sensor 649, that is, based on whether or not the operation unit 601 has reached the maximum pressing position.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1506, the process proceeds to step S1507, and the first single operation completion image setting process is executed. As a result, an operation completion image (for example, a message such as “As it is!”) Is displayed on the display screen 94a instead of the operation suggestion image.

  In a subsequent step S1508, a configuration change timing setting process for the operation switch unit 600 is performed. As already described, in the present embodiment, the operation switch unit 600 is changed in form when the operation unit 601 is maintained in a pressed state for a predetermined pressing period. In the process of step S1508, a timer counter setting process for the pressing period is performed. The value of the timer counter is updated each time the operation switch form change effect process is executed (specifically, “1” is subtracted by “1”). The timing when the value of the timer counter for the pressing period becomes “0” is the mode change timing of the operation switch unit 600.

  Returning to the description of step S1506, if a negative determination is made in step S1506, that is, if it is determined that the first single operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, it is determined whether it is the reception end timing of the first single operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined valid reception period has elapsed since the execution of step S1504. If a negative determination is made in step S1509, the operation switch form change effect process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, display end processing of the first single operation suggestion image is executed in step S1510. Accordingly, the suggestion image (“Press and hold the button!”) Is not displayed on the display screen 94a. In subsequent step S1511, a reception end image setting process is executed. Thereby, instead of the suggestion image, a reception end image (for example, a message such as “INCOMPLETE!”) Is displayed.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the relationship between the valid reception period and the display period of the suggestion image. The length of the display period of the suggestion image differs depending on whether or not the first single operation is performed. In particular, when the first single operation is accepted at the end timing of the valid reception period, the display of the suggestion image is continued until the pressing period elapses from that timing. That is, if the first single operation is performed at least within the reception valid period, the player is prompted to maintain the operation unit 601 in the pressed state until the pressing period elapses. It becomes. In other words, the reception valid period is the display of the suggestion image during the variable display cycle that is the execution target of the form change effect even when the first single operation is performed at the end timing of the reception valid period. The period and the execution period of various effects corresponding to operations described later are set so as to be secured.

  After executing the process of step S1511 or step S1508, the process proceeds to step S1512. After executing the release process of the first single operation waiting state, the operation switch form changing effect process is terminated. In the release processing of the first single operation waiting state, the first single operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414 is erased. Thereby, subsequent 1st single operation becomes invalid.

  Returning to the description of step S1505, if a negative determination is made in step S1505, that is, if it is determined that the state is not waiting for the first single operation, the process proceeds to step S1513. In step S1513, it is determined whether or not it is during the determination period of whether or not the operation member 610 is maintained in the pressed state. Specifically, the determination is performed based on whether or not the value of the timer counter for the pressing period described above is “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, the process proceeds to step S1514, and a pressed state determination process is executed. In the determination process of the pressed state, based on the detection information from the detection sensor 649 (specifically, based on whether or not it is at the HI level), whether or not the operation unit 601 remains in the pressed state (ie, It is determined whether or not the detection position to the maximum pressing position.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the pressing operation is continued, the effect given to the message displayed on the display screen 94a blinks and the message color is changed from a light color to a dark color. The effect of changing, that is, the effect corresponding to the continuing pressing operation is executed. This effect is continued until at least the pressing operation by the player is released.

  In subsequent step S1515, based on the determination result in step S1514, it is determined whether or not a predetermined pressing period has elapsed in the pressed state. When a negative determination is made in step S1515, that is, when it is determined that a predetermined pressing period has not been elapsed although it is maintained in the pressing state, or before the timer counter for the pressing period becomes “0”. If it is determined that the pressed state of the part 601 has been released at least once, the operation switch form change effect process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1515, the flow advances to step S1516 to execute form change processing. In the form change process, first, a light emission start process is executed. In the light emission start process, the supply of electric power to the light emitter 634 built in the operation switch unit 600 is started. As a result, light is emitted from the light emitter 634 to the inner operation member 610. However, since the inner operation member 610 is covered with the outer operation member 620 at the timing of starting the light emission in this way, and the irradiation of light to the outside of the operation unit 601 is restricted, the player emits the light emission. It cannot be confirmed.

  After the light emission start process is executed, the movement restriction release process for the outer operation member 620 is executed. In the movement restriction release processing, output of a drive signal to the solenoid 646 is started. As a result, the solenoid 646 is excited for a preset period (in this embodiment, a period equivalent to the period required for the outer operation member 620 to reach the open position). When the solenoid 646 is excited, the stopper piece 645 moves from the blocking position to the allowable position, and the movement restriction of the outer operation member 620 is released. Next, a process for switching the outer operation member 620 to the open state is executed. In this processing, a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 641. Thereby, the outer side operation member 620 moves to an open position. The output of the drive signal is stopped when the outer operation member 620 reaches the open position.

  After executing the process of step S1516, the display end process of the first single operation suggestion image is executed in step S1517, and the second single operation suggestion image setting process is executed in step S1518. By executing the setting process, an image suggesting the second single operation (for example, a message such as “Press again!”) Is displayed on the display screen 94a.

  Here, in the present embodiment, immediately after the condition for the pressing period is established, the first single operation suggestion image is not hidden, but after a certain interval from the start timing of the form change, The first operation suggesting image is not displayed. By starting the form change while the hand is touching the operation unit 601 (specifically, the outer operation member 620) when the form change occurs, the fact that the form change has occurred is tactile. It is possible to tell the player as a change.

  Then, after executing the setting process of the second single operation waiting state in step S1519, the operation switch form change effect processing is terminated. In the setting process of the second single operation waiting state, the second single operation waiting flag is stored in the second single operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414.

  Returning to the description of step S1513, if a negative determination is made in step S1513, that is, if it is determined that it is not the timing for changing the configuration of the operation switch unit, the process proceeds to step S1520. In step S1520, it is determined whether it is in the state of waiting for the second single operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the second single operation waiting flag is stored in the second single operation waiting flag storage area of the RAM 414.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1520, the process proceeds to the second single operation process in step S1521. About the process for 2nd single operation, since it is the same as that of the said 5th Embodiment, description is used.

  After performing the second single operation process in step S1521, or when a negative determination is made in step S1520, the process proceeds to step S1522. In step S1522, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display. If it is not the end timing of the variable display, the operation switch form change effect processing is ended as it is.

  If it is the end timing of the variable display, an end display image setting process is executed in step S1523, and after the return process from the deformed state to the normal state is executed in step S1524, the operation region expansion effect process is executed. Exit.

  In the setting process of the end display image in step S1523, when the variation display time is a variation display time in which a big hit state occurs, display setting is performed so that a moving image display that the occurrence of the big hit state is confirmed is performed. . In this case, when the result display image setting process is executed and the moving image display is set to correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot state in the result display image setting process, The moving image display is set so as to have a series of contents with the moving image display. On the other hand, when the operation incomplete image setting process is executed, there is a moving image display that dramatically switches from the incomplete operation image to a moving image display indicating that the occurrence of the big hit state is confirmed. .

  In the return processing in step S1524, the return flag is stored in the return flag storage area in the various flag storage area 425. In the timer interrupt processing described above, when this return flag is stored, processing for returning the operation switch unit 600 to the normal state is performed. Since the return process is the same as the return process shown in the fifth embodiment, the description is cited.

  According to the eighth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

  As shown in the fifth embodiment and the like, in the configuration in which the configuration of the operation switch unit 600 is changed (deformed), the player is notified that the configuration of the operation switch unit 600 has been changed. It can be communicated by simple changes. In order to exhibit the function of transmitting such a tactile change, it is preferable that the above change occurs while the player is touching the operation switch unit 600.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the operation unit 601 is pressed, the state change is started before the operation unit 601 returns to the initial position (standby position). Thus, it is possible to increase the possibility that the state change occurs during the period in which the player's hand is touching. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player has missed the state change, and to suitably exhibit the state change function. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the operation means of the player, and consequently the degree of attention to the game.

  Since the configuration of the operation switch unit 600 is changed on the condition that the operation is continued by the player, it is possible to suitably increase the chance that the change is performed in a situation where the player is touching the operation unit 601. it can. As a result, the inconvenience that the fact that the change has been made is overlooked can be made difficult to occur.

  When a tactile change is caused by the operation switch unit, it is assumed that it is difficult to transmit the tactile change if the responsiveness is low. Such inconvenience becomes remarkable when, for example, the surface temperature of the operation switch unit is changed. In this regard, if the configuration of operating a part of the outline of the operation unit 601 as shown in the present embodiment, the responsiveness can be easily ensured.

  While the operation unit 601 is kept pressed, a display effect corresponding to the operation is performed. As described above, when the player responds to the suggestion of continuation of the operation, it is easy to secure a period during which the player keeps touching the operation unit 601 by performing the display effect. In this way, by changing the form of the operation unit 601 during the period in which the operation unit 601 is still being touched, it is possible to easily convey to the player the fact that the form change has been performed.

  It is possible to omit the long press suggestion function as the “reminder” shown in the present embodiment. In a configuration in which the operation unit 601 is displaced by a player's pressing operation, the operation unit 601 is often pushed to the maximum pressing position. Therefore, it is assumed that the player's hand is more likely to be touched by adopting a configuration that accepts an operation halfway between the maximum pressing position and the initial position, that is, before reaching the maximum pressing position. A state change can be performed below. By starting the state change under such circumstances, it is possible to suppress the fact that the change has been made difficult to be transmitted to the player even when the long press suggestion function is omitted.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the appearance of the operation switch unit 40 changes according to the gaming situation. Also in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the appearance of the operation switch unit changes according to the gaming situation as in the first embodiment, but the configuration that changes the appearance and the mode of the change are the first. This is different from the embodiment. Hereinafter, the operation switch unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the operation switch unit 800.

  First, the basic configuration of the operation switch unit 800 will be described. The operation switch unit 800 is disposed on the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14 as in the first embodiment. A housing portion 28c for housing the operation switch unit 800 is formed in the central portion of the upper bulging portion 28, and a part of the operation switch unit 800 housed in the housing portion 28c (a button member to be described later in detail). The operation surface portion 811) of 810 is exposed upward through a substantially circular opening 28e formed in the upper surface portion 28d of the upper bulging portion 28.

  The operation switch unit 800 includes a button member 810 as a target of a pressing operation by a player, and a holder portion 820 that holds the button member 810 in a state in which the button member 810 can be displaced up and down, and the holder portion 820 is an upper bulging portion. It is integrated with the upper bulging part 28 by being fixed to 28.

  The button member 810 has a curved operation surface portion 811 that is convex upward, and a cylindrical base portion 812 that extends downward from the periphery of the operation surface portion 811. The operation surface portion 811 and the base portion 812 have an opening 28e. The outer diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the opening 28e.

  The holder part 820 is a combination of a cover member 830 arranged so as to cover the gap between the button member 810 and the edge part of the opening part 28e and a base member 840 functioning as an attachment part to the upper bulging part 28. Thus, the button member 810 is held in a state where the operation surface portion 811 of the button member 810 protrudes upward from a central opening 831 formed in the cover member 830.

  The cover member 830 is formed with a cylindrical portion 832 through which the base portion 812 can be inserted. The cylindrical portion 832 extends downward from the edge portion of the central opening 831, and the inner peripheral surface thereof is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the button member 810 (base portion 812). Thereby, the displacement direction of the button member 810 based on the pressing operation by the player is regulated so as to be the vertical direction.

  An annular flange portion 813 that protrudes in the radial direction of the base portion 812 is formed at the end portion of the base portion 812 opposite to the operation surface portion 811, that is, the end portion that opens downward. The flange portion 813 is inserted into the gap between the cylindrical portion 832 and the bottom plate portion 841 of the base member 840.

  A protruding portion 842 that protrudes toward the flange portion 813 (upward) is formed at a portion of the bottom plate portion 841 that faces the flange portion 813. The projecting portion 842 has a substantially cylindrical shape, and a coil spring 848 as an urging means for urging the button member 810 to the projecting side (upward) is inserted into the projecting portion 842 (concave portion 843).

  One end of the coil spring 848 is in contact with the bottom surface of the concave portion 843 and the other end is in contact with the flange portion 813, and the flange portion 813 is pressed against the lower end portion of the cylindrical portion 832 by the coil spring 848. Yes. That is, the coil spring 848 is sandwiched between the bottom surface and the flange portion 813 in a compressed state.

  When the player presses the button member 810, the button member 810 is displaced downward against the biasing force of the coil spring 848, and the flange portion 813 hits the upper end surface of the projecting portion 842, so that the displacement is further increased. Will be regulated. That is, the protruding portion 842 (the pedestal member 840) is provided with a stopper function that prevents displacement of the button member 810, that is, a function that defines the maximum pressing position of the button member 810.

  When the pressing operation by the player is released, that is, when the player releases his / her hand from the button member 810, the button member 810 is pushed upward by the biasing force of the coil spring 848. When the flange portion 813 hits the cylinder portion 832 of the cover member 830, the return to the initial position is completed.

  Further, the holder portion 820 is present at a specific position that is an intermediate position between the position detection sensor 825 for detecting that the button member 810 is present at the maximum pressing position and the initial position and the maximum pressing position. And a detection sensor 826 that detects that the sensor has moved away from the initial position. These position detection sensors 825 and 826 are electrically connected to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 can grasp that the button member 810 exists at the specific position or the maximum pressed position based on detection information (detection signals) from the position detection sensors 825 and 826.

  The button member 810 (specifically, the operation surface portion 811) in the present embodiment is formed using a light-transmitting synthetic resin material, and from the light emitting unit 850 disposed therein (hollow portion). One feature is that various patterns are projected on the operation surface portion 811 by light. Hereinafter, the light emitting unit 850 will be described.

  The light emitting unit 850 includes a light emitting substrate 860 on which a plurality of light emitters 861 (specifically, LEDs) are mounted, and a substrate holder 870 that holds the light emitting substrate 860. The light emitting substrate 860 is electrically connected to the display control device 410, and the light emitter 861 emits light in a predetermined manner when a light emission signal is input from the display control device 410 (when power is supplied). It is the composition to do. As a result, light as predetermined display information is output from the light emitting unit 850 to the operation surface 811 side.

  The substrate holder 870 has a counter plate portion 871 facing the light emitting substrate 860 from above, and the light emitting substrate 860 and the substrate holder 870 are attached to the counter plate portion 871 by screwing. It is integrated. The light emitting substrate 860 and the substrate holder 870 integrated in this manner are arranged so that the element mounting surface 862 on which various elements such as the light emitter 861 are mounted on the light emitting substrate 860 faces the operation surface portion 811 side (upward). Has been.

  A mirror forming layer 815 is provided on the entire upper surface of the button member 810 (specifically, the operation surface portion 811). The mirror forming layer 815 is a half mirror (beam splitter), and is configured to transmit part of the light emitted to the button member 810 and reflect the remaining part.

  In particular, the reflectance of light irradiated from the outside (upper side) of the button member 810 is set higher than the reflectance of light irradiated from the inner side (lower side) of the button member 810. Thereby, it is suppressed that the irradiation efficiency to the exterior of the button member 810 of the light from the light-emitting body 861 falls. In addition, the internal structure of the operation switch unit 800 (for example, light emission) is promoted by prompting reflection of light from a light or the like disposed on the ceiling or the like of the game hall to the button member 810 in a situation where the light emitter 861 is turned off. It is avoided that the substrate 860 or the like) is easily visible through the operation surface portion 811.

  A light diffusing portion 816 is formed in a portion of the button member 810 (operation surface portion 811) facing the light emitting unit 850. The light diffusing portion 816 is obtained by applying a matte process (ground glass process) and an uneven process to the surface of a synthetic resin material having transparency. By providing the light diffusing portion 816 in this way, the light passing through the button member 810 is dispersed in multiple directions so that the opposite side is not clearly visible through the light diffusing portion 816. In other words, the light diffusing unit 816 is provided with a structure that allows light to pass therethrough and that is positioned behind when viewed from the front, specifically, makes the light emitting unit 850 and the like difficult to view or cannot be viewed. ing.

  When the light emitter 861 emits light, the light from the light emitter 861 is emitted outside the operation switch unit 800 through the button member 810. At this time, by diffusing the light emitted from each of the light emitters 861, it is possible to visually recognize the player or the like as if the operation surface portion 811 itself of the button member 810 is emitting light. Further, the light emitter 861 itself can be suppressed from being visually recognized regardless of whether or not the light emitter 861 emits light.

  The substrate holder 870 of the light emitting unit 850 is formed of a colored and opaque synthetic resin material. Openings 872a and 872b are formed in portions of the counter plate portion 871 of the substrate holder 870 that face each light emitter 861. Each of the openings 872a and 872b penetrates in the thickness direction of the opposing plate 871, and each light emitter 861 is exposed to the operation surface 811 side (upward) through the openings 872a and 872b. For this reason, the light from the light emitter 861 is configured to reach the operation surface portion 811 by being emitted through the openings 872a and 872b.

  In the present embodiment, the holder portion 820 is formed using a colored and opaque synthetic resin material, so that light from the light emitting unit 850 is prevented from being emitted through a portion other than the operation surface portion 811. ing.

  Here, each opening part 872a, 872b and the structure relevant to it are demonstrated based on FIG.43 and FIG.44. FIG. 44 is a schematic view of the light emitting unit 850 viewed from the front side, and a part of the configuration of the button member 810 and the like is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the openings 872a are provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the light emitter 861, whereas the openings 872b extend so as to straddle the plurality of light emitters 861. In particular, the opening 872b is substantially V-shaped when the element mounting surface 862 is viewed from the front. On the periphery of the opening 872a, a standing wall portion 873 is formed standing up in front of the gaming machine (see FIG. 43). In other words, the light emitter 861 includes the first light emitter 861a disposed in the peripheral region SE surrounding the region partitioned by the opening 872b and the standing wall portion 873 (hereinafter, partitioned region DE for convenience), and the partitioned region DE. And a second light emitter 861b disposed on the surface.

  The standing wall portion 873 has an annular shape extending along the periphery of the opening portion 872a, and the rising direction of the light passing through the opening portion 872 is restricted by the standing wall portion 873. Thus, if attention is paid to the function of regulating the traveling direction of light, the upright wall portion 873 can be referred to as a “light regulating portion 873”, and further guides light in a specific direction. If the point is noted, the upright wall portion 873 can also be referred to as a “light guide portion 873”.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the standing amount L1 of the standing wall portion 873 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension D1 between the standing wall portion 873 and the operation surface portion 811, and the standing wall portion 873 and the operation surface portion 811 In the meantime, a region where light from the light emitter 861 can diffuse after reaching the operation surface portion 811 after leaving the region where the light irradiation direction is regulated by the standing wall portion 873 is secured.

  In the present embodiment, the distance dimension is also the distance difference between the passage length of the passage portion through which light passes in the opening 872a and the passage length of the passage portion through which light passes in the opening portion 872b and the standing wall portion 873. Although it is set larger than D1, the following effects can be expected by changing this and setting the passage difference smaller than the distance dimension D1. That is, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the difference between the degree of light diffusion from the light emitter 861 corresponding to the opening 872a and the degree of light diffusion from the light emitter 861 corresponding to the opening 872b.

  With reference to FIG. 44 again, diffusion of light emitted from the second light emitter 861b is suppressed at least until it passes through the partition region DE. Thereby, the irradiation range of the light with respect to the operation surface part 811 is restrict | limited. On the other hand, the light emitted from the first light emitter 861a is wider than the light from the second light emitter 861b because it is allowed to diffuse outside the extension region of the opening 872a when passing through the opening 872a. Will spread to the range.

  The partition area DE has a V-shape when viewed from the front of the light emitting substrate 860, and a plurality of second light emitters 861b are arranged side by side along the partition area DE. Therefore, when only the second light emitter 861b emits light, it appears as if the entire partition area DE emits light, and it can be expressed as if the light emitting substrate 860 emits light in a V shape. . When only the light emitter 861a emits light, the peripheral area SE emits light and the partition area DE is in a blank state. As a result, the above-mentioned “V” -shaped pattern is displayed in reverse (light-off display).

  On the other hand, when both the first light emitter 861a and the second light emitter 861b emit light, it is as if the entire light emitting substrate 860 emits light, and the boundary between the partition region DE and the peripheral region SE is ambiguous. Become. This makes it difficult to determine the V-shaped pattern described above.

  One feature of the operation switch unit 800 according to the present embodiment is that it includes a variable mechanism that changes the positional relationship between the operation surface portion 811 of the button member 810 and the light emitting unit 850 described above. Specifically, the light emitting unit 850 is movable, and the appearance of the operation switch unit 800 is changed by changing the distance between the button member 810 (specifically, the operation surface portion 811) and the light emitting unit 850 by a variable mechanism. One. Therefore, the variable mechanism and the configuration accompanying it will be described below with reference to FIG.

  A receiving portion 844 as a placement portion on which the light emitting unit 850 is placed is formed at a portion of the bottom plate portion 841 facing the light emitting unit 850. The receiving portion 844 protrudes upward from the bottom plate portion 841, and the position where it contacts the receiving portion 844 is the initial position of the light emitting unit 850.

  On the other hand, a portion of the bottom plate portion 841 that does not face the light emitting unit 850 is provided with a standing portion 845 that rises upward from the bottom plate portion 841. The rising amount of the standing portion 845 from the bottom plate portion 841 is set larger than the protruding amount of the receiving portion 844 from the bottom plate portion 841, and the tip portion of the rising portion is above the opposing plate portion 871 of the substrate holder 870. Is located.

  A return portion 846 is formed at the tip of the upright portion 845 so as to be interposed between the light emitting unit 850 and the operation surface portion 811. A coil spring 849 as an urging means for urging the light emitting unit 850 toward the side away from the operation surface portion 811 (to the initial position) is attached to a portion of the return portion 846 facing the light emitting unit 850. More specifically, a concave portion into which the coil spring 849 is fitted is formed at a portion of the return portion 846 facing the light emitting unit 850, and a part of the coil spring 849 protrudes from the concave portion.

  The tip portion of the coil spring 849 is in contact with the substrate holder 870 (specifically, the opposing plate portion 871) of the light emitting unit 850, and the light emitting unit 850 is pressed against the receiving portion 844 by the coil spring 849.

  The pedestal member 840 is mounted with a solenoid 880 serving as a displacement driving means for displacing the light emitting unit 850. The solenoid 880 is electrically connected to the display control device 410 and is configured to switch from a non-excitation state to an excitation state when a drive signal from the display control device 410 is input.

  The main body 881 of the solenoid 880 is disposed on the opposite side of the light emitting unit 850 across the bottom plate portion 841 of the base member 840. A through-hole penetrating in the thickness direction of the bottom plate portion 841 is formed in a portion of the bottom plate portion 841 facing the light emitting substrate 860, and a plunger 882 of a solenoid 880 is inserted into the through-hole.

  The distal end portion of the plunger 882 is in contact with the lower surface of the light emitting substrate 860 in the non-excited state, and the plunger 882 is displaced upward when the solenoid 880 is in an excited state. As a result, the light emitting unit 850 is pushed upward and displaced toward the operation surface portion 811 against the urging force of the coil spring 849. When the light emitting unit 850 is displaced in this way, the substrate holder 870 is brought into contact with the return portion 846, so that further upward displacement is restricted. That is, the return portion 846 is provided with a stopper function for preventing the light emitting unit 850 from being displaced, and the return portion 846 defines the maximum displacement amount of the light emitting unit 850.

  When the solenoid 880 is in a non-excited state, the pressing by the plunger 882 is released. As a result, the light emitting unit 850 is returned to the initial position by the biasing force of the coil spring 849.

  The holder 820 of the operation switch unit 800 includes a position detection sensor 895 that detects that the light emitting unit 850 is present at the maximum displacement position, and a detection sensor 896 that detects that the light emission unit 850 is present at the initial position. Is provided. Each of these position detection sensors 895 and 896 is electrically connected to the display control device 410, and the display control device 410 is based on detection information (detection signals) from these position detection sensors 895 and 896. It is possible to grasp that 850 exists at the initial position or the maximum displacement position.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the operation range of the button member 810 and the operation range of the light emitting unit 850 will be supplementarily described. As already described, the operating range (operation stroke) of the button member 810 is defined by the upper surface of the protruding portion 842 of the holder portion 820 and the lower end portion of the cylindrical portion 832, and the stroke width S 1 is determined by the light emitting unit 850. Is set smaller than the stroke width S2. The difference between the stroke widths S1 and S2 is set smaller than the distance dimension D1. For this reason, even if the button member 810 is pushed into the maximum pressing position while the light emitting unit 850 is waiting at the initial position, the operation surface portion 811 does not hit the light emitting unit 850.

  The stroke width S2 is set to be equal to the distance dimension D1. Therefore, when the light emitting unit 850 moves toward the maximum displacement position while the button member 810 is waiting at the initial position, the upright wall portion 873 of the light emitting unit 850 comes into contact with the operation surface portion 811. It becomes. That is, the position of the light emitting unit 850 is more dominant than the position of the button member 810 as to whether or not the light emitting unit 850 contacts the operation surface portion 811 of the button member 810.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the change of the light emission mode based on the pressing operation and the displacement of the light emitting unit 850 will be described. FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the operation switch unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), when both the button member 810 and the light emitting unit 850 are waiting at the initial position, the light is diffused between the operation surface portion 811 and the light emitting unit 850. Space is secured. For this reason, the entire operation surface portion 811 emits light gently by causing both the light emitters 861a and 861b to emit light.

  When the button member 810 is pressed from the state shown in FIG. 45A, the button member 810 is displaced downward against the urging force of the coil spring 848. Further, when the flange portion 813 comes into contact with the protruding portion 842, further displacement is restricted (see FIG. 45B). As already described, the maximum stroke amount S1 of the button member 810 is set smaller than the maximum stroke amount S2 of the light emitting unit 850. Therefore, under the situation where the light emitting unit 850 is waiting at the initial position, the diffusion space remains between the operation surface portion 811 and the light emitting unit 850. That is, even if one or both of the light emitters 861a and 861b emit light in the state shown in FIG. 45 (b), it is difficult to identify the letter “V”.

  When a drive signal is output to the solenoid 880 in the state shown in FIG. 45B, the protruding amount of the plunger 882 increases, and the light emitting unit 850 is pushed upward. The light emitting unit 850 is displaced upward against the urging force of the coil spring 849, and the standing wall portion 873 of the light emitting unit 850 contacts the inner surface of the operation surface portion 811 (see FIG. 45C). Here, on the condition that the operation surface portion 811 is still being pressed by the player, further displacement of the light emitting unit 850 is restricted. As described above, in a state where the operation surface portion 811 and the light emitting unit 850 (specifically, the standing wall portion 873) are in contact with each other, the diffusion space between the operation surface portion 811 and the standing wall portion 873 is lost. For this reason, it is suppressed that the light emitted from the standing wall portion 873 is diffused before reaching the operation surface portion 811, and the light passing through the region partitioned by the standing wall portion 873 is suppressed from spreading. The operation surface portion 811 is passed. As a result, the letter “V” appears on the operation surface portion 811.

  In the present embodiment, when the light emitting unit 850 is pushed by the solenoid 880, the light emitting unit 850 is displaced against the urging force of the coil spring 849. By applying the urging force in this way, the light emitting unit 850 is prevented from violently colliding with the operation surface portion 811. That is, by utilizing the coil spring 849 as a brake, it is suppressed that the operation of the light emitting unit 850 is transmitted to the player tactilely.

  When the player releases the hand from the button member 810 (operation surface portion 811) in the state shown in FIG. 45 (c), the button member 810 is returned to the initial position by the biasing force of the coil spring 848. . In the present embodiment, the biasing forces of the coil springs 848 and 849, the output of the solenoid 880, etc. are set so that the displacement speed of the light emitting unit 850 toward the maximum displacement position is slightly faster than the return speed of the button member 810. It has been adjusted. For this reason, in more detail, the button member 810 is displaced to the initial position while being pressed by the light emitting unit 850. In this way, the light emission mode changes by displacing the light emitting unit 850 integrally with the button member 810, that is, by displacing the light emitting unit 850 while avoiding a change in the positional relationship with the button member 810. Is avoiding. Therefore, it is avoided that the letter “V” that appears on the operation surface portion 811 due to the displacement of the light emitting unit 850 or the button member 810 is obscured.

  In addition, by outputting a drive signal to the solenoid 880 in the state shown in FIG. 45 (a), the state shown in FIG. 45 (d) does not pass through the state shown in FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c). It is also possible to move to Even when such an operation pattern is executed, the coil spring 849 functions as a brake, so that the light emitting unit 850 can be prevented from strikingly colliding with the operation surface portion 811. Incidentally, when such an operation pattern is executed, the light emitter 861 is extinguished during the operation period of the light emitting unit 850, so that it is easy to tell the player that the light emission mode before and after the operation has changed.

  When the output of the drive signal is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 45 (d), the plunger 882 of the solenoid 880 is retracted and the light emitting unit 850 is returned to the initial position by the biasing force of the coil spring 849.

  In the case where the operation of the light emitting unit 850 is started in a state where the button member 810 is not waiting at the maximum pressing position, when the player performs a pressing operation while the light emitting unit 850 is operating, The operation surface portion 811 can collide with the light emitting unit 850. However, since the solenoid 880 is employed as the driving means in the present embodiment, even if the movement of the light emitting unit 850 is hindered by the driving force, the pressing operation is not substantially disabled. An excessive load is not applied to the driving means or the like by the operation. Thereby, the guarantee of operativity and protection of a drive means are implement | achieved.

  Next, various processes relating to the setting of the display mode of the operation switch unit 800 executed by the MPU 412 of the display control apparatus 410 will be described.

  The MPU 412 executes normal processing for repeatedly executing a plurality of types of predetermined processes in a predetermined order while operating power is supplied. As the process related to the display mode setting in the normal process, a command determination process for specifying the type of command input from the sound lamp control device 143 and executing a process corresponding to the specified command, and an operation of the button member 810 are effective. At least an operation suggesting process that suggests that a special operation corresponding effect for performing a special operation corresponding effect is set. Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described.

(Command judgment processing)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46, in the command determination process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a change start command is received from the audio lamp control device 143. Various commands received from the sound lamp control device 143 are stored in a command storage area provided in the RAM 414, and are erased by being read out in the command determination process.

  If the change start command has been received, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not the change start command includes information for specifying the display mode of the operation switch unit 800. Specifically, it is determined whether the information on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 included in the variation start command is included in the information on the display mode value group stored in the ROM 413. When the information for specifying the display mode is included, the process for specifying the display mode in steps S1603 to S1607 is executed, and when the information for specifying the display mode is not included, it is left as it is. The process proceeds to step S1608.

  In the process for specifying the display mode, first, in step S1603, it is determined whether or not information on the first display mode is included. If the first display mode information is included, the first display mode specifying process is executed in step S1604, and then the process proceeds to step S1608. In the specific process for the first display mode, the first display flag (first display state information) is stored in the first display flag storage area (first display state information storage means) among the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414. .

  If it is determined in step S1603 that the first display mode information is not included, it is determined in step S1605 whether the second display mode information is included. If the information on the second display mode is included, after the specific process for the second display mode is executed in step S1606, the process proceeds to step S1608. In the specific processing for the second display mode, the second display flag (second display state information) is stored in the second display flag storage area (second display state information storage means) among the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414. .

  If it is determined in step S1605 that the second display mode information is not included, the third display mode specifying process is executed in step S1607, and then the process proceeds to step S1608. In the specific processing for the third display mode, the third display flag (third display state information) is stored in the third display flag storage area (third display state information storage means) among the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414. .

  In step S1608, a specific process for variation display is executed. In the specific processing, based on the variation start command and the type command, the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 94, the symbol variation display mode including the reach display and reach effect, and the symbol type to be finally stopped are displayed. The specified information is stored in the RAM 414. Thereafter, the command determination process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1601 that the change start command has not been input, the process proceeds to step S1609, and after executing other specific processing, this command determination processing is terminated. In other specific processes, when the input command is a stop display command, a jackpot start command, or a jackpot end command, a process corresponding to each command is executed. In other specific processes, if it is determined that a command has not been input, the process is terminated as it is, and if the input command cannot be analyzed, the process is also terminated.

  The details of the display mode in each display mode are determined together with the execution of the command determination process. Here, supplementary explanations of various display modes will be given.

  The second display mode and the third display mode are modes that are selected when the special operation corresponding effect is performed. In addition, special operation corresponding effects corresponding to the second display mode and special operation corresponding effects corresponding to the third display mode are respectively set as special operation corresponding effects, and the contents of these special operation corresponding effects are as follows: Some of them have different configurations. In addition, the second display mode occurs with a predetermined probability in both the situation where the jackpot state will eventually occur and the situation where the jackpot state does not occur, as in the above reach display. It occurs with a predetermined probability in a situation where a jackpot state finally occurs.

  When the first display mode is selected, the display mode is determined for each game time with reference to the display mode lottery table corresponding to the first display mode stored in advance in the ROM 413 of the display control device 410. The display mode lottery table stores a light emission mode corresponding data group that determines which light emitter 861 emits light at what timing. In addition, the display mode lottery table includes a table that is referred to in the normal gaming state and a table that is referred to when the display is shifted to the big hit state. Is planned.

  Although the details will be described later, the first display mode is a mode used when suggesting to the player that the operation of the operation switch unit 800 is effectively accepted, and the button member 810 (specifically, the operation surface portion 811). The suggestion is made by emitting light.

  The display modes of the second display mode and the third display mode are also determined with reference to the display mode lottery table provided individually for each display mode. Specifically, in the second display mode, high-speed flashing display is executed by operating the button member 810, and the flashing pattern data group of the high-speed flashing display is stored in the display mode lottery table corresponding to the second display mode. Yes. In the third display mode, display of a predetermined character (specifically, “V”) is executed by operating the button member 810. A display mode lottery table corresponding to the third display mode corresponds to a color arrangement pattern data group of this character. Stored in In the second display mode and the third display mode, the jackpot expectation varies depending on the selected display mode.

(Operation suggestion process)
Next, the operation suggesting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The operation suggesting process is executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

  In the operation suggestion process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a variable display is being generated in which an operation suggestion (effect corresponding to the first display mode) occurs. If the change display is not in progress, the operation suggestion process is terminated, and if the change display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1702.

  In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the operation suggestion has been performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, operation suggestion image setting processing is performed. Thus, a pressing operation suggestion image (pressing operation prompting image) that prompts the player to press the operation switch unit 800 is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. For example, as the pressing operation suggestion image, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and characters such as “Press the button!” Are displayed on the display screen 94a.

  The suggestion image displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed when the operation reception end timing is reached without the operation being performed, or when the operation is performed within a period during which the operation is effectively received. Become. Incidentally, the suggestion of the pressing operation is not limited to that on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, and may be performed by outputting sound from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of that on the display screen 94a. Also good. Further, these various suggestion patterns may be used in combination.

  After executing the process of step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704, and it is determined whether or not this variable display time corresponds to the first display mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705 to execute a first display mode-compatible light emission control process.

  In the first display mode compatible light emission control process, the entire operation surface 811 is caused to emit light by blinking or lighting the light emitter 861 while the light emitting unit 850 is kept in the initial position. Thereby, it is suggested that the player is in a state in which the pressing operation of the operation switch unit 800 is effectively accepted.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1704, the operation suggestion by the light emitting unit 850 is not performed, and only the suggestion on the display screen 94a described above is executed. It should be noted that in the effect drawing lottery table, the above two suggestions can be used in combination when only the suggestion on the display screen 94a is performed when shifting to the special gaming state (in the case of a winning result). In the case where the game does not shift to the special gaming state (in the case of a losing result), only the suggestion on the display screen 94a may be performed as compared with the case where the above two suggestions are used together. Is configured to be high.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1704, or after the processing of step S1705 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1706, and an operation waiting state setting process is performed. In the operation wait state setting process, the operation wait flag is stored in the operation wait flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414. Thereafter, the operation suggesting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, that is, if it is determined that the operation has been suggested, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, it is determined whether the operation waiting flag is stored in the outgoing operation waiting flag storage area of the RAM 414, thereby determining whether the operation has been suggested.

  If it is in the operation waiting state, the process proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation of the operation switch unit 800 (specifically, the button member 810) has been performed. Specifically, based on a detection signal (detection information) from the detection sensor 825, the presence / absence of an operation is determined based on whether or not the button member 810 has reached the maximum pressing position. In the present embodiment, the maximum pressing position is the operation detection position, but the operation detection position does not necessarily need to be the maximum pressing position and may be arbitrarily set. However, in order to avoid erroneous detection, it is preferable to be closer to the maximum pressing position among the initial position to the maximum pressing position.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1708, the process advances to step S1709 to execute an operation completion image setting process. Thereby, an operation completion image (for example, a message such as “OK!”) Is displayed on the display screen 94a instead of the operation suggestion image. As a result, the display effect being executed on the display screen 94a is switched to the effect corresponding to the operation. That is, the mode of subsequent display effects varies depending on whether or not there is an operation.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1708, the process proceeds to step S1710. In step S1710, it is determined whether or not it is an operation reception end timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined acceptance valid period has elapsed since the execution of step S1706. If a negative determination is made in step S1710, the operation suggesting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1710, an acceptance end suggestion image setting process is executed in step S1711. As a result, the suggestion image (“Press the button!”) Is not displayed on the display screen 94a, and a reception end image (for example, a message such as “INCOMPLETE!”) Is displayed instead of the suggestion image. It will be.

  After executing the process of step S1709 or step S1711, the process proceeds to step S1712, and an operation waiting state canceling process is executed. In the operation waiting state release processing, the operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414 is erased. Thereby, subsequent operations are invalidated.

  Then, after executing the light emission stop process in step S1713, the operation suggesting process is terminated. In the light emission stop process, the output of the light emission signal to the light emitter 861 is stopped, and the display is returned to the state before the indication of the display state of the operation switch unit 800 (specifically, the operation surface portion 811) is started, so that the operation is effective. Inform the player that the period has expired.

  Returning to the description of step S1707, if a negative determination is made in step S1707, that is, if it is determined that the operation is not waiting, the process proceeds to step S1714. In step S1714, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display. If it is not the end timing of the variable display, the operation suggesting process is terminated as it is.

  If it is the end timing of the variable display, an end display image setting process is executed in step S1715, and the operation suggesting process ends.

  In the setting process of the end display image in step S1715, when the variation display time is a variation display time in which a big hit state occurs, display setting is performed so that a moving image display that the occurrence of the big hit state is confirmed is performed. . In this case, when the result display image setting process is executed and the moving image display is set to correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot state in the result display image setting process, The moving image display is set so as to have a series of contents with the moving image display. On the other hand, when the operation incomplete image setting process is executed, there is a moving image display that dramatically switches from the incomplete operation image to a moving image display indicating that the occurrence of the big hit state is confirmed. .

  In the operation suggestion in the present embodiment, the light emitting unit 850 is set to stand by at the initial position. However, it is possible to change the light emitting unit 850 and displace the light emitting unit 850 during the suggestion. For example, the light emitting unit 850 may be reciprocated up and down in the vicinity of the intermediate position to make it appear as if the light is fluctuating or the light emission intensity is changing.

(Special operation compatible production process)
Next, the special operation response effect process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the special operation handling effect process is executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

  In the special operation corresponding effect processing, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the variable operation is being performed in which a special operation corresponding effect (effect corresponding to the second display mode or the third display mode) is generated. If the change display is not in progress, the special operation handling effect process is terminated as it is, and if the change display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1802.

  In step S1802, it is determined whether or not a special operation has been suggested. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, special operation suggestion image setting processing is performed. Thereby, a pressing operation suggestion image (pressing operation prompting image) that prompts the player to press the operation switch unit 800 (special operation: long press operation) is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. . For example, as the pressing operation suggestion image, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and a character such as “Press and hold the button!” Is displayed on the display screen 94a.

  After executing the process of step S1803, the process proceeds to step S1804, and the light emission control process corresponding to the second display mode or the third display mode is executed. As a result, a light emission signal is output to the light emitter 861 in a preset manner. In the second display mode and the third display mode, a table storing a light emission pattern for suggesting a special operation is shared, and one light emission pattern is selected with reference to the table.

  By executing the light emission control processing in step S1804, the light emitter 861 of the light emitting unit 850 is turned on or blinks, and the entire operation surface portion 811 emits light gently. Thereby, it is suggested that the player is in a state in which the pressing operation of the operation switch unit 800 is effectively accepted.

  After executing the process of step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1805 to perform a special operation waiting state setting process. In the special operation waiting state setting process, the special operation waiting flag is stored in the special operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414. Thereafter, the special operation corresponding effect processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1806, that is, if it is determined that a special operation has been suggested, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the light emitter 861 of the light emitting unit 850 is turned off. That is, it is determined whether or not a light emission signal is output to the light emitter 861.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1807, that is, if it is determined that the light emitter 861 is emitting light, the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, it is determined whether or not the button member 810 is away from the initial position. Specifically, based on a detection signal (detection information) from the position detection sensor 826, it is determined whether or not the button member 810 has been moved from the initial position.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1808, that is, if it is determined that the player has not yet pressed the button member 810, the special operation-corresponding effect processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1808, the process proceeds to step S1809 to execute a light emission stop process. In the light emission stop process, the output of the light emission signal started in step S1804 is stopped. As a result, the operation switch unit 800 (specifically, the operation surface portion 811) is turned off.

  After executing the process of step S1809, the process proceeds to step S1810, and it is determined whether or not this variable display time corresponds to the third display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the special operation corresponding effect processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, the light emission unit driving process is executed in the subsequent step S1811, and the special operation-compatible effect process is terminated.

  In the light emitting unit driving process, output of a driving signal to the solenoid 880 is started. Thereby, the solenoid 880 is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state, and the protrusion amount of the plunger 882 increases. As a result, the light emitting unit 850 is pushed up to the operation surface portion 811 side.

  Returning to the description of step S1807, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1807, that is, if it is determined that the light is extinguished, the process proceeds to step S1812. In step S1812, it is determined whether or not the operation switch unit 800 has been operated by the player. Specifically, based on a detection signal (detection information) from the detection sensor 825, it is determined whether or not the button member 810 has reached the maximum pressing position.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1812, the process advances to step S1813 to execute a special operation completion image setting process. Thereby, an operation completion image (for example, a message such as “OK!”) Is displayed on the display screen 94a instead of the operation suggestion image.

  After executing the process of step S1813, a special operation waiting state canceling process is executed in step S1814, and the special operation corresponding effect production process is terminated. In the special operation waiting state canceling process, the special operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414 is erased. Thereby, subsequent operations are invalidated.

  In the present embodiment, a special operation-corresponding effect is performed when the button member 810 is maintained in a pressed state for a predetermined pressing period. In the process of step S1814, a timer counter setting process for the pressing period is performed in conjunction with the above process. The value of the timer counter is updated every time the special operation corresponding effect production process is executed (specifically, “1” is subtracted by “1”). When the value of the timer counter for the pressing period becomes “0”, one of the execution conditions of the special operation corresponding effect described later is satisfied.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1812, that is, if it is determined that the operation switch unit 800 is not operated, the process proceeds to step S1815. In step S1815, it is determined whether it is an operation reception end timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined valid reception period has elapsed since the execution of step S1805. If a negative determination is made in step S1815, the special operation-compatible effect processing is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1815, a special operation suggestion image display end process is executed in step S1816, and a reception end image setting process is executed in subsequent step S1817. As a result, the suggestion image ("Press and hold the button!") Is not displayed on the display screen 94a, and a reception end image (for example, a message such as "INCOMPLETE!") Is displayed instead of the suggestion image. The Rukoto. After executing the process of step S1817, the process proceeds to step S1814. After executing the special operation waiting state canceling process, the special operation corresponding effect production process is terminated.

  Returning to step S1806 again, if a negative determination is made in step S1806, that is, if it is determined that the operation is not waiting, the process proceeds to step S1818. In step S1818, it is determined whether or not the light emission effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a later-described flag for lighting effect is stored in various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414. The lighting effect flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 425 when the operation corresponding effect is started on condition that a special operation (long press operation) is performed by the player, and the operation corresponding effect is ended. This flag is deleted when

  If a negative determination is made in step S1818, it is determined in the subsequent step S1819 whether or not the light emission effect is being regulated. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a later-described light effect regulation flag is stored in various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414. The light emission effect restriction flag is a flag that is stored in various flag storage areas 425 on the condition that no special operation (long press operation) is performed by the player, and is erased when the operation corresponding effect is ended. is there.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1819, that is, if it is determined that neither the light emission effect nor the light emission effect is regulated, the process proceeds to the light emission effect start process in step S1820.

  Here, the light emission effect start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Process for starting the lighting effect)
In the process for starting the light emission effect, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not it is during the determination period whether the pressed state is maintained. Specifically, the determination is performed based on whether or not the value of the timer counter for the pressing period is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the main light emission effect start process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902, and a determination process of the pressed state is executed. In the determination process of the pressed state, based on the detection information from the detection sensor 825 (specifically, based on whether or not it is at the HI level), whether or not the button member 810 remains in the pressed state (maximum pressed) Whether or not it remains in position. In this embodiment, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1812, the operation continuation determination flag is stored in various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414, and the pressed state is maintained in step S1902. If it is determined that the operation has not been performed, the operation continuation determination flag is deleted.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the pressing operation is continued, the effect given to the message displayed on the display screen 94a blinks and the message color is changed from a light color to a dark color. The effect of changing, that is, the effect corresponding to the continuing pressing operation is executed. This effect is continued until at least the pressing operation by the player is released.

  After executing the process of step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined pressing period has passed while the pressing state is maintained. Specifically, the determination is performed based on the value of the timer counter and the presence / absence of the operation continuation determination flag.

  After executing the processing of step S1903, steps S1903, S1904, S1906 for determining whether or not the light emitting unit 850 is present at a position where the light emitting effect corresponding to the special operation (long press operation) is allowed. The process of S1907 is executed.

  Specifically, the process proceeds to step S1904, and it is determined whether or not the light emitting unit 850 is present at the maximum pressing position (operation reception position). Specifically, it is determined based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 895 whether or not it exists at the maximum displacement position (operation reception position).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1905. In step S1905, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 825, it is determined whether or not the button member 810 exists at the maximum pressed position (operation reception position). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1905, the process advances to step S1906 to determine whether the light emitting unit 850 is present at the initial position based on detection information from the position detection sensor 896.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1906 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1907, and a light emission effect flag is set in various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414. At the same time, the value of the timer counter for the pressing period described above is cleared to “0”. Thereby, in subsequent processes, negative determination is repeated in step S1901, and the process after step S1902 is canceled.

  After executing the process of step S1907, the setting process for the operation corresponding effect in steps S1908 to S1910 is executed, and the main light emission effect start process is ended. Specifically, first, in step S1908, it is determined whether or not this variable display time corresponds to the third display mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, a light emission control process corresponding to the third display mode is executed. As a result, a signal for light emission is output to the first light emitter 861a, and the above-mentioned characters appear on the operation surface portion 811, and a light emission effect that shifts to light emission display over the entire operation surface portion 811 after a certain period of time passes. Executed.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1908, the process proceeds to step S1910 to execute a second display mode-compatible light emission control process. Thereby, the light emission effect which shifts to the light emission display in the whole operation surface part 811 is performed.

  The details of each light emission effect will be described later.

  Returning to the description of step S1903 again, when a negative determination is made in step S1903, that is, when it is determined that a predetermined pressing period has not yet elapsed although it is maintained in the pressing state, or the timer counter for the pressing period described above If it is determined that the pressing state of the operation unit 601 is released at least once before the value becomes “0”, the process proceeds to step S1911. In step S1911, it is determined based on the presence or absence of the operation continuation determination flag whether or not the reason for the negative determination in step S1903 is due to the midway release of the pressed state. If a negative determination is made in step S 1911, the main light emission effect start process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1911, a negative determination is made in step S1905, or an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, it is considered that the start condition for the special operation corresponding effect has not been established, and the process proceeds to step S1912. move on. In step S1912, the light emission effect restriction flag is set in the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414, and the main light emission effect start process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 48 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1818, that is, if it is determined that the light emission effect is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1821. In step S1821, is the timing for returning the light emitting unit 850 to the initial position on the condition that the light emitting unit 850 is displaced from the initial position (that is, on the condition that the light emitting effect corresponds to the third display mode)? Determine whether or not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1821, the process proceeds to step S1822, and after performing the return process for returning the light emitting unit 850 to the initial position, the special operation corresponding effect process is terminated. Specifically, the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 880 is stopped. As a result, the light emitting unit 850 is displaced to the initial position by the urging force of the coil spring 849.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1812, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1819, it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display on the display screen 94a. When it is not the end timing of the variable display, the special operation corresponding effect production process is ended as it is. If it is the end timing of the variable display, a light emission effect end process is executed in step S1824. In this processing, the output of the light emission signal to the light emitter 861 is stopped, and various flags related to the special operation response effect are erased.

  After executing the process of step S1824, in step S1825, an end display image setting process is executed, and then the special operation corresponding effect process is ended.

  In the setting process of the end display image, when the change display time is a change display time in which the big hit state occurs, display setting is performed so that a moving image display indicating that the occurrence of the big win state is confirmed is performed. In this case, when the result display image setting process is executed and the moving image display is set to correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot state in the result display image setting process, The moving image display is set so as to have a series of contents with the moving image display. On the other hand, when the operation incomplete image setting process is executed, there is a moving image display that dramatically switches from the incomplete operation image to a moving image display indicating that the occurrence of the big hit state is confirmed. .

  Next, the special operation corresponding effect in the operation switch unit 800 will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 50 and 51, the time scale is partially changed for easy understanding.

(3rd display mode compatible effects)
First, the operation corresponding effect at the time of selecting the third display mode will be described based on FIG.

  When the variable display time (game time) starts and the variable display of the symbol is started on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, each light emitter 861 of the operation switch unit 800 remains in the off state. Yes.

  At the timing ta1 after the display content on the display screen 94a is switched from the normal variation display to the reach display described above, the display screen 94a is in a state in which the operation of the operation switch unit 800 (button member 810) is effectively accepted. An image for suggesting a special operation (long press operation) is displayed in order to notify the player of the fact. Further, at the timing of ta1, output of a light emission signal from the display control device 410 to the light emitter 861 is started, and both the first light emitter 861a and the second light emitter 861b are turned on. At such timing, the light emitting unit 850 is waiting at the initial position, and the light diffusion space described above is secured between the operation surface portion 811 and the light emitting unit 850 (specifically, the standing wall portion 873). For this reason, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the light from the individual light emitters 861, and the entire operation surface portion 811 is in a state of lightly emitted.

  After the above-described operation suggestion is performed, when the player presses the button member 810, the button member 810 is displaced from the initial position toward the maximum pressing position. In the process of this displacement, specifically, at the timing ta2 when the button member 810 reaches the specific position, a drive signal is output to the solenoid 880, and the solenoid 880 is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state. As a result, the light emitting unit 850 is displaced from the initial position toward the maximum displacement position. Further, at the timing of ta2, the output of the light emission signal to the light emitter 861 is stopped, and the operation surface portion 811 is turned off.

  When the button member 810 reaches the maximum pressing position at the timing ta3, the display screen 94a displays that the operation has been received effectively. Then, the effect given to the operation suggestion message on the display screen 94a is gradually changed by maintaining the button member 810 in the pressed state.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the light emitting unit 850 comes into contact with the button member 810 at the timing ta4 and a pressing operation is performed by the player, further displacement toward the operation surface portion 811 (upward) is restricted. Will be.

  At the timing after ta4 and at the timing of ta5 when a predetermined pressing operation maintaining period has elapsed from the timing of ta3, an image indicating that the special operation (long press operation) has been completed is displayed on the display screen 94a. At the same time, a light emission signal is output to the first light emitter 861a. Thereby, the special operation corresponding effect (light emission effect) is executed.

  At the timing of ta5, the standing wall portion 873 of the light emitting unit 850 remains in contact with the operation surface portion 811. For this reason, when the first light emitter 861 a emits light, the letter “V” appears on the operation surface portion 811.

  Here, when the operation surface portion 811 is pressed by the player's hand, the visual recognition of the special operation corresponding effect is hindered by the hand. Then, when the player releases his hand from the operation surface portion 811 at the timing of ta6 thereafter, the character “V” can be visually recognized. Thereby, it is suggested to the player that the change display time is a change display time corresponding to the jackpot.

  When the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface portion 811, the button member 810 starts to be displaced toward the initial position by the biasing force of the coil spring 848. At this time, the light emitting unit 850 is pushed up by the urging force of the solenoid 880, so that the light emitting unit 850 is displaced integrally with the button member 810 (while remaining in contact). That is, at least from the timing of ta6 to the timing of ta7 when the return of the button member 810 to the initial position is completed, the character “V” is kept displayed.

  The display of the character “V” is continued until the timing ta8 after a predetermined period from the timing ta3, which is the timing after the timing ta7. Then, after the timing ta8, the output target of the light emission signal is switched from the first light emitter 861a to both the first light emitter 861a and the second light emitter 861b. More specifically, each light emitter 861 repeats lighting / flashing in accordance with the display mode determined with reference to the display mode selection table described above. For example, the light emission control of the light emitter 861 is performed such that the stripe pattern extending in the front-rear direction is displaced to the left and right. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the character “V” described above.

  Thereafter, the reach effect executed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94 is terminated, and a specific symbol combination corresponding to the game result (big hit result) is displayed on the display screen 94a. At the same time, the output of the light emission signal to the light emitting unit 850 is stopped at the timing ta9 (that is, the end timing of this variation display time). As a result, the light emitting unit 850 is switched to the extinguished state.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the third display mode is set only when the jackpot result is obtained, that is, the character “V” is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the letter “V” is displayed both in the case of a loss result and in the case of a jackpot result. In this case, for example, a difference may be set in the expectation degree of jackpot depending on the emission color of the letter “V”. Specifically, white and red are set as the emission colors of the letter “V”, and if the letter emits red light, the jackpot is determined, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot as the combination of the above symbols If the same character is emitting white light, the probability of jackpot and the probability of losing will be halved, and the symbol combination corresponding to jackpot or the symbol combination corresponding to losing will be displayed as the above symbol combination. It is good to have a configuration.

(Second display mode compatible effects)
Next, an operation corresponding effect when the second display mode is selected will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the time when the game times this time have begun and the symbol variation display is started on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, the respective light emitters 861 of the operation switch unit 800 are kept off.

  At the timing tb1 after the display content on the display screen 94a is switched from the normal variation display to the reach display described above, the display screen 94a is in a state in which the operation of the operation switch unit 800 (button member 810) is effectively accepted. An image for suggesting a special operation (long press operation) is displayed in order to notify the player of the fact. Further, at the timing of tb1, output of a light emission signal from the display control device 410 to the light emitter 861 is started, and both the first light emitter 861a and the second light emitter 861b are turned on. At such timing, the light emitting unit 850 is waiting at the initial position, and the light diffusion space described above is secured between the operation surface portion 811 and the light emitting unit 850 (specifically, the standing wall portion 873). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish the light from the individual light emitters 861, and the entire operation surface portion 811 is in a state of lightly emitted.

  When the operation suggestion described above is executed and the button member 810 is pressed by the player, the button member 810 is displaced from the initial position toward the maximum pressed position. In the process of this displacement, at the timing tb2 when the button member 810 reaches the specific position, the output of the light emission signal to the light emitter 861 is stopped and the operation surface portion 811 is turned off.

  When the button member 810 reaches the maximum pressing position at the timing tb3, the display screen 94a displays that the operation has been received effectively. Then, the effect given to the operation suggestion message on the display screen 94a is gradually changed by maintaining the button member 810 in the pressed state.

  At the timing of tb4 when a predetermined pressing operation maintaining period has elapsed from the timing of tb3, an image indicating that the special operation (long press operation) is completed is displayed on the display screen 94a. A light emission signal is output to both 861a and the second light emitter 861b. Thereby, the special operation corresponding effect (light emission effect) is executed. At the timing of tb4, the standing wall portion 873 of the light emitting unit 850 is kept away from the operation surface portion 811. That is, the above-described light diffusion space is maintained. Light emission control is performed so that each light emitter 861 repeats lighting and blinking according to the display mode determined with reference to the display mode selection table described above. Thereby, for example, the light emission control of the light emitter 861 is performed such that the stripe pattern extending in the front-rear direction is displaced to the left and right. In this display mode, since the light diffusing space is secured as described above, it is difficult to identify only the light from the first light emitter 861a, and the above-mentioned character “V” can be distinguished. It becomes impossible. In the third display mode-compatible effect and the second display mode-compatible effect, a difference is set in the expectation level that is a jackpot result, and the player expects the letter “V” to be displayed after the pressing operation is completed. However, the hand is released from the button member 810.

  Here, when the operation surface portion 811 is pressed by the player's hand, the visual recognition of the special operation corresponding effect is hindered by the hand. Then, when the player releases his / her hand from the operation surface portion 811 at the timing of tb5 thereafter, the light emission pattern becomes visible. Thereby, it is suggested to the player that the variation display time is a variation display time corresponding to the jackpot result or the loss result. This light-emitting effect does not end at the timing tb6 when the player releases the operation surface portion 811 and the button member 810 returns to the initial position, and is thereafter executed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. The reach effect that has been performed ends, and the display screen 94a continues until a specific symbol combination corresponding to a game result (a jackpot result) is displayed. Then, at the timing of tb7 (that is, the end timing of this variation display time), the output of the light emission signal to the light emitting unit 850 is stopped. As a result, the light emitting unit 850 is switched to the extinguished state.

  According to the ninth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the operation switch unit 800, a mirror forming layer 815 and a light diffusion portion 816 are provided on the operation surface portion 811 of the button member 810, and light from the light emitting unit 850 provided behind the operation layer portion 815 is passed through the operation surface portion 811. It is configured to be injected to the side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the operation surface portion 811 is emitting light by the light from the light emitting unit 850.

  The light emitting unit 850 can be displaced toward and away from the operation surface portion 811, and the light from the light emitting unit 850 spreads to reach the operation surface portion 811, so the distance between the light emitting unit 850 and the operation surface portion 811 is increased. By changing it, the diffusion degree of the light from the light emitting unit 850 can be changed.

  Specifically, the diffusion of light from the light emitting unit 850 can be suppressed by bringing the light emitting unit 850 and the operation surface portion 811 closer to each other, and the light from the light emitting unit 850 is diffused by moving the light emitting unit 850 and the operation surface portion 811 away from each other. Can be promoted. Thereby, it can contribute to diversification of the light emission effect, etc., and the degree of attention to the light emission effect can be suitably increased.

  Further, if a configuration is adopted in which light emitters are arranged at positions close to the operation surface portion 811 and positions far from the operation surface portion 811 and the light emitters near and far away are used depending on the situation, it is far away. When the light emitter on the side is caused to emit light, it is assumed that the light emitter on the near side shields the light. This can be a factor of reducing the effect of irradiating light over a wide range with the light emitter on the far side. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience and favorably contribute to widening the light emission range.

  In realizing a configuration in which the distance between the operation surface portion 811 of the button member 810 and the light emitting unit 850 is changed, the following effects can be expected by using the light emitting unit 850 as a driving target. For example, assuming that the button member 810 (operation surface portion 811) is a driving target, the movement of the button member 810 can be visually confirmed because the button member 810 is exposed to the player side. For this reason, when changing the light emission mode of the operation surface portion 811, it becomes possible to detect the change in advance from the movement of the button member 810, and to the operation of the button member 810 rather than the change of the light emission mode itself. It is assumed that attention will be easier. This can be an obstacle to exhibiting the effect function in the operation switch unit 800. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the light emitting unit 850 is a driving target. For this reason, compared with the structure which makes the button member 810 a drive object as mentioned above, generation | occurrence | production of the said disadvantage can be suppressed suitably and the attention degree improvement effect by a light emission effect can be exhibited suitably.

  In particular, the operation surface portion 811 is provided with a mirror forming layer 815, and the light emitting unit 850 itself disposed behind is not visible. Therefore, the movement of the light emitting unit 850 is substantially invisible, and it is possible to suppress the player's attention from being directed to the light emitting unit 850 instead of the light emitting mode.

  The light emitting unit 850 is provided with a standing wall portion 873 as a light restricting portion that restricts light, and the distance between the standing wall portion 873 and the operation surface portion 811 is changed by the displacement of the light emitting unit 850. ing. According to such a configuration, the outer edge of the light emission range in the operation surface portion 811 is clarified by bringing the standing wall portion 873 closer to the operation surface portion 811, while the outer edge of the light emission range is unclear by moving the standing wall portion 873 away from the operation surface portion 811. It can be clarified. In this way, by providing a clear difference in the light emission mode in each state, the impact when the display contents change can be strengthened, and the degree of attention to the light emission effect using the operating means etc. is preferably improved. can do.

  Further, if a configuration corresponding to the standing wall portion 873 (light regulating portion) is arranged on the operation surface portion 811 side, the light emission range can be changed by changing the distance between the light emitting unit and the operation surface portion 811. When the light from the light emitting unit finally reaches the operation surface portion 811 through the light restriction portion, the light emission range of the operation surface portion 811 is restricted. That is, the light emission range is always regulated by the light regulating unit. This is not preferable because functions such as a light emission effect may be limited. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the light restricting portion is provided on the light emitting unit side, such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. That is, when the light restricting portion is separated from the operation surface portion 811, the light that has passed through the light restricting portion is allowed to spread beyond the light restricting portion. Thereby, the widening function of a light emission range can be exhibited suitably.

  In the present embodiment, as the light emission mode of operation switch unit 800, a second display mode in which the entire operation surface portion 811 emits light and a third display mode in which predetermined characters are displayed are set. By pressing the button member 810, one of the two light emission patterns described above is displayed, so that the player can easily focus on the light emission effect.

  Here, when the button member 810 is pressed by hand, the visual recognition of the operation surface portion 811 is blocked by the player's own hand. Then, at the timing when the player releases his hand from the operation surface portion 811, the light emission mode changes from the state before the operation. This makes it easier to impress the player on the change in the light emission mode.

  In the configuration in which the light emission mode of the operation surface portion 811 is changed by displacing the light emission unit 850, the period required for switching the light emission mode is longer than the configuration in which the light emission pattern of the light emitter is switched, for example. There is a concern that the responsiveness of will decrease. In this regard, in this embodiment, the display mode is changed by starting the displacement of the light emitting unit 850 while the player's hand is touching (for example, the visual recognition is hindered by the hand). Therefore, during the operation period necessary for the operation, the player can block the operation so as to be difficult to see. With such a configuration, it is possible to compensate for a decrease in responsiveness due to the configuration in which the light emitting unit 850 is displaced.

  In particular, by prompting the player to perform a long press operation and operating the light emitting unit 850 in a situation where the long press operation is being performed, it is possible to suitably eliminate the disadvantages associated with the decrease in responsiveness. It has become.

  When the long press operation is completed and the player releases his / her hand from the button member 810, the operation surface portion 811 and the light emitting unit 850 are displaced together to keep the distance relationship between the two constant. it can. Accordingly, the standing wall portion 873 of the light emitting unit 850 and the operation surface portion 811 are kept in contact with each other, and it is possible to avoid blurring of the letter “V” displayed on the operation surface portion 811. Yes. By adopting such a configuration, the character “V” can be displayed from the start of return, and the character can be visually recognized when the player releases his / her hand from the button member 810. Thereby, the relevance of the timing which makes a character visible and the timing which releases a hand can be strengthened.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for operating the operation switch unit and the operation mode thereof are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the operation switch unit 900 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the operation switch unit 900.

  First, the basic configuration of the operation switch unit 900 will be described. The operation switch unit 900 in this embodiment is disposed on the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14 as in the first embodiment. A housing portion 28c for housing the operation switch unit 900 is formed in the central portion of the upper bulging portion 28. The operation switch unit 900 housed in the housing portion 28c has a part of the operation portion 901 in the upper bulge. It is in a state of being exposed upward through a substantially circular opening 28e formed in the upper surface portion 28d of the protruding portion 28.

  The operation switch unit 900 includes an operation unit 901 and a holder unit 902 that holds the operation unit 901 in a movable manner. The operation switch unit 900 is fixed to the upper bulging unit 28 so that the operation switch unit 900 is operated. 900 and the upper bulging portion 28 are integrated.

  The operation unit 901 includes a button member 920 that protrudes from a central opening 911 formed in the holder unit 902. The button member 920 has a hollow shape opened to the back side of the holder portion 902, and the open portion is closed by a lid 930 (specifically, a base plate portion 931) fixed to the button member 920. Yes.

  The base plate portion 931 of the lid 930 is provided with a plurality of cylindrical portions 932 standing on the side opposite to the button member 920 side, and formed on the bottom portion 912 of the holder portion 902 with respect to each of the cylindrical portions 932. The protruding portion 913 is inserted. The protrusion 913 is formed so that the outer peripheral surface thereof is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 932, and the protruding portion 913 and the cylindrical portion 932 define the movement direction of the operation unit 901 to be the vertical direction. Has been.

  A spring member 941 is disposed in a space surrounded by the cylindrical portion 932. The operating portion 901 is biased in a direction (upward) protruding from the central opening 911 by the biasing force of the spring member 941.

  The holder portion 902 is provided with a protrusion-side stopper mechanism 950 that is provided with a function of restricting displacement of the operation portion 901 in the protrusion direction and defining the maximum protrusion position of the operation portion 901. Here, the protrusion side stopper mechanism 950 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a schematic view showing the protruding side stopper mechanism 950.

  The protrusion-side stopper mechanism 950 abuts the flange portion 921 formed on the button member 920 from the front side (above) in the protrusion direction, thereby releasing the restriction position for restricting the protrusion of the button member 920 and the restriction. A stopper piece 951 that can be displaced to both of the release position (retracted position), a spring member 952 as an urging means that urges the stopper piece 951 toward the restriction position, and the stopper piece 951 at the restriction position and the release position. And a drive unit (in detail, a solenoid) 953 that moves the motor to the position.

  The drive unit 953 is electrically connected to the display control device 410 and is configured to switch from a non-excitation state to an excitation state when a drive signal is input from the display control device 410. Then, when the drive unit 953 is in an excited state, the stopper piece 951 moves from the restriction position to the release position against the urging force of the spring member 952 (see FIG. 53 (a1) → FIG. 53 (a2)). .

  The holder portion 902 is formed with a first receiving portion 914 that comes into contact with the stopper piece 951 from the side opposite to the flange portion 921. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (a1), when the flange portion 921 is pressed against the stopper piece 951, the load is distributed to the first receiving portion 914, and the stopper piece 951 and the stopper piece 951 are held. The load applied to the drive unit 953 is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a2), when the stopper piece 951 is displaced to the release position (retracted position), the flange portion 921 comes into direct contact with the first receiving portion 914. Thereby, the protrusion amount of the operation part 901 from the center opening 911 will increase compared with the case where it is contact | abutting to the stopper piece 951. FIG. Thus, if attention is paid to the fact that the operation stroke of the operation unit 901 increases as the protrusion amount increases, the protrusion-side stopper mechanism 950 is provided with a function as a stroke changing means or a function as a stroke limiting means. It can be said that it is done.

  Referring to FIG. 52 again, the holder unit 902 is provided with a function of restricting displacement of the operation unit 901 in the pressing direction and defining a maximum pressing position of the operation unit 901. A mechanism 960 is provided. Here, the pressing side stopper mechanism 960 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53B is a schematic view showing the pressing side stopper mechanism 960.

  The pressing-side stopper mechanism 960 abuts the distal end portion of the cylindrical portion 932 from the front side (downward) in the pressing direction, thereby releasing the restriction position that restricts the displacement of the button member 920 in the pressing direction, and the restriction. A stopper piece 961 that can be displaced to both positions of the release position, a spring member 962 as an urging means that urges the stopper piece 961 toward the restriction position, and a drive that moves the stopper piece 961 to the restriction position and the release position. Part (specifically, a solenoid) 963.

  The drive unit 963 is electrically connected to the display control device 410 and is configured to switch from a non-excitation state to an excitation state when a drive signal is input from the display control device 410. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (b1) → FIG. 53 (b2), when the drive unit 963 is in an excited state, the stopper piece 961 moves from the restricted position to the released position against the urging force of the spring member 962. Moving.

  The holder portion 902 is formed with a second receiving portion 915 that comes into contact with the stopper piece 961 from the side opposite to the cylindrical portion 932. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (a1), in a state where the cylindrical portion 932 is pressed against the stopper piece 961, the load is distributed to the second receiving portion 915, and the stopper piece 961 and the stopper piece 961 are held. The load applied to the driving unit 963 is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a2), when the stopper piece 961 is displaced to the release position (retracted position), the cylindrical portion 932 can directly contact the second receiving portion 915. Then, when the cylindrical portion 932 reaches a position where it comes into contact with the second receiving portion 915, the amount of displacement of the operation portion 901 increases as compared with the case where the cylindrical portion 932 comes into contact with the stopper piece 961. Thus, if attention is paid to the fact that the operation stroke of the operation unit 901 increases due to the increase in the displacement amount, the pressing side stopper mechanism 960 is provided with a function as a stroke changing means or a function as a stroke limiting means. It can be said that it is done.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the operation switch unit 900 according to the present embodiment is located at a position where the operation portion 901 contacts the stopper piece 951 of the protrusion-side stopper mechanism 950 (hereinafter referred to as an initial position). A position detection sensor 971 for detecting this, and a position detection sensor 972 for detecting that the position is in a position that contacts the stopper piece 961 of the pressing-side stopper mechanism 960 (hereinafter referred to as a reception position). . Each of these position detection sensors 971 and 972 is electrically connected to the display control device 410, and the display control device 410 has an operation unit based on detection information (detection signal) from the position detection sensor 971. Based on the detection information (detection signal) from the position detection sensor 972, it is possible to grasp that the operation unit 901 has been operated based on the fact that 901 has been displaced from the initial position.

  Each position detection sensor 971, 972 outputs a HI / LOW binary signal. The position detection sensor 971 outputs a HI level signal when the operation unit 901 is in the initial position, and the operation unit 901 outputs the initial position. The position detection sensor 972 outputs a HI level signal when the operation unit 901 is at the reception position, and LOW when the operation unit 901 is at a position away from the reception position. Output level signal.

  In this embodiment, when the operation unit 901 is operated by a player, the solenoid 980 is provided as a forced displacement means for forcibly displacing the operation unit 901 in the pressing direction. Yes.

  The solenoid 880 is attached to the bottom portion 912 of the holder portion 902. The solenoid 980 is electrically connected to the display control device 410 and is configured to switch from a non-excitation state to an excitation state when a drive signal is input from the display control device 410.

  The main body 881 of the solenoid 880 is disposed on the side opposite to the operation unit 901 with the bottom 912 interposed therebetween. A through hole 916 that penetrates in the thickness direction of the bottom portion 912 is formed in the holder portion 902, and a plunger 982 of a solenoid 980 is inserted into the through hole 916.

  An insertion portion 933 through which the plunger 982 is inserted is formed in the lid 930 so as to communicate with the through hole 916, and the distal end portion of the plunger 982 is formed by the button member 920 and the lid 930 through the insertion portion 933. It protrudes into the enclosed space. A head portion 983 is formed at the distal end portion of the plunger 982 so as to come into contact with the base plate portion 931 of the lid 930 from the front side (upper side) in the pressing direction.

  When the solenoid 980 is excited, the plunger 982 is displaced downward. Accordingly, the head portion 983 presses the base plate portion 931 in the same direction (downward) as the pressing operation direction, and the operation portion 901 is pressed in the same direction as the pressing operation direction against the urging force of the spring member 941. It will be. That is, the holder portion 902 is attracted to the bottom portion 912. When the solenoid 980 is in a non-excited state, the pressing by the plunger 882 is released. As a result, the operating portion 901 is returned to the initial position by the biasing force of the spring member 941.

  Next, the relationship between the pressing operation and the operation of the operation switch unit 900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the operation switch unit 900.

  As shown in FIG. 54A, in a state where the operation unit 901 is in the initial position, the flange portion 921 of the operation unit 901 is opposite to the pressing operation direction with respect to the stopper piece 951 of the protrusion-side stopper mechanism 950. It abuts from the side (downward). In this state, the entire operation surface portion of the button member 920 protrudes upward from the central opening 911.

  When the operation unit 901 is pressed from the state shown in FIG. 54A, the operation unit 901 is displaced in the pressing operation direction against the urging force of the spring member 941. The cylindrical portion 932 of the operation portion 901 comes into contact with the stopper piece 961 of the pressing-side stopper mechanism 960 from the front side (upper side) in the pressing operation direction, so that the further pressing operation is restricted (FIG. 54). (See (b)). When the operation unit 901 reaches the position where it comes into contact with the stopper piece 961, a signal indicating that the operation unit 901 has reached the reception position is output from the position detection sensor 972 to the display control device 410. In the state shown in FIG. 54 (b), a part of the operation portion 901 (specifically, the operation surface portion) remains protruding from the central opening 911.

  Thereafter, when the player releases his / her hand from the operation unit 901, the operation unit 901 returns to the initial position by the biasing force of the spring member 941, as shown in FIG. 54 (b) → FIG. 54 (a). It will be.

  In the present embodiment, the operation unit 901 can be forcibly displaced in the pressing direction when an operation by the player is performed. Specifically, when the operation unit 901 reaches a specific position (a position away from the initial position) from the state shown in FIG. 54A, the displacement is detected by the position detection sensor 971. When the display control device 410 grasps the displacement, a drive signal is output to the solenoid 980. As a result, the solenoid 980 switches from the non-excited state to the excited state.

  Thus, when the solenoid 980 is switched to the excited state, the plunger 982 is drawn in the pressing operation direction, and the operation portion 901 (specifically, the base plate portion 931) is pushed in the pressing operation direction by the head 983 of the plunger 982. It will be. At this time, if the displacement speed of the plunger 982 is set sufficiently high, the operation unit 901 is forcibly displaced in the pressing operation direction away from the player's hand.

  At this time, the stopper piece 961 is displaced to the release position before the operation unit 901 reaches the reception position. Thereby, the contact target of the cylindrical portion 932 is changed to the second receiving portion 915 instead of the stopper piece 961, and the operation stroke during the pressing operation is temporarily increased. This is a device for making it easy to convey the forced displacement of the operation unit 901 as a tactile change to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (c), when the cylindrical portion 932 reaches the position where it contacts the second receiving portion 915 (maximum pressing position), the entire operation portion 901 (specifically, the operation surface portion) is centered. It will be buried in the opening 911. For this reason, for example, when the operation portion 901 is pressed with the entire palm, a part of the palm is likely to hit the upper surface portion 28d of the upper bulging portion 28 and the like as compared with the state shown in FIG. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which a hand can touch a plurality of configurations whose relative positions change, it is easy to convey to the player that the operation stroke has changed.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a) → FIG. 54 (c), when the operation unit 901 is forcibly displaced, the operation unit 901 is held for a predetermined period while reaching the maximum pressing position. Will be. Therefore, even if the player releases his hand from the operation unit 901 during such a period, the operation unit 901 does not return to the initial position shown in FIG.

  After the forced displacement described above is executed, the output of the drive signal from the display control device 410 to the solenoid 980 is stopped, and the operation portion 901 is displaced in the protruding direction by the urging force of the spring member 941. . At this time, the plunger 982 of the solenoid 980 is displaced upward following the operation portion 901 when the head portion 983 is pushed upward by the base plate portion 931 of the lid 930.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the operation unit 901 does not necessarily return to the initial position, and may be displaced beyond the initial position to the maximum protruding position. Specifically, when a drive signal is output to the drive unit 953 of the protrusion-side stopper mechanism 950, as shown in FIG. 54 (c) → FIG. 54 (d), the stopper piece 951 is moved from the restriction position to the release position. Displace. As a result, the contact target of the operation portion 901 (specifically, the flange portion 921) is switched from the stopper piece 951 to the second receiving portion 915 of the holder portion 902. When the operation portion 901 is displaced to a position where the flange portion 921 contacts the first receiving portion 914, the amount of protrusion of the operation portion 901 (specifically, the operation surface portion) from the central opening 911 is reduced. It will increase compared with the case where it is waiting for. Thereby, it is suppressed that the return of the operation part 901 after forced displacement is overlooked by the player.

  As for the operation switch unit 900 in this embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, the content of the display effect executed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94 is changed to the one corresponding to the operation. The function is given. That is, for example, when an operation is suggested on the display screen 94a, by operating the operation unit 901, the effect executed on the display screen 94a is changed to one corresponding to the operation. Then, the winning expectation such as a big hit is suggested by the display effect.

  Here, the operation switch unit 900 according to the present embodiment is provided with a function that suggests a winning expectation such as a jackpot by the movement of the operation unit 901, and the player's attention to the operation switch unit 900 is improved. It is illustrated.

  Hereinafter, the effect process relating to the operation switch unit 900 executed by the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 will be described. The effects processing is roughly classified into those incorporating the operation of the operation switch unit 900 as part of the effects and those not incorporating the operation switch unit 900. Of these, the latter is a well-known configuration, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The operation switch unit drive effect processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The operation switch unit drive effect in the present embodiment is a repetitive operation-compatible effect in which a plurality of single-shot operations are allowed during one game cycle, as in the second embodiment and the like. .

(Operation switch unit drive effect processing)
In the operation switch unit drive effect process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not a variable display is being generated in which the operation switch unit drive effect is generated. If the change display is not in progress, the operation switch unit drive effect process is terminated as it is. If the change display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2002.

  In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the first single operation is suggested. If a negative determination is made in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, a first single operation suggestion image setting process is performed. Thus, a first single operation suggestion image (first single operation prompt image) that prompts the player to press the operation unit 901 is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94. For example, the first single operation suggestion image is displayed as a moving image so that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and characters such as “Press the button!” Are displayed on the display screen 94a. .

  After executing the process of step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2004, and the first single operation waiting state setting process is performed. In the first single operation waiting state setting process, the first single operation waiting flag is stored in the first single operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414.

  Then, in the subsequent step S2005, the pressing operation stroke changing process is executed, and the operation switch unit driving effect process is ended as it is. In the pressing operation stroke changing process, output of a driving signal to the driving unit 953 of the pressing side stopper mechanism 960 is started. Thereby, the drive part 963 will be in an excitation state, and the stopper piece 961 of the press side stopper mechanism 960 will displace from a control position to a cancellation | release position. As a result, the operation stroke of the operation unit 901 temporarily increases, and the displacement of the operation unit 901 beyond the reception position is allowed.

  Returning to the description of step S2002 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, it is determined whether or not the first single operation waiting state is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first single operation waiting flag is stored in various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, it is determined whether or not the operation unit 901 has reached the specific position. Specifically, based on a detection signal (detection information) from the position detection sensor 971, it is determined whether or not it is the timing immediately after the operation unit 901 has moved from the initial position.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2007, the process proceeds to step S2008, and the forced displacement processing of the operation unit 901 is executed. In the forced displacement process, output of a drive signal to the solenoid 980 is started. As a result, the solenoid 980 is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state, and the operation unit 901 is displaced in the same direction as the pressing operation direction so as to follow the movement of the plunger 982. At this time, since the displacement speed of the operation unit 901 is set to be sufficiently high, the operation unit 901 is normally buried away from the player's hand.

  After executing the process of step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2009, and a return timing setting process is executed. In the return timing setting process, the return timing is specified by comparing information relating to the change display included in the change start command with a return timing setting table stored in various table storage areas of the ROM 413. The other various counter areas 428 of the RAM 414 are provided with a return timing counter, and a value corresponding to the specified return timing is set in the return timing counter. Note that the return timing is more likely to be delayed in the case of the jackpot result than in the case of the loss result.

  In step S2010, the standby position setting process is executed, and the operation switch unit drive effect process is terminated. In the standby position setting process, the standby position is specified by comparing the information related to the variation display included in the variation start command with the standby position setting tables stored in the various table storage areas of the ROM 413. Specifically, it is specified whether the operation unit 901 can wait in the initial position or the maximum protruding position after the forced displacement is released. When the operation unit 901 is allowed to stand by at the maximum projecting position, a drive signal is output to the drive unit 953 of the projection-side stopper mechanism 950, and the drive unit 953 is switched from the non-excitation state to the excitation state. Thereby, the stopper piece 951 is displaced from the restriction position to the release position, and the contact object of the operation portion 901 (specifically, the flange portion 921) is changed from the stopper piece 951 to the first receiving portion 914. Note that the drive signal is not output when it is possible to wait at the initial position.

  Incidentally, when making such a change, the operation unit 901 is located at a specific position, that is, a position deviated from the initial position, and therefore the displacement of the stopper piece 951 is not hindered by the operation unit 901.

  Returning to step S2007 again, if a negative determination is made in step S2007, that is, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the operation unit 901 has arrived, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, based on detection information (detection signal) from the position detection sensor 972, it is determined whether or not the operation unit 901 has reached an operation reception position (that is, a position where the operation unit 901 can come into contact with the stopper piece 961).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, a first single operation completion image setting process is performed in step S2012. Thereby, on the display screen 94a, a first single operation completion image (for example, a message such as “OK!”) Is displayed instead of the first single operation suggestion image.

  After executing the process of step S2012, the release process of the first single operation waiting state is executed in step S2013, and the process for the operation switch unit drive effect is ended. In the release processing of the first single operation waiting state, the first single operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage areas 425 in the RAM 414 is erased. Thereby, subsequent operations are invalidated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2011, that is, if it is determined that the first single operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S2014. In step S2014, it is determined whether it is the reception end timing of the first single operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined acceptance valid period has elapsed after executing the process of step S2004. If a negative determination is made in step S2014, the operation switch unit drive effect process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2014, a display end process for the first single operation suggestion image is executed in step S2015, and a setting process for the first single operation reception end image is executed in step S2016. . As a result, the suggestion image ("Press and hold the button!") Is not displayed on the display screen 94a, and a reception end image (for example, a message such as "INCOMPLETE!") Is displayed instead of the suggestion image. The Rukoto. After executing the process of step S2016, the process proceeds to step S2013, and after the release process of the first single operation waiting state is executed, the operation switch unit drive effect process is ended.

  Returning to the description of step S2006 again, if a negative determination is made in step S2006, that is, if it is determined that the state is not waiting for the first single operation, the process proceeds to step S2017. In step S2017, it is determined whether it is time to return the operation unit 901 or not. Specifically, referring to the value of the return timing counter set in step S2009, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter is a predetermined value (“0” in the present embodiment). The value of the return timing counter is updated (subtracted by “1”) every time the operation switch drive effect process is executed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2017, a return process is executed in step S2018. In the return process, the output of the drive signal started in step S2008 is stopped, and the solenoid 980 is switched from the excited state to the non-excited state. As a result, the operation unit 901 that has been constrained at the maximum pressing position is released from being constrained by the solenoid 980, and is displaced in a direction opposite to the pressing operation direction (protruding direction) by the biasing force of the spring member 941. .

  After performing the process of step S2018 or when a negative determination is made in step S2017, the process proceeds to step S2019. In step S2019, it is determined whether it is the timing for suggesting the second single operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a preset period has elapsed since the execution of step S2018. The timing of the second single operation suggestion is such that after a sufficient period of time has passed for the operation unit 901 to reach the initial position or the maximum protruding position after the restriction of the operation unit 901 is released. Is set.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2019, the process proceeds to step S2020, and a second single operation suggestion image setting process is performed. As a result, the second single operation suggestion image (second single operation prompt image) that prompts the player to press the operation unit 901 is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94. For example, as the second single operation suggestion image, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and characters such as “Press the button!” Are displayed on the display screen 94a. .

  After executing the process of step S2020, the process proceeds to step S2021, and the second single operation waiting state setting process is performed. In the setting process of the second single operation waiting state, the second single operation waiting flag is stored in the second single operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414.

  After executing the process of step S2021, the process proceeds to step S2022, where an initial position stopper return process is executed, and this operation switch unit drive effect process is terminated. In the initial position stopper return processing, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 953 of the protrusion-side stopper mechanism 950 is stopped. As a result, the drive unit 953 switches from the excited state to the non-excited state, and the stopper piece 951 tends to be displaced to the restricted position by the biasing force of the spring member 952. However, in a state where the operation portion 901 is waiting at the maximum projecting position, such as immediately after performing this processing, the return of the stopper piece 951 to the restricting position is hindered by the operation portion 901, and the stopper piece 951 is a spring. The state is pressed against the operation unit 901 by the biasing force of the member 952.

  Thereafter, when the second single operation is performed and the operation unit 901 is displaced from the maximum pressing position, the displacement restriction of the stopper piece 951 by the operation part 901 is released, and the stopper piece 951 returns to the restriction position. Thereby, the displacement to the maximum protrusion position of the operation part 901 will be controlled.

  Returning to the description of step S2019, if a negative determination is made in step S2019, the process proceeds to step S2023. In step S2023, a second single operation process is executed. In the second single operation process, various processes corresponding to the second single operation are executed on condition that the second single operation waiting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414. About the process concerning 2nd single operation, it is the same as that of step S2011-step S2016, and a specific production | presentation is performed according to operation, However, about description of the process in those each step, description of step S2011-step S2017 mentioned above is carried out. Incorporate.

  After executing the process of step S2023, it is determined in step S2024 whether it is the end timing of the variable display. If a negative determination is made in step S2024, the operation switch drive effect processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2024, an end image setting process is executed in step S2025. The process in step S2025 is the same as the end image setting process in each of the above-described embodiments, and thus description thereof is incorporated.

  Then, after executing the pressing position stopper return processing in step S2026, the operation switch drive effect processing is terminated. In the process of step S2026, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 963 of the pressing side stopper mechanism 960 is stopped. As a result, the drive unit 963 switches from the excited state to the non-excited state, and the stopper piece 961 is biased from the release position to the restricting position by the biasing force of the spring member 962. Here, on the condition that the operation unit 901 is not waiting at the maximum pressing position, the stopper piece 961 returns to the regulation position, and the displacement of the operation unit 901 to the maximum pressing position is regulated by the stopper piece 961. It becomes.

  Next, an operation corresponding effect using the operation switch unit 900 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. As the operation-corresponding effects, a normal operation-corresponding effect where the forced displacement and operation stroke change of the operation switch unit 900 does not occur, and a continuous operation-corresponding effect as the operation switch drive effect where the forced displacement and operation stroke changes occur Is set, and the operation corresponding to the first continuous operation in which the operation unit 901 is restricted from reaching the maximum protruding position, and the second continuous operation corresponding to the maximum protruding position is allowed. It is roughly divided into production. In the following description, a normal operation response effect, a second continuous operation response effect, and a first continuous operation response effect will be described in this order. In FIG. 56, the time scale is partially changed for easy understanding.

(Normal operation compatible production)
When a normal operation-corresponding effect is executed, as shown in the left part of FIG. 56, symbol variation display on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94 is started at the timing ta1. At the timing of ta2 when a preset period has elapsed from the timing of ta1, for example, the timing after the symbol variation display is switched from the normal variation display to the reach display, the suggestion image that prompts the operation of the operation unit 901 on the display screen 94a (For example, “Press the button!”) Is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the operation unit 901 is operated at the timing of ta3, a message indicating that the operation is effectively received on the display screen 94a (for example, “ OK! ") Is displayed, and then the content of the display effect on the display screen 94a is switched to that corresponding to the operation.

  Here, in the normal operation corresponding effect, the stopper mechanisms 950 and 960 are maintained in the restricted state, and the stopper pieces 951 and 961 remain in the restricted position. That is, the operation unit 901 is allowed to be displaced between the initial position and the operation reception position, but the displacement to the maximum projecting position or the maximum pressing position remains restricted.

  After that, at the timing of ta4, the reach effect that has been executed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94 ends, and a specific symbol combination corresponding to the game result (big hit result) is displayed on the display screen 94a. .

(2nd continuous operation compatible production)
When the second continuous operation-corresponding effect is executed, as shown in the center portion of FIG. 56, the symbol variation display on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94 is started at the timing tb1. At the same time, output of a drive signal to the drive unit 963 of the pressing-side stopper mechanism 960 is started, and the stopper piece 961 is displaced from the restriction position to the release position. Thereby, the operation stroke when the operation unit 901 is pressed increases as compared with the case where the above-described normal operation-related effect is executed.

  At the timing of tb2 when a preset period has elapsed from the timing of ta1, for example, the timing after the symbol variation display is switched from the normal variation display to the reach display, the display screen 94a is prompted to perform the first single operation of the operation unit 901. A first single operation suggestion image (for example, “Press the button!”) Is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a pressing operation at the timing tb3, the operation unit 901 is displaced in the pressing operation direction against the urging force of the spring member 941. At the timing of tb4 immediately after the timing of tb3, specifically, the timing when the operation unit 901 reaches the specific position (timing when the operation unit 901 leaves the initial position), the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 980 is started, and the solenoid 980 switches from the non-excited state to the excited state. That is, the forced displacement of the operation unit 901 is validated.

  Thereby, the operation part 901 is suddenly drawn to the back side (downward) in the pressing operation direction. Thereby, the reaction force transmitted to the player's hand pressing the operation unit 901 (specifically, the operation surface unit) is reduced, or the operation unit 901 is separated from the player's hand. In the normal operation corresponding effect described above, the operation unit 901 is passively displaced by the stress caused by the pressing operation, whereas in the second continuous operation corresponding effect, the operation unit 901 is actively displaced. For this reason, a tactile difference during operation occurs between the two effects.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot result is obtained, the continuous operation-compatible effect is more easily selected than the normal operation-compatible effect. For this reason, it is assumed that the player performs a pressing operation while expecting the forced displacement of the operation unit 901 described above, and an improvement in the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 900 and the pressing operation can be expected.

  When the forced displacement of the operation unit 901 is executed at the timing tb4, the operation unit 901 is pulled to the maximum displacement position. Then, after reaching the maximum pressing position, it is not immediately folded back in the protruding direction, but is constrained (held) at the maximum pressing position for a predetermined period.

  At the timing of tb5 when the predetermined period has elapsed from the timing of tb4, the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 980 stops, and the operation portion 901 moves in the direction opposite to the pressing operation direction (protruding direction) by the biasing force of the spring member 941. Start the displacement.

  Here, at the timing tb4, output of a drive signal is started to the drive unit 953 of the protrusion-side stopper mechanism 950, and the stopper piece 951 is moved by switching the drive unit 953 from the non-excitation state to the excitation state. It is displaced from the restriction position to the release position. For this reason, when the operating portion 901 is displaced by the biasing force of the spring member 941, it does not return to the initial position but goes to the maximum projecting position beyond the initial position.

  As described above, the operation unit 901 that has been constrained at the maximum pressing position suddenly starts moving, so that attention to the operation unit 901 is improved. In particular, the timing for releasing the forced displacement is set such that the later the later, the higher the expectation that is a jackpot result, the higher the expectation level. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the operation unit 901 after performing the pressing operation. It is assumed that it will be easier.

  After the operation unit 901 reaches the maximum pressing position at the timing tb6, a second single operation suggestion image (for example, “push a button”) that prompts the second single operation of the operation unit 901 on the display screen 94a at the timing tb7. ! ”) Is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the operation unit 901 is pressed again at the timing tb8, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 953 of the protrusion-side stopper mechanism 950 is output at the timing tb9 when the operation unit 901 reaches the specific position. Stop. As a result, the drive unit 953 switches from the excited state to the non-excited state body, and the stopper piece 951 returns from the release position to the restricted position. As a result, the operation stroke is reduced.

  By urging the second pressing operation (second single operation) and returning the protruding-side stopper mechanism 950 to the restricted state during the pressing operation, the operation unit 901 can prevent the return from being hindered. Yes. Even if the second single-shot operation is not performed, the stopper piece 951 remains biased to the restriction position by the spring member 952, so that the operation unit 901 is operated in the subsequent game. Return to the restricted position at the same time.

  When the operation unit 901 returns to the initial position at the timing tb10, the stopper piece 951 is in a standby state at the restriction position. For this reason, the displacement of the operation portion 901 to the maximum projecting position is restricted by the stopper piece 951.

  Thereafter, at the timing of tb11, the reach effect executed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94 is finished, and a specific symbol combination corresponding to the game result (big hit result) is displayed on the display screen 94a. The At the same time, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 963 of the pressing side stopper mechanism 960 stops, and the drive unit 963 switches from the excited state to the non-excited state. As a result, the stopper piece 961 returns from the release position to the restriction position, and the operation stroke of the operation unit 901 decreases. That is, the operation switch unit 900 returns to the state before the start of the second continuous operation corresponding effect.

(First continuous operation compatible production)
Since most of the effects corresponding to the first continuous operation are the same as the effects corresponding to the second continuous operation, the following description will focus on differences from the effects corresponding to the second continuous operation.

  When the first continuous operation-corresponding effect is executed, as shown in the right part of FIG. 56, the symbol variation display on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94 is started at the timing tc1.

  Although the suggestion image of the first single operation is displayed at the timing of tc2, the player corresponds to either the first continuous operation corresponding effect or the second continuous operation corresponding effect at this timing. It is difficult to determine whether or not.

  At the timing of tc3, the pressing operation of the operation unit 901 is started, and at the timing of tc4 when the operation unit 901 reaches the specific position, the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 980 is started in the same manner as the second continuous operation corresponding effect. . As a result, the operation unit 901 is forcibly pulled in the same direction as the pressing operation direction.

  Here, when the second continuous operation corresponding effect is executed, output of a drive signal to the drive unit 953 of the protrusion-side stopper mechanism 950 is started at such timing, and the stopper piece 951 is moved from the restriction position to the release position. Although the configuration is displaced, the drive signal is not output in the first continuous operation-compatible effect. For this reason, in the first continuous operation corresponding effect, an increase in the operation stroke to the protruding side when the operation unit 901 is pressed is kept avoided, and thereafter the protruding side until the second continuous operation corresponding effect ends. The operation stroke will not increase.

  For this reason, the forced displacement becomes invalid at the timing of tc5, and even if the operation unit 901 is displaced in the projecting direction, the operation unit 901 does not reach the maximum projecting position beyond the initial position. Then, the player confirms to what position the operation unit 901 protrudes by visual observation or the like, thereby determining whether the operation-corresponding effect is the first continuous operation-corresponding effect or the second continuous operation-corresponding effect. It becomes possible to discriminate.

  After the operation unit 901 returns to the initial position at the timing of tc6, the suggestion image for the second single operation is displayed on the display screen 94a at the timing of tc7, similarly to the second continuous operation corresponding effect. In the first continuous operation corresponding effect, since the protrusion-side stopper mechanism 950 is not operating, the operation unit 901 is operated at the timing of tc8 and the operation unit 901 returns to the initial position at the timing of tc9. The process for returning the stopper piece 951 of the protrusion side stopper mechanism 950 to the initial position is not performed.

  Then, at the timing of tc10 when the variable display time ends, the pressing-side stopper mechanism 960 is switched to the restricted state, similarly to the second continuous operation corresponding effect.

  According to the tenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

  The operation switch unit 900 is configured to forcibly displace the operation unit 901 in the pressing direction when the operation unit 901 reaches a specific position when the operation unit 901 is pressed. Since such a forced displacement does not necessarily occur, a tactile change can be caused during operation depending on whether the forced displacement is executed or not. Such a tactile change can be grasped by actually performing a pressing operation, so that the player can be prompted to perform the pressing operation. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree to an operation means.

  The direction of displacement when the pressing operation is performed is the same as the direction of forced displacement. For this reason, it is possible to suitably avoid that the operability is lowered due to the forced displacement of the operation unit 901 or that it is difficult to reach the operation unit 901 to the maximum pressing position (operation reception position). .

  The operating unit 901 reaches the maximum pressing position by displacing the operating unit 901 in the pressing operation direction. For this reason, even if the player releases his / her hand from the operation unit 901 by being surprised by the forced displacement of the operation unit 901, the display effect that is executed when the operation is effectively received is not performed. There will be no inconvenience. Therefore, even if the operation unit 901 is made variable and a tactile presentation function is given, it is possible to reduce the inconvenience that the original function of the operation means as a trigger for executing the predetermined display presentation cannot be performed well. .

  The displacement speed when the operation unit 901 is pressed varies depending on the strength with which the player presses the operation unit 901. For this reason, if the displacement speed of the operation unit 901 when the operation unit 901 is forcibly displaced falls below the operation speed, a load is easily applied to the drive unit and the like. This is not preferable for protecting the drive unit and the like. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the solenoid 980 is employed as the drive unit, so that even if the above-described event occurs, the drive unit is hardly affected. Thereby, a drive part etc. can be protected suitably. Further, since the pressing operation is not hindered, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive reaction force to the player's hand pressing the operation unit 901.

  The pressing operation is often performed vigorously. For this reason, if the timing for generating the above-described forced displacement is delayed, there is a concern that it becomes difficult to convey a tactile change to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the trigger for forced displacement is set to be the displacement from the initial position of the operation unit 901. According to such a configuration, the forced displacement can be executed immediately in response to the start of the player's pressing operation. Thereby, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed.

  When the operation unit 901 is forcibly displaced, the operation unit 901 is temporarily restrained at the maximum pressing position. For this reason, even if the hand is released from the operation unit 901, the operation unit 901 does not return immediately, so that it is possible to avoid a frontal collision between the player's hand being displaced in the pressing direction and the operation unit 901.

  When the operation unit 901 is forcibly displaced, there is a concern that if the operation stroke is small, it is difficult for the player to grasp the tactile change. On the other hand, if the operation stroke is set large in advance in consideration of the forced displacement, there is a concern that the operability during the pressing operation without the forced displacement is lowered.

  Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the operation stroke is increased in the pressing direction when the operation unit 901 is forcibly displaced, the above-described disadvantages can be suppressed and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

  When the forced displacement does not occur, the forward displacement from the operation reception position of the operation unit 901 is restricted, and when the forced displacement occurs, the forward displacement of the operation unit 901 from the maximum pressed position is restricted. When the operation portion 901 has reached the operation reception position, the operation surface portion protrudes from the central opening 911 of the holder portion 902, and when the operation portion 901 has reached the maximum pressing position, the operation portion 901 is behind the central opening 911. The operation surface portion is buried. When the player presses the operation unit 901 with the palm, the palm comes into contact with the holder unit 902 and stops, but the operation unit 901 moves backward more than that, so it is easily separated from the hand. Thereby, the fact that the operation unit 901 is forcibly displaced can be easily transmitted to the player. However, it is general that the player does not perform the pressing operation aiming at the detection position but performs the pressing operation so as to stop at the maximum pressing position. Therefore, it may give an impression that the operation is difficult to perform when the buried position is set as the maximum pressing position in each operation. In this respect, according to the above-described configuration, such a disadvantage does not occur because the moving to the maximum pressing position to be buried is performed by itself.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other.

  (1) In the first to fourth embodiments, the operation area is changed during reach display (reach fluctuation). However, detailed timing for changing the operation area is arbitrary. However, in order to suitably exhibit the effect of improving the attention level of the player, it is preferable that the display is at least in a variable display (during game rotation).

  Further, although the operation area is expanded as part of the presentation during reach display, the operation area may be reduced by changing this. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the operation area is expanded → reduced repeatedly during reach display (during game play).

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment and the third to seventh embodiments, the operation unit is deformed during reach display (reach fluctuation). However, the operation unit is modified in detail. Timing is arbitrary. However, in order to suitably exhibit the effect of improving the attention level of the player, it is preferable that the display is at least in a variable display (during game rotation).

  (2) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the operation modes of the push button members 320, 550 and the like as the “operation means” are the same before and after the operation area is changed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the operation mode changes as the area changes.

  Specifically, the operation direction when the operation area is relatively small (the normal state) and the operation direction when the operation area is relatively large (the expanded state) may be different from each other. It is.

  In addition, the operation method in each state may be different. For example, in the first embodiment, the following changes can be made. That is, the push button member is composed of a deformable film-like member, a liquid is injected into the push button member, and an adjusting means (for example, a hydraulic cylinder) for adjusting the pressure of the liquid and a detecting means for detecting a change in pressure. And adopt. By increasing the liquid pressure in the normal state, substantial deformation when the player touches is impossible, and in the expanded state, the liquid pressure is decreased to allow substantial deformation. In the expanded state, the push button member protrudes upward so that the push button member can be gripped. Here, if the squeezing operation of the push button member is allowed, the operation method can be changed from the pressing operation in the normal state to the squeezing operation in the expanded state. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the further attention degree with respect to a pushbutton member.

  (3) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the operation corresponding effect is completed on condition that the push button member 320 and the cover body 530 as the “operation means” are returned to the positions before the operation. Although it is suppressed that the hand is left from the operation means after the operation, such a condition is not necessarily required. It is sufficient that the configuration is switched from the expanded state to the normal state on condition that at least the operating means has returned to the position before the operation.

  However, when the return to the position before the operation is not completed due to the hand being put on the operation means, the operation area expansion effect is restricted until the return is completed in the subsequent game rounds. Therefore, desirably, as shown in the above embodiment, the release of the push button member 320 or the like is released to the player by incorporating the return of the push button member 320 or the like to the position before the operation in the condition for completing the effect. And switching to the normal state after the operation area expansion effect is facilitated. Thereby, it can suppress that the production based on the change of an operation area becomes difficult to generate | occur | produce with the operation area expansion production | presentation being controlled.

  (4) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the push button members 320 and 550 are employed as the “operation means”. However, instead of this, a lever member such as a joystick may be employed. Good. For example, when the operation region is expanded by the lever member alone, the amount of protrusion of the lever member from the pedestal or the like on which the lever member is installed can be changed. In addition, when a lever member is employed, the operation direction is configured in a plurality of directions, and operation direction restriction means for restricting the operation direction of the lever member is adopted, and the operation direction is restricted when the operation area is expanded. It is also possible to remove the restriction by means.

  Furthermore, the “operation means” is not necessarily configured to be displaced based on the player's operation, and a configuration that accepts the player's operation without displacement, such as a touch panel, may be employed.

  (5) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 410 is employed as the “change means” or “deformation means”, but a control device other than the display control device 410 (for example, the sound lamp control device 143) is employed. It is also possible.

  (6) In the first embodiment, the operation switch unit 40 is disposed in the upper bulging portion 28. However, if the operation switch unit 40 is located at a position where the player can operate, the detailed layout of the operation switch unit 40 is provided. Is optional. For example, you may provide in the lower side bulging part 29 and may arrange | position in the position which lies side by side with the bulging parts 28 and 29. FIG.

  (8) In the first embodiment, the shutter member 330 constituting the “change means” is configured to restrict the upward projection of the push button member 320 as the “operation means”. It is sufficient that the operation area can be changed by covering a part of the operation area on the operation surface portion 322, and the function as the stopper is not necessarily required.

  In the push button member 320, the operation stroke is increased when the operation area is expanded. However, the operation stroke can be the same in both the normal state and the expanded state.

  (9) In the first embodiment, in order to realize smooth switching from the expanded state to the normal state, it is normal that the push button member 320 is waiting at the maximum projecting position in the expanded state. Although it is configured to switch to the state, it can be changed as follows. That is, instead of the position detection sensor 352 that detects that the push button member 320 is at the maximum projecting position, a touch sensor that detects this when a finger or the like touches the push button member 320 (specifically, the operation surface portion 322). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which when the touch sensor does not detect contact with the operation surface portion 322, the expanded state is restored to the normal state.

  (10) In the second embodiment, when the upper plate 501 is full, the first continuous operation-compatible effect (operation area expansion effect) is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the first continuous operation corresponding effect is performed even when the upper plate 501 is full. However, in this case, it is desirable to make the following changes together.

  That is, in the low frequency support mode, when the number of holds reaches the upper limit, even if the upper plate 501 is full, the first continuous operation corresponding effect is performed. When the number of reserves is the upper limit, the player often stops firing the game ball (especially when the reach is displayed), and further, the player loses because the game ball cannot be fired. Less likely. Therefore, even when a ball biting occurs due to the movement of the cover body 530 when the first continuous operation corresponding effect is performed in such a situation, the influence on the game progress can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the game ball is not being fired, the first continuous operation corresponding effect can be performed even when the upper plate 501 is full. Even if the inconvenience such as the above-mentioned biting of the ball occurs in a situation where the game ball is not being fired, the progress of the game is hardly affected.

  If at least one of the above configurations is employed, the execution condition of the first continuous operation-compatible effect can be relaxed.

  (11) In the second embodiment, the storage area is divided forward and backward by the partitioning part 522. Instead, the bottom part 511 of the upper plate body 510 is aligned on the back side with respect to the front side area. It is also possible to form the channel 523 in a stepped shape that is lower.

  However, when the storage ball is pushed by the cover body 530, force can be transmitted through the contact portion between the storage balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the force from the cover body 530 from reaching the alignment passage 523 by reducing the contact between the storage balls existing in the region on the near side and the storage balls existing in the alignment passage 523 as much as possible. it can. Considering this point, it is desirable to adopt the partition portion 522 shown in the above embodiment.

  (12) In the second embodiment, the distance between the front surface of the partition portion 522 and the top plate portion 532 increases toward the upstream side of the storage region RE, but at least the operation direction of the cover body 530 ( It is sufficient if the stored ball can be guided in a direction intersecting with the pressing direction), and for example, the structure may be configured to increase toward the downstream side. Further, the rear end of the top plate portion 532 is linear and the front surface of the partition portion 522 is curved, but this is reversed, the rear end portion of the top plate portion 532 is curved, and the front surface of the partition portion 522 is flat. It is also possible to form.

  (13) In the second embodiment, when the cover body 530 is operated in the expanded state, the push button member 550 moves following the cover body 530 so that the operation of the cover body 530 is performed. Can be detected by the detection sensor 557A. It is also possible to change the configuration so that the detection sensor for the cover body 530 and the detection sensor for the push button member 550 are separately provided so that the cover body 530 and the push button member 550 do not move together. is there.

  (14) In the second embodiment, when the cover body 530 moves rearward based on the player's operation, a part of the cover body 530 projects to the storage area side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the cover body 530 does not protrude toward the storage area even when the cover body 530 moves rearward.

  (15) In the second embodiment, when the continuous operation-corresponding effect is executed (specifically, the period after completion of the continuous operation), the payout of the game ball from the payout device 224 is temporarily stopped. It is good. In other words, the payout of game balls may be delayed until the end of the continuous operation support effect.

  (16) In the third embodiment, when the maximum number of times (“10 times”) is selected as the specified number of operations, the big win winning expectation is selected as the specified number of operations is set to the maximum number of times minus 1 It was configured to be lower than the expectation of winning the jackpot. More specifically, it is configured such that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is highest at the maximum number of times −1. Any configuration is possible as long as the number of prescribed operations increases and the expectation degree for winning a big hit is high. For example, a configuration in which the degree of expectation for winning a big hit is the highest at the maximum number of times.

  (17) In the third embodiment, the operation-corresponding effects are different in the case where the maximum number of times is selected as the prescribed number of times of operation and the case where the other number is selected. Specifically, when the maximum number of operations is selected as the prescribed number of operations, the game result is notified in advance based on the player's operation, and when any other number is selected, the preceding It was set as the structure which does not notify. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to make the mode of the operation corresponding effect similar when the maximum number of times is selected and when the other number is selected.

  For example, even when a number other than the maximum number is selected as the prescribed number of operations, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which advance notification is performed. However, since the player is not notified of how many times are set as the prescribed number of times of operation, there is a high possibility of repeated hits at the beginning of the operation. In the case where the advance notification is made under such a situation, the advance notification is suddenly performed during continuous hitting. This deviates from the original idea of reflecting the player's intention in the operation-response effect. Therefore, it is desirable that the advance notification is executed at the maximum specified number of times so that the player's intention is easily reflected in the operation corresponding effect.

  (18) In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the display screen 94a suggests that the operation has been effectively accepted. However, the reception suggestion function is provided in the speaker unit and the lamp unit. It is also possible to grant.

  Furthermore, in view of the point that acceptance is suggested based on at least deformation of the operation switch unit (change in the operation region), other suggestion functions executed on the display screen 94a and the like can be omitted.

  (19) In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the execution timing of the reception suggestion based on the deformation of the operation switch unit is shifted from the execution timing of the reception suggestion executed on the display screen 94a. Is also possible.

  For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the acceptance suggestion is executed on the display screen 94a after the acceptance suggestion based on the deformation of the operation switch unit is executed.

  (20) In the fourth embodiment, the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 constituting the “regulating means” operates even when the operation by the player is effectively accepted during the execution of the continuous expansion effect. It was configured to temporarily avoid the suggestion that was accepted. By changing this and restricting the acceptance of the operation itself, it is possible to temporarily avoid the suggestion that the operation has been accepted effectively.

  (21) In the fourth embodiment, the restriction of suggestion when the operation by the player is effectively accepted during the execution of the continuous expansion effect is configured to be executed according to the operation time, but this is changed. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the suggestion is regulated over a specific period. However, considering that the timing at which the player's operation is performed is not unambiguous, there is a possibility that the function of the restriction of suggestion based on the period may not be performed well. Therefore, it is desirable to adopt a configuration in which the suggestion is restricted according to the operation times as shown in the fourth embodiment.

  (22) In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the inner operation member 610 as the “inner operation portion” is completely covered by the outer operation member 620 as the “outer operation portion”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the inner operation member 610 is covered by the outer operation member 620 so that at least the inner operation member 610 cannot be accessed.

  Further, the outer operation member 620 is not necessarily formed in a bowl shape. It is sufficient that at least a function of preventing access to the inner operation member 610 is provided, and the shape thereof is arbitrary.

  (23) In the fifth embodiment, the inner operation member 610 is in contact with the outer operation member 620 from the inside. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the inner operation member 610 in a normal state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a gap is formed between the outer operation member 620 and the outer operation member 620.

  However, in consideration of the point that the outer operation member 620 is a target of the pressing operation by the player, and further the point that the outer operation member 620 is movable, the inner operation member is used from the viewpoint of protecting the outer operation member 620. It is preferable that 610 be in contact with the outer operation member 620.

  (24) In the fifth embodiment, the outer operation members 620 are arranged side by side, and in the sixth embodiment, the outer operation members 620A are arranged side by side, but how the outer operation members are arranged. And the number is arbitrary.

  For example, a single outer operation member 620 can be used. However, in order to shorten the period required for the deformation of the operation switch unit and smooth the operation-response effect, it is preferable to shorten the operation stroke by using a plurality of outer operation members 620. Thereby, it can contribute to shortening of the period which a deformation | transformation requires.

  (25) In the sixth embodiment, the lock device 660 is adopted and the outer operation member 620A (the entire operation unit 601A) cannot be operated in the deformed state. However, the lock device 660 is omitted and the deformed state is not used. Even if it exists, it is good also as a structure which accept | permits operation of the outer side operation member 620A (operation part 601A whole).

  (26) In the seventh embodiment, the operation surface portion 705 is deformed by moving the movable member 750 as the “second operation member” backward with respect to the button member 720 as the “first operation member”. However, the operation surface portion 705 may be deformed by changing this and projecting the movable member 750. Thereby, the change of the operation surface portion 705 can be easily transmitted to the player. However, since the occupying ratio in the operation surface portion 705 is set smaller in the movable member 750, there is a concern that it is difficult to perform the pressing operation after protruding as described above. This can be a factor that reduces the operability of the operation switch unit 700. Therefore, in view of ensuring operability, it is desirable to adopt a configuration in which the movable member 750 is retracted as shown in the seventh embodiment.

  Incidentally, when the configuration in which the movable member 750 is retracted as shown in the seventh embodiment is used, the degree of the conspicuous deformation is slightly inferior to the configuration in which the movable member 750 is projected, for example. there is a possibility. This is because, in the configuration in which the projection is made, the deformation is conspicuous by increasing the amount of projection, whereas in the configuration in which the projection is retracted, the change in appearance does not proceed even if it is further retracted. to cause. Therefore, for example, it is preferable that the movable member 750 is provided with a light transmission property and the button member 720 does not transmit light, and a light-emitting body that emits light from the distal end portion 753 through the protruding portion 752 is incorporated in the operation portion 701. By moving the movable member 750 backward, it is possible to suggest that the movable member 750 has moved backward by changing the aspect of the light emitted through the slit 723.

  (27) In the seventh embodiment, the operation surface portion 705 has a curved shape. However, the operation surface portion 705 may have a planar shape. However, in order to increase the tactile change after deformation, it is preferable that the operation surface portion 705 has a curved surface.

  (28) In the seventh embodiment, the operation direction of the operation unit 701 is parallel to the relative displacement direction of the button member 720 and the movable member 750, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the operation direction and the relative displacement direction intersect.

  (29) In the seventh embodiment, the movable member 750 having a relatively small occupation ratio is displaced with respect to the button member 720 having a relatively large occupation ratio of the operation surface portion 705. The reverse is also possible.

  (30) In the seventh embodiment, the deformation start timing is the timing at which the maximum pressing position is reached, but this is changed, and the timing at which the deformation returns to the maximum protruding position or the maximum pressing position returns to the maximum protruding position. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the deformation is started at a specific timing during the period.

  (31) In the seventh embodiment, the projecting portion 752 of the movable member 750 has a plate shape. However, at least when the player presses the operation surface portion 706 with a finger or the like, the finger is operated. Positions of the upper surface portion 722 of the button member 720 and the distal end portion 753 of the movable member 750 so as to be in contact with both the region constituted by the button member 720 and the region constituted by the movable member 750 in the surface portion 705. It suffices if the relationship is specified. For example, the protrusion may have a columnar shape (for example, a columnar shape).

  Further, the number of components corresponding to the movable member 750 is not limited to one, and a plurality of components may be used. For example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a plurality of movable members having a cylindrical shape and different diameters are concentrically arranged and each of the movable members is individually moved.

  (32) In the first embodiment and the third to seventh embodiments, the operation switch unit 40 or the like as the “operation means” is arranged on the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14. However, the operation switch unit 40 and the like may be operated at least from the front side of the gaming machine, and the detailed arrangement thereof is arbitrary. For example, the operation switch unit may be disposed on the lower bulge 29 or may be disposed around the game ball launching handle 45.

  Furthermore, it is not always necessary to arrange the operation switch unit so that the operation unit faces upward. For example, the operation unit is arranged so that the operation unit faces the front of the gaming machine or obliquely upward. It is also possible to arrange them.

  (33) In the first embodiment, the operation switch unit 40 is deformed (switched to the expanded state) before the push button member 320 is operated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, similarly to the other embodiments, the operation switch unit 40 may be deformed based on the operation of the push button member 320.

  Further, when the push button member 320 reaches the maximum pushing position (the maximum pushing position or the maximum displacement position) and the operation is effectively accepted, the operation switch unit 40 is required until the push button member 320 returns to the initial position. The following effects can be expected by adopting a configuration in which the deformation (switching to the expanded state) is started.

  When a configuration that deforms the operation switch unit 40 is employed, as described above, the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 40 itself can be improved. However, in a gaming machine having such a deformation means, even if the operation switch unit 40 is deformed, if it is missed, the deformation function (specifically, effects such as notification and effect) can be demonstrated well. It is assumed that it will not be done. This may be a factor that obstructs improvement in the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 40 by employing the above-described deformation means.

  In this regard, according to the present modification, when the push button member 320 is operated, the state change is started before the push button member 320 returns to the standby position, thereby allowing the push button member 320 to play a game. It is possible to increase the possibility that a state change will occur during the period when the person's hand is touching. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player overlooks the deformation of the operation switch unit 40 and to appropriately display the notification / effect effect. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement in the degree of attention to the player's operation means.

  (34) In the modified example (33), when the push button member 320 reaches the maximum pushing position (the maximum pressing position or the maximum displacement position), the detection signal (detection information) from the operation detection sensor 351 of the operation switch unit 40 is detected. ) Is output, and the operation control unit 40 is deformed when the display control device 410 receives the detection signal, so that the technical idea shown in the modification (33) can be realized. .

  Here, the operation detection position is not limited to the maximum pushing position. For example, an intermediate position between the initial position and the maximum pushing position can be used. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility of deformation while the player's hand or the like is touching the push button member 320, and the effects shown in the modification (33) are more suitably exhibited. Can be made.

  (35) In the modification (33) and the modification (34), the operation switch unit 40 is configured to be deformed. However, in order to embody the technical idea shown in these modifications, the following changes are made. You may go. That is, it is sufficient that at least the state (mode) of the operation switch unit 40 can be changed from a state before the operation to a state different from the state, for example, a vibration type operation that can be switched between a non-vibration state and a vibration state. It is also possible to adopt a switch unit. In this case, for example, the push button member 320 may be configured to switch from the non-vibration state to the vibration state based on the operation of the push button member 320 by the player.

  Further, the operation switch unit 40 is not necessarily required to change the state accompanied by the operations such as deformation and vibration, but may change the state not accompanied by the operation. For example, when the push button member 320 is operated by the player, it may be configured to switch from a normal temperature state to a high temperature state (generate heat). However, the configuration causing such a temperature change is more responsive in comparison with the variable operation switch unit shown in the first embodiment or the movable operation switch unit shown in the modification. Inferior.

  When the player performs an operation, it is assumed that the period during which the push button member 320 is touched is not so long when the long press operation is not prompted. For this reason, in order to make it difficult for the player to overlook tactile changes, it is preferable that the period required for changing the state of the operation switch unit 40 is as short as possible. In consideration of such circumstances, it is desirable to employ a movable operation switch unit that is superior to the responsiveness shown in the first embodiment.

  (36) In the modified examples (33) to (35), the operation switch unit 40 can be deformed based on the single operation, but the operation period is longer than that of the single operation. The state of the operation switch unit 40 may be changed when a long press operation or the like set to is performed.

  Specifically, the operation is continued over the first predetermined period, and the first predetermined display effect is executed, and the operation is performed over the second predetermined period set longer than the first predetermined period. The pattern in which the second predetermined display effect is executed by being continued is stored as effect information, and the state of the operation switch unit 40 when the second predetermined display effect is selected as a result of the effect lottery. The configuration allows the change. When the push button member 320 is operated, a prompt for prompting the player to continue the operation for a second predetermined period (such as a long press operation) is executed on the display screen 94a or the like, and the operation of the push button member 320 is performed. When the operation of the push button member 320 is effectively accepted under the situation where the continuation of the operation button is urged, the operation switch unit 40 may be configured to start deformation.

  When the operation is accepted in a situation where the continuation of the operation for the second predetermined period is urged, the state change is started so that the player touches the push button member 320 or the like. In such a situation, it is possible to favorably increase opportunities for the operation switch unit 40 to be deformed. As a result, the inconvenience that the fact that the state change has been made is overlooked can be made difficult to occur.

  Continuing the operation may be a continuous operation or a long press operation that keeps the button pressed, but it is easy to convey tactile changes (for example, to ensure the opportunity). It is desirable that a long press operation to be maintained in a pressed state is a target of prompting.

  In the configuration in which the urging means prompts the continuation of the operation for the second predetermined period, the following configuration may be adopted. That is, when the push button member 320 is operated during the prompting, the display screen 94a or the like corresponding to the specific operation corresponding to the pressed button member 320 is maintained as long as it is kept in the pressed state on the premise that it is during the second predetermined period. A display effect may be executed. In this way, if a configuration in which a specific effect is executed by maintaining the pressed state is used in combination, it is possible to prompt the player to continue the operation. In this case, at least while the operation is continued, by maintaining the deformed state, it is possible to make it difficult for the inconvenience that the deformation is overlooked.

  Incidentally, the technical idea shown in the modified examples (33) to (36) can be applied to other embodiments other than the first embodiment. In the case of having a configuration for changing the state of the operation means based on at least the operation by the player, the common problem of making it easy to convey the change of the state to the problems shown in these modifications, that is, the player There can be challenges. Here, if the technical idea shown in these modified examples is diverted, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

  (37) In the first embodiment, the push button type operation switch unit 40 is adopted. However, in realizing the technical idea shown in the modifications (33) to (36), for example, a lever is used. It is also possible to adopt a type of operation switch unit. As long as the player touches and operates, what type of operation switch unit is adopted is arbitrary.

  (38) In the ninth embodiment, the light-emitting unit 850 serving as the “display unit” has a light-emitting function. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the light emitting unit 850, a decorative body with a decoration such as a pattern may be adopted. In such a configuration, for example, when the decorative body is arranged at a display position that is in contact with or close to the operation surface portion 811, the decorative body is easily visible through the operation surface portion 811, and the decorative body is waiting at the initial position. In such a case, it is preferable that the decorative body is difficult or impossible to visually recognize through the operation surface portion 811. Although it is possible to improve the visibility of the decorative body by making the operation surface portion 811 transparent instead of translucent, it is considered that the difference in appearance between the initial position and the display position is clarified. In this case, as shown in the ninth embodiment, it is preferable that the operation surface portion 811 has a light diffusion function.

  Incidentally, it is also possible to adopt a display such as a liquid crystal or organic EL instead of the light emitting substrate 860 of the light emitting unit 850.

  (39) In the ninth embodiment, the position relatively distant from the operation surface 811 is the initial position of the light emitting unit 850, and the position relatively close to the operation surface 811 is the operation corresponding effect position of the light emitting unit 850. These positional relationships may be reversed. That is, when the operation corresponding effect is not executed, the light emitting unit 850 is disposed at a position relatively far from the operation surface portion 811. When the operation corresponding effect is executed, the light emitting unit 850 is relatively far from the operation surface portion 811. You may arrange in a position. In such a configuration, for example, the word “PUSH”, for example, appears on the push button in normal times, and the entire push button shines in a specific color (for example, rainbow color) at the time of a specific performance, so It may be configured to suggest the above.

  (40) In the ninth embodiment, the substrate holder 870 is provided as the “light restricting portion”. However, the substrate holder 870 does not necessarily have a function as the light restricting portion, and may be omitted. Is possible.

  In this case, various characters can be displayed by switching the light emitter 861 that is the light emission target. In particular, in the configuration in which the operation surface portion 811 and the light emitting unit 850 are integrally displaced, by repeating the operation twice and three times, the displayed characters are changed each time the operation is performed, thereby diversifying the lighting effects. realizable. Even in this case, the positional relationship between the operation surface portion 811 and the light emitting unit 850 can be kept constant (in a contact state), so that the visibility of characters displayed by the operation is prevented from being lowered. Can do.

  It is also possible to provide a function corresponding to the “light regulating unit” to the button member 810 side. Furthermore, it is possible to give a function corresponding to the light regulating unit to both the button member 810 and the light emitting unit 850.

  (41) In the ninth embodiment, the light emission unit 850 emits light while the pressing operation is being performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, any one of the light emitters 861 can be constantly turned on. However, in order to clarify the difference in appearance or to emphasize the change, it is preferable that the light emission during movement is limited.

  (42) In the ninth embodiment, the light diffusion portion 816 is formed on the operation surface portion 811. However, at least light controlled by the substrate holder 870 (specifically, the upright wall portion 873) is passed through the operation surface portion 811. Any structure may be used as long as it can diffuse before being irradiated to the front side, and a configuration corresponding to the light diffusing unit 816 may be separately provided between the operation surface unit 811 and the substrate holder 870. However, considering the point that the expansion of the occupied area of the operation switch unit 800 is suppressed, and further the point that the operation surface unit 811 itself can appear to emit light, as shown in the ninth embodiment. In addition, it is preferable to provide the light diffusion portion 816 on the operation surface portion 811. Note that the specific configuration is arbitrary as long as light can be diffused.

  (43) In the ninth embodiment, the button member 810 is displaced (movable) by the player's pressing operation. However, even if the pressing operation is performed by changing this, the button member 810 is displaced. A configuration in which the member 810 is not displaced (fixed type) is also possible.

  In this case, for example, a touch sensor may be employed as means for detecting the presence or absence of a pressing operation.

  (44) In the ninth embodiment, the suggestion continuation period of the long press operation is a period required for at least the light emitting unit 850 to contact the operation surface portion 811 (specifically, a period during which the light emitting unit 850 reaches the maximum displacement position). ), But is not limited to this. If it is assumed that the pressing operation is continued by the player, the period required for the light emitting unit 850 to reach the position where the light emitting unit 850 contacts the operation surface portion 811 in a state where the button member 810 is disposed at the maximum pressing position. It is sufficient to set it longer.

  (45) In the ninth embodiment, the solenoid 880 is employed as the “drive unit”, but a motor or the like may be employed instead. However, there is a possibility that an external force generated by the pressing operation acts in the opposite direction, and this may be a factor that gives an excessive load to the button member 810 and the driving unit. In this regard, if the solenoid 880 is employed, even if the above-described reverse force is applied, it is possible to suppress an excessively large load from being generated on the solenoid 880 and the button member 810.

  (46) In the ninth embodiment, the configuration in which the button member 810 and the light emitting unit 850 are integrally displaced is realized by the solenoid 880, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, a coupling means that couples the operation surface portion 811 and the light emitting unit 850 by pushing the button member 810 to the maximum pressing position may be employed. As the coupling means, a lock mechanism or an adhesive material may be employed. When such a configuration is adopted, the configuration for driving the light emitting unit 850 (solenoid 880) can be omitted, and the configuration of the operation switch unit 800 can be simplified.

  (47) In the ninth embodiment, the distance between the light emitting unit 850 and the operation surface portion 811 is changed by operating the light emitting unit 850. However, the operation surface portion 811 emits light by a pressing operation by the player. Considering the point approaching the unit 850, the pressing operation can be used as a means for changing the distance. For example, when the button member 810 is waiting at the initial position or when the button member 810 reaches the maximum pressing position, the light emitting body 861 is turned on to perform the light emission effect, thereby making it possible to make a difference in the light emission mode. .

  (48) In the tenth embodiment, the operation unit 901 as the “operation means” is forcibly displaced to the maximum pressing position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the operation unit 901 is forcibly displaced. It is enough if there is a section to be used.

  However, when the forced displacement is executed, the player may be surprised to release his hand. As described above, by releasing the hand from the operation unit 901, there is a high possibility that the period during which the operation unit 901 is pushed into the operation reception position is missed. Therefore, preferably, when the operation unit 901 is forcibly displaced, the operation unit 901 may be pulled into at least the operation reception position.

  (49) In the tenth embodiment, the operation unit 901 is constrained at the maximum pressing position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After the operation unit 901 is forcibly displaced to the maximum pressing position, output of the drive signal to the solenoid 980 may be stopped, and the operation unit 901 may be returned to the initial position or the like by the biasing force of the spring member 941.

  (50) In the tenth embodiment, the pressing-side stopper mechanism 960 is provided as the “operation stroke changing means”. However, this can be omitted.

  (51) In the tenth embodiment, the forced displacement is started immediately after the operation unit 901 deviates from the initial position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any configuration that starts the forced displacement at least at a timing before the pressing operation by the player is completed, that is, a timing before the operation unit 901 reaches the operation reception position or the maximum pressing position is sufficient. That is, the “specific position” may be changed to an arbitrary position between the initial position and the operation reception position.

  However, it is preferable to secure a certain amount of stroke in order to easily inform the player that the operation unit 901 is forcibly displaced. Therefore, it is preferable that the forced displacement is started at the timing immediately after the start of the pressing operation, as shown in the tenth embodiment.

  (52) In the tenth embodiment, the detection sensor 971 that detects that the operation unit 901 is present at the initial position is provided. In the display control device 410, the detection signal from the detection sensor 971 is a detection HI. When the signal is switched to a non-detection LOW signal, the operation unit 901 determines that the operation unit 901 has deviated from the initial position (has reached a specific position). However, this may be changed as follows. That is, a detection sensor that detects that the operation unit 901 exists at a specific position may be provided, and the display control device 410 may be configured to determine arrival at the specific position based on a detection signal from the detection sensor.

  (53) In the tenth embodiment, when forced displacement is performed, the operation portion 901 (specifically, the operation surface portion) is buried in the central opening 911 of the holder portion 902, so that the palm is Although it is easy to separate from the operation surface portion, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation portion 901 may be protruded from the central opening 911 even when forced displacement is performed.

  (54) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Feature A1. In a gaming machine provided with operating means (push button member 320 or the like) operated by a player,
The operation means is configured to be switchable between a first state and a second state in which an operation range in which the player can directly touch and operate than the first state is set,
According to a game situation, the operation means is switched between the first state and the second state, and is provided with changing means (shutter member 330, display control device 410, etc.) for changing the operation range. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature A1, the operation range that can be operated by directly touching the player is changed according to the game situation. Thereby, when operating the operating means, a game for confirming what the operating range is visually or tactilely is realized, and it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the operating means.

  For example, the changing unit includes an expansion unit that expands an operable range by switching the operation unit from the first state to the second state when a preset condition is satisfied. Adopt it.

  The configuration shown in this feature may be changed as follows. In other words, “equipped with an operation means provided on the front side of the gaming machine and outputting an operation signal by the player's operation, and an effect control means for executing an effect different depending on whether the operation signal is input or not. The operation means has an operation range in which the operation signal is output when the player directly touches and operates the operation means. The operation means has a first state and a second state in which the operation ranges are different from each other. And a change means for changing the operation range by switching the operation means between the first state and the second state according to a game situation. It may be a gaming machine.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the operation range in the second state includes at least a part of the operation range in the first state.

  According to the feature A2, by setting a common operation range in the first state and the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation opportunity without knowing the location to be operated.

Feature A3. The changing means is
Restriction means (shutter member 330) for restricting the operation of a specific part (for example, a portion other than the central portion in the operation surface portion 322) in the operation means;
Release means (solenoid 340, display control device 410, etc.) for releasing the operation restriction by the restriction means;
The feature A1 or feature A2 according to the feature A1 or feature A2, wherein the first state is achieved when the operation restriction is made by the restriction means, and the second state is made when the operation restriction is released by the release means. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A2, the operation of the specific part is regulated by entering the first state, and the operation of the specific part is enabled by entering the second state. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the operation of the specific part is switched by regulation / restriction, a change in the operation range can be suggested to the player.

Feature A4. The restricting means is a movable cover that covers the specific part in the first state,
The releasing means moves the cover part to a position where the specific part is not covered, and enters the second state.
The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein in the second state, the specific part is exposed so that the specific part can be directly touched and operated.

  According to the feature A3, the player can determine how the operation range has changed by switching between the first state in which the specific part is covered and the second state in which the specific part is not covered by the restricting means (cover portion). It can be clearly shown.

  In addition, by making the cover part movable, the change in the operation range can be suitably used as an effect to increase the degree of attention to the game. Note that the player may play the game with a hand attached to the operation means. In this case, the player can provide not only visual or auditory effects but also tactile effects. Become.

Feature A5. The operation means is an operation button (push button member 320) having an operation surface (operation surface portion 322),
The restricting means covers a part of the operation surface so as to allow the pressing operation of the operation surface in the first state, and covers a smaller range than the first state in the second state, or A movable cover (shutter member 330) configured not to cover the operation surface;
The release means is
Drive means (solenoid 340, gear 345, etc.) for moving the cover part within a predetermined range including the position to be in the first state and the position to be in the second state;
A gaming machine according to claim A3, further comprising drive control means (display control device 410) for controlling the drive means so that the cover portion is in the first state or the second state. .

  According to the feature A5, it is possible to clearly show the player how the operation range has changed by changing the range covered by the cover portion on the operation surface.

  In addition, by making the cover part movable, the change in the operation range can be suitably used as an effect to increase the degree of attention to the game. Note that the player may play the game with a hand attached to the operation means. In this case, the player can provide not only visual or auditory effects but also tactile effects. Become.

Feature A6. The operation button is provided to be displaceable in a predetermined direction by being operated by a player.
The cover part is provided so as to be movable in a direction crossing the predetermined direction,
The drive control means drives the drive unit to switch the operation means to the first state based on the fact that the operation button has been returned to the position before the operation in the second state. The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein the gaming machine is controlled.

  In the case where the operable range is expanded by moving the cover portion, it is preferable that the cover portion is smoothly moved when the operable range is reduced. In this regard, in this feature, when the second state is switched to the first state, the cover portion is moved on condition that the operation button is returned to the position before the operation. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that switching to the first state is prevented due to interference of the cover part with a hand (finger or the like).

  Feature A7. When the operation button is operated in the second state, effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect by returning the operation button to the position before the operation (function to execute the effect in the display control device 410) The gaming machine according to Feature A6, comprising:

  According to the feature A7, after pressing the operation button with a finger or the like, the predetermined effect is executed by releasing the finger or the like from the operation button. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to remove the finger from the operation means after the pressing operation, which can contribute to smooth switching to the first state.

Feature A8. The operation means includes
A first operation unit (push button member 550);
A second operating part (cover body 530) provided separately from the first operating part and displaceable based on the operation;
The changing means regulates the displacement of the second operation portion in the first state, and releases the displacement restriction of the second operation portion in the second state,
First prompting means for prompting an operation of the second operation unit in the first state;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, further comprising second prompting means for prompting an operation of the second operation unit in the second state.

  According to the feature A8, the player can grasp whether or not the operation range has changed from the feeling of operating the second operation unit. Specifically, it is possible to grasp whether or not the displacement of the second operation unit is restricted by attempting an operation. By using the change in the operation range as an effect for increasing the degree of attention to the game, it is possible to provide not only visual or auditory effects but also tactile effects to the player.

Feature A9. Provided on the front side of the gaming machine so as to swell forward of the gaming machine, and equipped with a storage tray (upper tray 501) capable of storing gaming balls,
The storage tray has a main body (upper tray main body 510) that is fixed to the front portion of the gaming machine and provided with a storage area forming portion (a bottom portion 511 and a peripheral wall portion 512).
A front movable panel portion (cover body 530) provided along the front surface portion of the main body portion, covering the front surface portion from the front of the gaming machine, and provided to be relatively movable with respect to the main body portion,
The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the second operation unit is configured by the front movable panel unit, and the displacement restriction is released when a preset condition is satisfied.

  Some gaming machines are provided with operation buttons on the front surface or the upper surface of the storage tray in consideration of facilitating access to an operation unit (for example, a push button) or making it stand out. In such a gaming machine, when it is intended to change the operation range while ensuring operability, for example, a configuration in which another operation button is added to the storage tray may be employed. However, in such a configuration, the storage area of the operation button is secured, so that the storage tray protrudes forward in the gaming machine and the storage area is easily compressed. Therefore, instead of adding an operation button, if the front movable panel part (for example, the outer shell forming part of the storage tray) is used as the second operation part, the operation area can be expanded while suppressing the occurrence of the inconvenience.

Feature A10. The first operation unit is provided to be displaceable in the same direction as the displacement direction of the second operation unit,
Based on the displacement of the first operation unit, comprising a detecting means for detecting that the first operation unit is operated,
When the first operation unit is operated, the first operation unit is displaced independently of the second operation unit. On the other hand, when the second operation unit is operated, the second operation is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the first operation unit is displaced following the portion.

  According to the feature A10, it can be detected by the detection means that the operation is performed regardless of which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is operated. According to this configuration, it is possible to share the detection means and contribute to simplification of the electrical configuration.

  Feature A11. The front movable panel unit moves backward from the gaming machine based on the player's operation, so that the front movable panel unit moves from a position that does not overlap the storage area from above to a position that overlaps the storage area from above. The gaming machine according to Feature A9 or Feature A10, wherein the gaming machine is configured.

  As shown in feature A9, when a front movable panel unit (for example, an outer shell forming unit) is used as the second operation unit, the front movable panel unit can be moved at a position away from the storage area. Interference with the storage ball at the time of operating can be avoided. However, in such a configuration, the storage tray overhangs ahead of the gaming machine, which may be a factor that gives the player a feeling of pressure. On the other hand, when the storage area forming portion is made small so as to ensure the operation area of the front movable panel section, the convenience of the storage tray is reduced by reducing the storage amount.

  In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the outer shape forming part overlaps the storage area from above only at the time of performing the performance, it is possible to suppress an increase in the feeling of pressure while securing the storage amount.

Feature A12. The rear portion in the storage area is a take-in passage (alignment passage 523) for taking game balls in an aligned state,
The moving range of the front movable panel portion is set so that overlapping from the upper side with respect to the intake passage is avoided when reaching the maximum rearward displacement position. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A12, the game ball existing in the take-in passage is suppressed from being pushed by the front movable panel portion, and the backward movement of the outer shell locking portion is prevented from preventing the game ball from being taken in. Can do.

Feature A13. In the storage region, a wall portion (partition portion 522) is formed that stands up from the bottom and separates the intake passage and a region that is in front of the intake passage,
The gaming machine according to Feature A12, wherein an upper end portion of the wall portion is located below an upper surface portion (top plate portion 532) of the front movable panel portion.

  According to the feature A13, even when the storage ball is pushed rearward by the front movable panel portion, it is possible to suppress the influence on the intake passage.

  For example, the height difference between the upper end portion of the wall portion and the upper surface portion of the outer shell engaging portion may be larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball.

  Feature A14. Any of the wall portion and the upper surface portion of the front movable panel portion is inclined to the side of the gaming machine, so that the interval between the wall portion and the front movable panel portion is increased toward the side. A gaming machine according to Feature A13.

  According to the feature A14, when the stored balls existing between the front movable panel unit and the wall unit are pushed to the wall unit side by the operation of the front movable panel unit, the stored balls are moved to the wall unit or the front movable panel unit. Can be encouraged to move sideways along. Thereby, the pushed storage ball escapes in a direction intersecting with the operation direction of the front movable panel portion, so that the pushing operation of the front movable panel portion is not easily disturbed.

  In particular, by setting the escape direction of the storage ball to the side, it is possible to suppress the pushed storage ball from getting over the wall portion and flowing into the intake passage.

Feature A15. The changing means is
A game ball detection means (ball detection sensor 36) for detecting a game ball in the storage tray or a guide passage (front door side upper tray passage 35) for guiding a game ball to the storage tray;
Based on the detection result of the game ball detection means, storage determination means for determining whether or not the game ball is stored up to a specific position in the storage tray or the guide passage (the upper plate 501 is full in the display control device 410). Function to determine whether or not),
Specific restriction means for restricting switching to the second state when the storage determining means determines that the game ball has accumulated up to the specific position (function of executing step S603 in the display control device 410) The gaming machine according to any one of features A11 to A14, wherein:

  As shown in feature A11, in the configuration in which the front movable panel unit moves to the storage area side by the player's operation, the operation is performed when the storage tray is full, There is a concern that it will be easy to disturb the operation. Therefore, if the switching to the second state is restricted when the storage tray is full as shown in this feature, it is possible to reduce the inconvenience that the operation cannot be performed successfully.

Feature A16. A game area (game area PE), and a ball entrance (operation port 83) into which game balls enter;
Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball stored in the storage tray to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball-entry unit (a winning process for the operating port in the main controller 162);
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means includes acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area in the main control device 162) for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
The changing means is
When the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has reached the specified number, there is provided an invalidating means for invalidating the restriction by the specific restricting means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  When the number of stored special information has reached the specified number, the player is unlikely to suffer a disadvantage even if the game ball is not fired, and there is no real harm even if the fire operation is hindered. Therefore, when the tank is full, it is possible to suppress the generation of an effect with the outline forming unit as an operation target by invalidating the restriction by the specific restriction unit.

  Further, if the operation of the front movable panel portion is performed with both hands, the launch operation is not performed and the operating rate of the gaming machine may be reduced. In this respect, if the restriction by the specific restricting means is invalidated when the number of stored special information reaches the prescribed number, it is possible to favorably suppress a decrease in the operating rate.

  "A game area (game area PE) and a ball entrance (operation port 83) into which game balls enter, and game ball launching means for launching game balls into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation" (Game ball launching mechanism 110), information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the pitching part (a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 162), Operation determining means for determining whether or not a firing operation is being performed, and the changing means determines the specific restriction when the operation determining means determines that the predetermined firing operation has not been detected. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that includes an “invalidating means for invalidating the restriction by the means”.

Feature A17. Payout means (payout device 224 and the like) for paying out game balls to the storage tray;
The game according to any one of features A11 to A16, comprising delay means for delaying payout until at least the first state is reached in the second state. Machine.

  According to the feature A17, it is possible to prevent the payout of the game ball to the storage tray from being hindered by the front movable panel portion or the operation of the outline forming portion from being hindered by the payout game ball.

Feature B1. Operation means (push button member 320 and the like) operated by the player;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect execution means (display control device 410) for executing an effect based on an operation of the operation means,
When the first specific operation as a repetitive operation is performed by the operation unit, the effect executing unit prompts the player to perform a second specific operation on the operation unit,
A gaming machine comprising means for enabling the second specific operation based on the first specific operation being performed.

  According to the feature B1, when the player performs a first specific operation (for example, a specified number of repeated operations), the second specific operation is prompted on the gaming machine. As described above, since at least the execution of the first specific operation and the prompt for the second specific operation are performed, it is possible to give a meaning to the next operation when the operation means is repeatedly operated, and the repeated operation is useless. It is possible to make it difficult to give the player an impression as if it were. Thereby, it can suppress that the attention degree to an operation means (specific operation) falls.

  Note that, for example, a configuration that suggests when the second specific operation is performed, such as an expected degree of transition from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state advantageous to the player, may be employed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to set the above specified number of times so that it is substantially unreachable or substantially reachable and do not suggest the degree of expectation by whether or not the specified number of times is reached. , Can suggest the degree of expectation. When a configuration that can make the specified number of times substantially unreachable is adopted, it is easy to give the player an impression that the operation is wasted, but when the second specific operation is performed, the degree of expectation, etc. By adopting a configuration that suggests, such inconvenience can be preferably solved.

Feature B2. A lottery means (lottery function of the main control device 162) for performing lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
The production execution means is for urging the player to perform a second specific operation on the operation means when a first specific operation as a predetermined predetermined number of repetitive operations is performed on the operation means.
Furthermore, the production execution means
Storage means (ROM 413 of the display control device 410) for storing a plurality of times data for setting the specified number of times according to an expectation that the special gaming state will occur;
It has setting means (function to execute processing of Step S305 etc. in display control device 410) which sets one of a plurality of times data as the specified number of times based on the lottery result by the lottery means The gaming machine according to Feature B1, characterized by:

  According to the feature B2, when the first specific operation is performed, the occurrence expectation of the special gaming state varies depending on how many times the predetermined operation has been reached. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree with respect to 1st specific operation (repetitive operation).

  Feature B3. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the setting means is set so that the specified number of times corresponding to the number-of-times data increases as the expectation level increases.

  According to the feature B3, when the expectation level at which the special gaming state is generated is low, the prescribed number is reduced, and when the expectation degree is high, the prescribed number is increased. For this reason, when the first specific operation is performed, the player repeats the operation while expecting that the prescribed number of times will not be reached, and the repeated operation can be preferably promoted.

  Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the second specific operation is different in at least one of an operation direction and an operation target with respect to the first specific operation.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to suppress the player from performing the second specific operation at an unintended timing while maintaining the momentum of the continuous operation.

Feature B5. A restricting means (such as a cover stopper device 540) provided so as to be switchable from a state of restricting the second specific operation to a state of releasing the restriction;
A determination unit (a function of executing the process of step S712 in the display control device 410) for determining whether or not to cancel the operation restriction by the restriction unit;
A release means (a function for executing the process of step S713 in the display control device 410) for releasing the operation restriction by the restriction means when the determination means makes a decision to release the restriction;
When the determination by the determination unit is made, the effect execution unit notifies that there is a possibility that the second specific operation is possible regardless of the determination result. Thru | or the game machine as described in any one of characteristics B4.

  According to the feature B5, a right to challenge the second specific operation is generated on condition that the first specific operation is executed. Here, since it is determined whether or not the second specific operation can be performed, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention not only to the effects after the second specific operation but also to the second specific operation itself. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation from becoming monotonous and mechanically perform a series of operations, and to promote active participation in the game.

  It should be noted that both the “means for enabling the second specific operation based on the fact that the first specific operation has been performed” shown in the feature B1 and the “determination means” and the “release means” shown in this feature are both operated. It corresponds to permission means.

Feature B6. The production execution means is for urging the player to perform a second specific operation on the operation means when a first specific operation as a predetermined predetermined number of repetitive operations is performed on the operation means.
Storage means (ROM 413 of the display control device 410) for storing a plurality of times data for setting the specified number of times according to the possibility that the operation restriction is released;
Setting means (a function of executing processing such as step S305 in the display control device 410) that sets one of the plurality of times data as the specified number of times based on a determination result by the determination means; A gaming machine according to Feature B5, characterized in that

  According to the feature B6, the specified number of times for the first operation is determined according to the possibility of the second specific operation being possible. For this reason, a game of predicting whether or not the second specific operation is possible through the first specific operation is added, and the degree of attention to the effect relating to the specific operation can be preferably improved.

  For example, the plurality of types of prescribed times may be set so that the possibility that the operation restriction is released increases as the number of times increases. Thereby, the first specific operation (repeated operation) can be preferably promoted.

Feature B7. Operating means operated by the player;
Restriction means for restricting the operation means from being operated;
Determination means for determining whether or not to cancel the operation restriction by the restriction means;
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means for notifying that there is a possibility that the second specific operation is possible when the determination is made regardless of the determination result by the determination means. .

  According to the feature B7, when the operation means is to be operated according to the notification, it is determined whether or not the operation means can actually be operated. According to such a configuration, not only the operation result of the operation means but also the degree of attention to the operation itself can be improved, and it is possible to prevent the player from performing the operation mechanically. This can encourage active participation in the game.

Feature B8. The restricting means is configured to be recognized as having the same appearance in both a restricted state that restricts the operation of the operating means and a restriction release state that does not restrict the operation of the operating means,
The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein the notification unit performs similar notification regardless of a result of determination by the determination unit.

  According to the feature B8, it is difficult or impossible to determine whether the state is the restriction state or the restriction release state from the appearance or the notification content until the operation means is actually operated. In this way, by making it difficult or impossible to predict whether or not an operation can be performed from the appearance of the gaming machine or the like, the degree of attention to the operation means (operation) can be preferably improved.

Feature B9. The operation means is configured to be displaceable in a predetermined direction from an initial position,
The restricting means restricts displacement of the operating means in the predetermined direction by contacting the operating means arranged at the initial position from the front side in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to Feature B8.

  According to feature B9, when operating the operating means, it is possible to convey a tactile difference to the player between the restricted state and the restricted state, and the degree of attention to the operating means can be further improved. .

  Further, in order to realize the technical idea shown in the feature B7, an operation (displacement) is allowed, but it is also possible to adopt a configuration that does not accept it effectively. However, in such a configuration, there is no reaction in spite of the operation, which may give the player an impression as if it is malfunctioning. In this respect, if the movement itself is restricted as shown in this feature, such misunderstanding can be avoided.

  In the feature B8 and feature B9, when a lock mechanism that locks the operation means is employed as the restricting means, the lock mechanism may not be visible from the player side (the front side of the gaming machine).

Feature B10. Operating means operated by the player;
Effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation means being operated a predetermined number of times set in advance;
In a gaming machine provided with lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The production execution means
Storage means (ROM 413 of the display control device 410) for storing a plurality of times data for setting the specified number of times according to an expectation that the special gaming state will occur;
It has setting means (function to execute processing of Step S305 etc. in display control device 410) which sets one of a plurality of times data as the specified number of times based on the lottery result by the lottery means A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature B10, when the operation means is operated repeatedly, the expected occurrence degree of the special gaming state is suggested depending on how many times the specified number of operations is reached. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree with respect to 1st specific operation (repetitive operation).

  Feature B11. In the setting means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result, the corresponding specified number of times among the plurality of times data is relatively small compared to the case where the lottery result is a losing result. The gaming machine according to Feature B10, wherein the gaming machine is set so that a relatively large number of items can be easily selected.

  According to the feature B11, the prescribed number is reduced when the degree of expectation that the special gaming state is generated is low, and the prescribed number is increased when the expectation is high. For this reason, when performing the first specific operation, the player repeats the operation while expecting that the prescribed number of times will not be reached, and the player can be preferably prompted to perform the same repeated operation.

Feature C1. Operation means (operation switch unit 40 etc.) operated by the player;
Effect execution means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation means being operated a predetermined number of times set in advance;
In a gaming machine provided with lottery means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The production execution means
A storage unit (ROM 413 of the display control device 410) for storing a plurality of times data (number of times determination table) for setting the specified number of times in accordance with an expected degree of occurrence of the special gaming state;
It has setting means (function to execute processing of Step S305 etc. in display control device 410) which sets one of a plurality of times data as the specified number of times based on the lottery result by the lottery means A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature C1, when the operation means is repeatedly operated, the expected degree of occurrence of the special gaming state is suggested depending on how many times the specified number of operations has been reached. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree with respect to 1st specific operation (repetitive operation).

Feature C2. Of the plurality of number of times data stored in the storage means, the number of times data having the specified number of times is more likely to be the winning result than the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is an outlier result. It is set so that the probability set as the specified number of times is high,
Of the plurality of number of times data stored in the storage means, the number of times data with a smaller specified number of times is the case where the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the winning result than the case where the result of the lottery is an outlier The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the gaming machine is set so that a probability set as the specified number of times is low.

  According to the feature C2, the specified number is likely to decrease when the expectation level at which the special gaming state occurs is low, and the specified number tends to increase when the expectation level is high. For this reason, when performing the first specific operation, the player repeats the operation while expecting that the prescribed number of times will not be reached, and the player can be preferably prompted to perform the same repeated operation.

Feature C3. The production execution means
Operation accepting means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for accepting an operation of the operation means;
In the feature C1 or the feature C2, the operation accepting unit includes a reception period setting unit (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) that sets an operation reception period in which the operation of the operation unit can be received. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C3, by setting the reception period, it is possible to avoid the operation being excessively delayed by the player.

  Feature C4. The effect execution means executes the predetermined effect without waiting for the operation reception period to elapse when the number of operations reaches the specified number of times within the operation reception period. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature C4, since operation is completed → predetermined presentation, it is possible to suppress unnecessary operations from being performed and strengthen the connection between the specified number of times (number of operations) and the expected degree. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the further attention degree.

Feature C5. The production execution means
When an operation is accepted by the operation accepting means, an intermediate effect executing means for executing an intermediate effect so as to correspond to the respective operations;
The gaming machine according to Feature C3 or Feature C4, further comprising a final effect executing unit that executes a final effect when the operation receiving unit completes the reception of the specified number of operations.

  According to the feature C5, an effect corresponding to each operation is executed before the final effect is executed.

  Feature C6. The intermediate effect execution means includes means for suggesting that the operation accepting unit has accepted an operation as the intermediate effect, and a part of all operations corresponding to the specified number of times as the intermediate effect, or the reception period. And a means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for restricting the suggestion by the suggesting means over a part of the period.

  In the configuration in which the predetermined performance is executed by reaching the specified number of times as shown in the feature C1, there is a concern that the degree of attention to the operation unit may be reduced by reaching the specified number of times. In this regard, according to this feature, there is a possibility that the acceptance suggestion as an intermediate effect may pause until the specified number of times is reached, so a situation where the operation is not accepted (that is, the operation is actually accepted) There is a case where the operation reception is not suggested regardless of whether or not the operation is accepted = the operation is not completed. This encourages the player to maintain a sense of expectation that more operations may be accepted even if the specified number of times has been reached, and reduces the degree of attention to the operations and the results of the operations. Can be suppressed.

  Feature C7. The intermediate effect execution means includes means for suggesting that the operation accepting unit has accepted an operation as the intermediate effect, and a part of all operations corresponding to the specified number of times as the intermediate effect, or the reception period. And a means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for restricting the suggestion by the suggesting means over a part of the period.

  In the configuration in which the predetermined performance is executed by reaching the specified number of times as shown in the feature C1, there is a concern that the degree of attention to the operation unit may be reduced by reaching the specified number of times. In this regard, according to this feature, there is a possibility that the acceptance suggestion as an intermediate effect may pause until the specified number of times is reached, so a situation where the operation is not accepted (that is, the operation is actually accepted) There is a case where the operation reception is not suggested regardless of whether or not the operation is accepted = the operation is not completed. This encourages the player to maintain a sense of expectation that more operations may be accepted even if the specified number of times has been reached, and reduces the degree of attention to the operations and the results of the operations. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, although the system accepts operations internally, it adopts a configuration that does not temporarily suggest operations, so the reception suggestions have been revived by continuing operations in situations where there are no suggestions. In this case, the expectation degree of the operation until then is also added. As a result, it is possible to give meaning to the operation performed in a situation where the reception suggestion is not performed, and it is possible to contribute to guaranteeing the willingness to operate.

  Further, since an operation exceeding the specified number of times is not necessary, it is not necessary to prompt the player for an excessive number of operations. Thereby, it can suppress that the production | presentation concerning operation extends.

  When the configuration shown in the feature C6 or the feature C7 is employed, for example, a delay unit that delays the timing for executing the final effect after reaching the specified number of times may be employed.

Feature C8. First determination means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for determining whether or not to restrict by the means for restricting the suggestion;
Delay means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for delaying the timing of executing the final effect after reaching the specified number of times;
Or C2 or a second determination unit that determines whether or not to perform a delay by the delay unit when the determination result by the first determination unit is a result of not performing the regulation. A gaming machine according to Feature C7.

  According to the feature C6, when the number of operations reaches the specified number of operations, the start of the final effect may be delayed. As a result, even if a small number of times is set as the specified number of times, it is possible to give the player an impression that the operation may still be continued and to encourage the continuation of the operation Can do.

  In addition, it is preferable to set the occurrence frequency of the operation restriction and the occurrence frequency of the production delay to be lower than the occurrence frequency.

  Feature C9. The object of restriction by the means for restricting the suggestion is set to be an operation other than the first operation and the last operation among all the operations corresponding to the specified number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of features C8.

  According to the feature C9, since the restriction is executed in the middle part, it is possible to make it difficult to give an impression as if a failure has occurred in the operation means as compared with the case where the restriction is performed from the beginning.

  In addition, by removing the last operation from the restriction target, it is possible to avoid that the specified number of times remains unknown.

  It should be noted that preferably the target of regulation is the latter half of all operations corresponding to the prescribed number of times. When the regulation is activated, it may be judged that it has already finished and the operation may be stopped. Therefore, if the target of regulation is the second half, even if such a misunderstanding occurs, many operations can be allowed. Thereby, the following inconvenience caused by adopting the restricting means can be suppressed. In other words, it is possible to suppress giving an image as if the degree of expectation was low to the player even though the selected specified number of times was actually large.

  Feature C10. Any of the features C6 to C9, wherein a range restricted by the means for restricting the suggestion among the predetermined number of operations is set to be smaller than a range not restricted by the restriction means. The gaming machine according to one.

  When the restricting means shown in the feature C5 or the like is employed, if the object of restriction is excessive, there may be an event that the operation is given up in the middle even though there is actually room for return. That is, it is assumed that adopting the restricting means is a factor that gives the player the impression that there is no room for recovery. Therefore, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by making the restriction range smaller than the non-regulation range.

  The “restricted range” corresponds to a part of all operations corresponding to the specified number of times, a part of all periods assumed to be required to complete all the operations corresponding to the specified number of times, etc. To do.

Feature C11. The number of times data (number of times determination table) for setting the specified number of times is set so that the first number of times data corresponding to the first specified number of times and the number of times at least two times greater than the first specified number of times. Second number of times data corresponding to the second specified number of times is provided,
The means for restricting the suggestion includes, when the second number data is set as the specified number of times by the setting means, an operation that exceeds or exceeds the first specified number of times for the restriction. The gaming machine according to any one of features C6 to C10, characterized in that it comprises means as part of the subsequent operations.

  According to the feature C11, even if the number of operations by the player reaches the specified number, it is possible to leave a possibility of further operations being accepted. Thereby, even if it is a case where the 1st specified number of times smaller than the 2nd specified number of times is selected, it can suppress that a player's attention level with respect to operation falls.

Feature C12. Changing means for changing a period required for operation of the operating means;
When the specified number of times is set by the setting means, an operation period that extends the period required for the operation compared to the previous operation by controlling the changing means based on the operation of the operation means by the player The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, further comprising an extension unit (MPU 412 of the display control device 410).

  In the configuration in which the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state is suggested by the number of operations as shown in the feature C1, it is important that the number of operations for grasping the number of operations can be performed. Therefore, if the operation means is operated to extend the period required for the next operation (decrease operation responsiveness), each operation is differentiated and the number of operations is grasped. Can be prompted to the player. Here, when it is set as the structure which extends the operation period regarding all the operations, there is a concern that the responsiveness of the operations is lowered and smooth game progress is hindered. In this regard, the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience can be suppressed by setting the next operation as an object of period extension based on the player's operation.

  Note that, in the combination with the configuration having the restricting means such as the feature C6, a series of effects may end without the player being aware of the restriction by letting the player rely on momentum and repeatedly hitting the operation means. In this regard, according to the combination with the present feature, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed, and the effect of improving the degree of attention by the regulation function can be suitably exhibited.

  Feature C13. The operation period extending means includes an operation availability determination means for determining whether or not the next operation is possible when the player operates the operation means. The gaming machine according to Feature C12, wherein an operation stroke of the operation means is increased when it is determined that the operation is possible.

  According to the feature C13, if it is set as the structure which increases an operation stroke, the technical idea shown to the feature C12 can be embodied suitably. Here, when the operation stroke is increased, it can be suggested that the next operation is possible by increasing the operation stroke, which contributes to the improvement of the attention degree of the player with respect to the operation means and the operation. it can.

  Feature C14. The feature C13 is characterized in that an increase rate of the operation stroke of the operation unit that is increased by the operation period extension unit based on each operation is set to increase as the number of operations increases. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C14, a careful operation can be promoted by increasing the number of operations while allowing a quick operation while the number of operations is small. Thereby, the attention degree with respect to each operation can be suitably increased in the final stage of the operation.

Feature D1. Operating means (operating units 601, 701, etc.) operated by the player;
Signal output means (detection sensors 655, 708, etc.) for outputting an operation signal when the operation means is operated;
Effect execution means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for executing a predetermined effect based on an operation signal from the signal output means;
And a deforming means (such as a display control device 410) for deforming the operating means so that it is recognized that the appearance of the operating means is changed according to the game situation when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature D1, it is possible to cause not only a visual change but also a tactile change by deforming the operation means. By deforming the operation means in accordance with the game situation, it is possible to give a performance function with movement to the operation means, and an improvement in the degree of attention to the operation means can be expected.

Feature D2. Provided on the front portion of the gaming machine (front door frame 14), provided with an installation portion (upper bulging portion 28) where the operation means is installed,
The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the deforming means deforms a portion of the operating means exposed from the installation portion.

  If it is set as the structure which deform | transforms the part exposed from the installation part, it can avoid that confirmation of the presence or absence of a deformation | transformation is prevented by the installation part, and the effect shown to the characteristic D1 can be exhibited more suitably. .

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to Feature D1 or Feature D2, wherein the deforming unit is a unit that deforms a portion of the operating unit that is directly touched and operated by a player.

  According to the feature D3, it is possible to easily convey the above-described tactile change to the player by deforming the part that the player directly touches and operates.

  In addition, about the operation means shown to the characteristic D1-characteristic D3, it is preferable to set it as the structure by which operation is permitted both before a deformation | transformation and after a deformation | transformation.

Feature D4. The operation means includes
A first operation part (inner operation member 610);
A second operation unit (outside operation member) provided so as to be switchable between a restricted state in which the operation of the first operation unit is restricted by covering the first operation unit, and an allowable state in which the operation of the first operation unit is permitted. 620)
When the second operation unit is in the restricted state, the operation of the second operation unit is allowed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the deforming unit switches the second operation unit from the restricted state to the allowed state.

  According to the feature D4, in the restricted state in which the first operation unit is covered with the second operation unit, the second operation unit can be operated, and the first operation unit is switched to the permitted state so that the first operation unit is switched to the first state. The operation unit can be operated. By changing the operation target in this way, it is possible to reduce the chance that the deformation of the operation means is missed.

  Note that, in the configuration in which a plurality of different operation units are switched as operation targets as shown in this feature, for example, the materials and shapes of the operation units may be different. Thereby, a tactile change can be made clearer.

  Feature D5. The gaming machine according to Feature D4, wherein the number of the first operation units is different from the number of the second operation units.

  According to the feature D5, since the number of operation targets is different, the aspect of the effect using the operation means is different between the case where the first operation unit is the operation target and the case where the second operation unit is the operation target. It is possible to make it different. Thereby, the uniqueness of each operation part can be improved.

  Note that the “number of operation units” indicates, for example, the number of parts that can be directly touched and operated by the player and can be displaced independently of other parts based on the operation (independently). .

  Feature D6. The game according to Feature D4 or Feature D5, wherein the deforming means switches the second operation unit from the restricted state to the allowed state based on the operation of the second operation unit. Machine.

  According to the feature D6, the second operation unit is switched to the allowable state based on the player's operation. As described above, when the player is instructed to change the state by operating the first operation unit by the player, the operation unit outputs a signal that triggers execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a display effect on a display screen or the like) to the second operation unit. In addition to the above function, a function for determining whether or not the first operation unit can be accessed can be given, and the player's attention is drawn to the second operation unit even after the operation of the second operation unit. Can do. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of a player's attention degree with respect to an operation means.

Feature D7. The signal output means outputs the operation signal when the second operation unit is operated,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6, wherein the signal output means outputs the operation signal even when the first operation unit is operated.

  If the signal output means is used in combination in the first operation section and the second operation section as shown in the feature D7, the mechanical / electrical configuration related to the operation means and the deformation means can be simplified, It is possible to suppress complication of the configuration caused by switching while making it seem as if the game mode is diversified.

Feature D8. The operation direction of the first operation unit and the operation direction of the second operation unit are the same,
The game machine according to claim D7, wherein the signal output means outputs the operation signal based on a displacement of at least one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit in the operation direction.

  As shown in the feature D8, if the operation direction of each operation unit is the same and the operation signal is output based on the displacement of one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit, the signal output means shown in the feature D7 Can be suitably realized.

Feature D9. A means for prompting the player to operate the operation means when at least the allowable state is reached;
The gaming machine according to Feature D4, wherein the first operation unit and the second operation unit have different surface shapes and / or surface materials.

  In the configuration in which the operating means is deformed, it is difficult to suitably exhibit the attention degree improving effect shown in the feature D1 or the like because the deformation of the operating means is not transmitted to the player. Here, in this feature, even if the player cannot visually grasp the deformation of the operation means, the operation means is not touched due to the difference in touch by touching the operation unit based on the operation suggestion. You can see that it has changed. In this manner, by causing at least a tactile change, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the operation means from being overlooked.

  Feature D10. The first operation unit is formed so as to be softer than the second operation unit, and is in contact with the second operation unit. Gaming machine.

  When the first operation unit as the operation target is movable, it is assumed that it is difficult to ensure the mounting strength of the first operation unit. Here, according to this feature, the stress generated when the second operation unit is operated can be distributed to the second operation unit. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of durability of an operation means.

  Moreover, since the 1st operation part is comprised so that it may become softer than a 2nd operation part, when the 1st operation part is operated, it can suppress that the said 1st operation part shakes. That is, the vibration control function for the second operation unit can be given to the first operation unit. Thereby, the fall of the operativity of a 2nd operation part can be suppressed.

Feature D11. The operation means is configured to be displaced from an initial position to an operation completion position by a player's pressing operation,
The deformation means starts the deformation of the operation means while the operation means is displaced from the initial position and returns to the initial position again. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D11, it is possible to easily convey the deformation of the operation means to the player tactilely. In this way, it is possible to easily convey the difference to the player even if the change is small as compared with the case where the deformation is performed in a state where the touch is not performed by prompting the deformation in the state where the touch is performed.

Feature D12. The operation means is configured to be displaced from an initial position to an operation completion position by a player's pressing operation,
Holding means for holding the operating means movably between the initial position and the operation completion position;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11, wherein the holding unit allows displacement to the operation completion position even during deformation by the deformation unit.

  In the configuration in which the operation means is deformed as shown in the feature D1 or the like, it is not preferable that the operability is deteriorated by the deformation function of the operation means. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the operation itself is allowed even during the deformation, it is possible to suppress a decrease in operability and to secure the operation function inherent to the operation means.

Feature D13. The operating means has a first operating member (button member 720) and a second operating member (movable member 750),
The first operation surface (upper surface portion 722) pressed by the player in the first operation member and the second operation surface (end surface of the tip portion 753) pressed by the player in the second operation member are adjacent to each other. The operation surface portion (operation surface portion 705) is formed by the first operation surface and the second operation surface,
The deformation means includes
A relative position changing means (solenoid 770) for changing a relative position between the first operation surface and the second operation surface;
Drive control for controlling the relative position changing means to deform the operating means by changing the relative position between the first operating surface and the second operating surface when at least the operating means is operated. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3, characterized in that the gaming machine has means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410).

  According to the feature D13, the operation surface portion is configured by the first operation surface of the first operation member and the second operation surface of the second operation member, and the operation surface portion is deformed by a change in the relative position of both operation surfaces. To do. In this way, by deforming the part that the player directly touches during the pressing operation, the chance that the player overlooks the deformation can be reduced.

  Feature D14. The drive control unit controls the relative position changing unit to drive the operation unit from the state in which the first operation surface and the second operation surface form a series of flat surfaces or curved surfaces. The gaming machine according to Feature D13, wherein one of the surface and the second operation surface protrudes from the other and switches to a state where a step is generated in the operation surface portion.

  As shown in feature D14, the operation surface portion is configured to be switched from a flat or curved surface state to a state where a step (for example, unevenness) is generated on the operation surface portion, thereby ensuring a function that causes a tactile difference. However, an increase in the relative displacement amount can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the state which the operation surface part has comprised a series of planar shape or curved surface shape, it can suppress that a local load arises on a hand when pressing an operation surface part. By setting the above two states, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the player's hand caused by each operation.

  Feature D15. The arrangement pattern of the first operation surface and the second operation surface in the operation surface portion is such that the player presses the operation surface portion with a finger while the operation surface portion is a series of flat or curved surfaces. In such a case, the gaming machine is set so that the finger is applied to both the first operation surface and the second operation surface.

  According to the feature D15, when the player presses the operation surface portion with a finger or a palm, the finger or the like touches both the first operation surface and the second operation surface. Thereby, when the deformation shown in the feature 14 occurs, the player can easily grasp the change tactilely. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconvenience that the player overlooks the deformation.

  In the operation surface portion composed of the first operation surface and the second operation surface, by adopting a configuration in which the first operation surface and the second operation surface are alternately exposed in a predetermined direction along the operation surface portion, The arrangement pattern shown in this feature can be realized in a suitable manner. Incidentally, instead of this feature, “the operation surface portion including the first operation surface and the second operation surface is alternately arranged between the first operation surface and the second operation surface in a predetermined direction along the operation surface portion. It is also possible to employ the “gaming machine according to feature D14” characterized in that the respective operation surfaces are arranged so as to be exposed to each other.

Feature D16. The first operation surface and the second operation surface are juxtaposed in a direction intersecting the direction of the pressing operation,
The gaming machine according to Feature D15, wherein a relative displacement direction between the first operation surface and the second operation surface is parallel to the direction of the pressing operation.

  According to the feature D16, it is possible to contribute to simplification of the configuration related to the movement of the operation means.

Feature D17. The first operation surface is formed so that an occupation ratio in the operation surface portion is larger than that of the second operation surface,
When a player performs a pressing operation, the first operating member includes a holding unit (holder unit 702) that holds the first operating member in a displaceable state in the pressing direction.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D14 to D16, wherein the second operation member is attached to the first operation member so as to be relatively displaceable.

  Since the operation means is an object to be operated by the player, it is necessary to ensure a certain level of strength. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the strength of the operation means can be suitably ensured by adopting a configuration in which one of the small occupation ratios is movably attached to one of the large occupation ratios in the operation surface portion.

Feature D18. The second operating member is disposed in a region surrounded or sandwiched by the first operating member,
The relative position changing means is configured so that a portion of the second operating member that constitutes the operating surface portion retreats from a portion of the first operating member that constitutes the operating surface portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D14 to D17, wherein the operation surface portion is deformed by moving the.

  According to the characteristic 18, it can suppress that operativity falls at the time of a deformation | transformation by setting it as the structure which retracts the 2nd operation member with a small occupation rate.

  Further, since the second operation member does not protrude toward the player (hand) side, the second operation member does not hit the player vigorously when displaced. For this reason, it becomes possible to increase the displacement speed and contribute to shortening the period required for deformation.

Feature D19. Biasing means (spring member 761) for biasing the second operation member together with the first operation member toward the side forming the operation surface portion,
The gaming machine according to Feature D18, wherein the second operating member is returned to the position before the deformation by the urging force of the urging means and maintained at the same position.

  According to the configuration shown in the feature D19, the urging force by the urging means is used when the second operating member returns to the position before the deformation. For this reason, for example, when the second operation member attempts to return in a state where the player's hand is in contact with the operation surface portion, even if the hand and the second operation member interfere with each other, the pressing operation is thereby performed. Inconveniences such as obstruction can be made difficult to occur.

  Moreover, even if it is a case where the 2nd operation member is pushed by the state before a deformation | transformation by making the 2nd operation member displaceable in a retreating direction (pressing direction), the 2nd operation member for displacing the 2nd operation member It can suppress that the load which arises in a structure becomes large. Thereby, a 2nd operation member and the structure accompanying it can be protected.

Feature D20. The operation means is configured to be displaced from an initial position to an operation completion position by a player's pressing operation,
The deforming means starts to retract the second operating member at a timing when the operating means reaches the operation completion position or while the operating means returns from the operation completion position to the initial position. The gaming machine according to Feature D18 or Feature D19.

  According to the feature D20, it is possible to easily convey the deformation of the operation means to the player tactilely. In this way, it is possible to easily convey the difference to the player even if the change is small as compared with the case where the deformation is performed in a state where the touch is not performed by prompting the deformation in the state where the touch is performed.

Feature E1. Operating means (operating units 601, 701, etc.) operated by the player, and return means (button spring member 325, etc.) for returning the operating means to the standby position when the operating means is displaced from the standby position. An operation switch unit (operation switch unit 40, etc.),
Receiving means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for receiving the operation when the operating means reaches the operation receiving position from the standby position by the operation;
State changing means (solenoid 340 or the like) for changing the state of the operating means;
Change control means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for starting the change of the state by controlling the state change means until the operation means returns to the standby position when the reception means is performed. ) And a gaming machine.

  In general, a gaming machine is provided with a display screen or the like for performing a game effect, and the operation corresponding effect is executed when the operation means is operated. For this reason, the player's attention tends to be mainly directed to the display screen and the like, and the operation means tends to be disregarded merely as an opportunity. In this feature, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the operation means, and hence the degree of attention to the game, by adopting the state changing means for changing the state of the operation means.

  However, in a gaming machine having such a state change means, even if a state change is made, if it is overlooked, the state change function (specifically, the effect of notification / production, etc. by the state change) is demonstrated well. It is assumed that it will not be done. This can be a factor that hinders the improvement in the degree of attention in adopting the state changing means to improve the degree of attention in the operation means.

  In this regard, if the operation means is operated, the state change is started before the operation means returns to the standby position, so that the state is maintained while the player's hand touches the operation means. The possibility that a change will occur can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player has missed the state change, and to suitably exhibit the state change function. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the operation means of the player, and consequently the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. When the operation means is operated, it is provided with prompting means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for prompting the player to continue the operation for a predetermined period,
The game according to Feature E1, wherein the change control means causes the change to be started when the acceptance means performs an acceptance under a situation where continuation of operation is promoted by the prompting means. Machine.

  According to the feature E2, the player is requested to continue the operation for a predetermined period by the prompting means, and when the operation is accepted under the situation where the prompt is being performed, the player can perform the operation by starting the state change. Opportunities for changing the state of the operating means in a situation where the means is being touched can be suitably increased. As a result, the inconvenience that the fact that the change has been made is overlooked can be made difficult to occur.

Feature E3. When the operation means is operated, it is provided with prompting means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for prompting the player to continue the operation for a predetermined period,
Continuation determination means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for determining whether or not the operation is continued in the middle of the predetermined period,
The game machine according to feature E1, wherein the change control means starts the change when the continuation determination means determines that the operation is continued.

  According to the feature E3, since the state of the operation unit is changed on condition that the operation is continued by the player, the opportunity to change the state of the operation unit in a situation where the player is touching the operation unit. Can be suitably increased. As a result, the inconvenience that the fact that the change has been made is overlooked can be made difficult to occur.

Feature E4. The operation means is a push button that is pressed by a player,
The accepting means accepts the pressing operation when the operating means is pressed and displaced to the operation receiving position.
The gaming machine according to Feature E3, wherein the prompting means prompts the user to keep the operating means pressed for the predetermined period.

  According to the feature E4, when the player's hand is touching the operation means, the state of the operation means is changed. Thereby, the fact that the change has been made can be easily communicated to the player.

Feature E5. The operation means is a push button provided so as to be displaceable in a predetermined operation direction when a player performs a pressing operation.
The operation reception position is set to be an intermediate position between the standby position and the maximum displacement position of the operation means,
The game according to Feature E1 or Feature E2, wherein the change control means starts the change at a timing when the operation means reaches the maximum displacement position or a timing before the operation means reaches the maximum displacement position. Machine.

  In a configuration in which the operating means (push button) is displaced by operation, the operating means is often pushed to the maximum displacement position (maximum pressing position). Therefore, it is assumed that the player's hand is more likely to be touched by adopting a configuration that accepts an operation halfway between the maximum displacement position and the standby position, that is, before reaching the maximum displacement position. A state change can be performed below. By starting the state change under such a situation, it is possible to easily convey to the player the fact that the change has been made.

Feature E6. The operation means can be switched between a first state and a second state which is a tactile sense between the first state and the first state.
Any one of the features E1 to E5, wherein the state changing unit is configured to switch the operation unit from the first state to the second state when receiving is performed by the receiving unit. The gaming machine described in one.

  In a configuration in which a state change that appeals to the player's tactile sensation occurs on the operating means as indicated by feature E6, a tactile change based on the operation occurs by operating the operating means. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the performance, and effects such as production and notification expected for the operation means are expected.

  However, when the player does not touch the operation means, it is difficult to exert effects such as production and notification by the state change function. Here, if the technical idea shown in the feature E1 or the like is applied to this feature, it is difficult to cause inconvenience that a function that causes a change in tactile sensation cannot be performed well, for example, a state change is overlooked. Can do. Functions such as the above-mentioned production / notification can be suitably exhibited.

  Feature E7. The game machine according to Feature E6, wherein the state change means causes a change in the tactile sensation by operating part or all of the outline of the operation means.

  When the tactile change shown in the feature E6 is caused, it is assumed that it is difficult to transmit the tactile change if the responsiveness is low. Such inconvenience becomes remarkable when, for example, the temperature of the operation means is changed. Therefore, preferably, the responsiveness can be easily ensured by adopting a configuration in which a part or all of the outline of the operation means is operated as shown in this feature.

Feature E8. Operating means (operating units 601, 701, etc.) operated by the player;
An accepting means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for accepting the operation when the operating means is operated;
When the operation means is operated, it is provided with prompting means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for prompting the player to continue the operation for a predetermined period,
State changing means (solenoid 340) for changing the state of the operating means;
A change control means (display control device 410) that controls the state change means to start the change of the state when the reception means performs the reception under the situation where the prompt is performed by the prompting means. And an MPU 412).

  In a gaming machine having a state changing means for changing the state of the operating means, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to not only the display effect executed on the display screen or the like but also the operating means itself. In a gaming machine having such a state change means, even if the state change is made, if it is missed, the state change function (specifically, the effect of notification / production etc. by the state change) cannot be performed well. It is assumed. This can be a factor that hinders the improvement in the degree of attention in adopting the state changing means to improve the degree of attention in the operation means.

  In this regard, according to this feature, when the operation is accepted under the situation where the prompting means continues to perform the operation, the state changing means is controlled to start the state change. The possibility that a state change occurs during the period when the player's hand is touching the operation means can be increased. This makes it difficult for the player to miss the state change, and allows the state change function to be suitably exhibited. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement in the degree of attention to the player's operation means.

Feature E9. The operation means is a push button provided so as to be displaceable in a predetermined operation direction when a player performs a pressing operation.
The prompting means prompts to keep the operating means pressed for the predetermined period,
Continuation determination means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for determining whether or not the operation means is kept pressed in the middle of the predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to Feature E8, wherein the change control means starts the change on condition that the continuation determination means determines that the operation means is kept pressed.

  According to the feature E9, when the player's hand is touching the operation means (push button), the state change of the operation means is executed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the state change is overlooked.

  In addition, the technical idea shown in the feature E6 and the feature E7 may be applied to this feature.

Feature E10. The continuation determination means periodically determines whether or not the operation means is kept pressed during the predetermined period.
A display device (design display device 94) having a display screen (display screen 94a);
In a situation where continuation of the operation is promoted by the prompting means, the operation means is kept pressed by at least the continuation determination means after the operation of the operation means is accepted by the accepting means. Display change execution means (MPU 412 of display control device 410) for executing a predetermined display effect on the display screen until it is determined that the operation means is not pressed. The gaming machine according to feature E9, wherein the change is started on the condition that it is determined by the continuation determination means that it is maintained.

  According to the feature E10, a predetermined display effect is performed while the operation unit is kept pressed. As described above, when the player responds to the prompting for the continuation of the operation by the prompting means, a predetermined display effect is executed to ensure a period during which the player keeps touching the operating means. It becomes easy. Thus, by changing the state of the operation means during the period in which the operation means is still touched, the fact that the state change has been made can be easily communicated to the player.

  Feature E11. The state change means maintains the operation means in a changed state until it is determined by the continuation determination means that at least the operation means is not maintained in a pressed state. The gaming machine according to Feature E10.

  According to the feature E11, at least the operation means (push button) is kept pressed, so that the operation means is maintained in a changed state. Thereby, the fact that the state change has been made can be easily communicated to the player.

  In addition, about the technical idea shown to the feature E10 and the feature E11, it is also possible to apply to the said feature E2-feature E4.

Feature E12. A display device (design display device 94) having a display screen (display screen 94a);
A display effect executing means for executing a display effect on the display screen when an operation is received by the receiving means;
The predetermined period is a first predetermined period;
In the case of executing the display effect by the display effect executing unit, the display device includes a selection unit capable of selecting any one of the first predetermined period and a second predetermined period set shorter than the first predetermined period.
When the second predetermined period is selected by the selection means, while the display effect by the display effect execution means is executed, the state change by the change means is not performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E8 to E11, wherein the change control means performs the control on condition that the first predetermined period is selected by the selection means.

  According to the feature E12, when the first predetermined period that is set to be relatively long is selected from the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period, the state change of the operation unit or the like is executed. Thereby, the technical idea of changing the state during the period in which the player is touching the operation means can be suitably realized.

Feature F1. Operating means (button member 810) formed with a pressing operation portion (operation surface portion 811) that is an object of a pressing operation by a player and has an operation surface (the upper surface of the operation surface portion 811);
A display unit (light emitting unit 850) disposed on the back side in the pressing operation direction of the pressing operation unit relative to the pressing operation unit;
A light diffusing part (light diffusing part 816) that is provided in at least one of the pressing operation part and the display part and diffuses light;
The pressing operation unit and the light diffusing unit have light permeability, and are formed so that the display content of the display unit can be visually recognized through the pressing operation unit and the light diffusing unit.
An adjustment unit (a display control device 410 or the like) that has a drive unit (solenoid 880) that displaces the display unit to a side closer to and away from the pressing operation unit, and adjusts a distance between the display unit and the pressing operation unit. ).

  According to the feature F1, by adjusting (for example, changing) the distance between the display unit and the pressing operation unit, the appearance of the display content through the pressing operation unit and the light diffusion unit is changed. Specifically, when the distance between the display unit and the pressing operation unit is short, the display content is clearly visible, and when the distance between the display unit and the pressing operation unit is long, the display content is blurred. Thus, by changing the appearance of the display content, functions such as display effects and notifications can be given to the operation means. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree to an operation means.

  Moreover, the following effects can be expected when the display unit is driven. For example, assuming that the operating means (pressing operation unit) is a driving target, since the operating means is exposed to the player side, the movement of the operating means can be visually confirmed. For this reason, when changing the appearance of the display content, it is possible to detect the change in advance, and it is assumed that attention will be more easily given to the operation than the change in the appearance of the display content itself. . This can be an obstacle to exhibiting the presentation function using the display unit or the like. In this regard, if the display unit is a driving target as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suitably suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the operation unit is the driving target as described above. The effect of improving the attention level can be suitably exhibited.

  The “display unit” shown in this feature is “a presentation unit that presents predetermined notification information on the pressing operation unit side”, “a presentation unit that presents visual information to be visually recognized through the pressing operation unit on the pressing operation unit side”, "Information part for causing display information to appear" is included.

Feature F2. The display unit includes a light emitting unit (light emitting body 861) that emits light to the pressing operation unit,
The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the light diffusing unit is provided in the pressing operation unit and diffuses light from the light emitting unit.

  When the light from the light emitting unit is diffused when passing through the pressing operation unit, it can appear as if the pressing operation unit is emitting light. In the following description, an area that appears as if light is emitted by the light from the light emitting unit in the pressing operation unit is referred to as a pseudo light emitting region.

  Since the light from the light emitting part spreads until it reaches the pressing operation part, by changing the distance between the light emitting part and the pressing operation part by the adjusting means, the degree of light diffusion from the light emitting part is changed and the pressing operation is performed. It is possible to enlarge / reduce the pseudo light emitting area in the part. Specifically, the pseudo-light emitting area is reduced by suppressing the diffusion of light from the light emitting part by bringing the light emitting part and the pressing operation part closer, and the light from the light emitting part is diffused by moving the light emitting part and the pressing operation part away from each other. Thus, the pseudo light emitting area can be enlarged. Thereby, it can contribute to diversification of the light emission effect, etc., and the degree of attention to the light emission effect can be suitably increased.

  In addition, if a light emitting unit is provided at a position close to the pressing operation unit and a position far from the pressing operation unit, and the light emitting unit is selectively used according to the situation, the light emitting unit on the far side is When light is emitted, light from the light emitting part on the far side is easily shielded from the light emitting part on the near side. This can be a factor that makes it difficult to exhibit the effect of irradiating light over a wide range with the light emitting unit on the far side. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences and to suitably realize a wide emission range.

  Feature F3. The display portion has a wall portion (for example, a standing wall portion 873) that extends toward the pressing operation portion and surrounds the light emitting portion, and light from the light emitting portion is partitioned by the wall portion. A light restricting portion (substrate holder 870) that restricts the irradiation range in which the light is applied to the pressing operation portion to a predetermined range is provided by passing through the passage. The gaming machine according to feature F2.

  According to the feature F3, the outer edge of the simulated light emission range can be clarified by bringing the display unit closer to the pressing operation unit, and the outer edge of the simulated light emission range can be obscured by moving the display unit away from the pressing operation unit. In this way, by providing a clear difference in the light emission mode in each perspective state, the impact when the display content changes can be strengthened, and the degree of attention to the light emission effect using the operating means etc. is suitable Can be improved.

  Also, if the light restricting portion is arranged on the pressing operation portion side, the light emission range can be changed by changing the distance between the light emitting portion and the pressing operation portion, but the light from the light emitting portion is finally light. The light emission range of the light transmission part is regulated by reaching the light transmission part through the regulation part. That is, the light emission range is always regulated by the light regulating unit. This is not preferable because functions such as a light emission effect may be limited. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the light restricting portion is provided on the light emitting portion side, such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. That is, when the light restricting portion is separated from the pressing operation portion, the light passing through the light restricting portion is allowed to spread beyond the light restricting portion. Thereby, the widening function of a light emission range can be exhibited suitably.

  In addition, when the edge part by the side of the press operation part in a light control part (wall part) contact | abuts or adjoins to the press operation part, clarification of the outer edge of a light emission range can be promoted.

  Feature F4. The adjusting means adjusts a distance between the pressing operation unit and the display unit based on a pressing operation of the operating unit by a player so that a light irradiation range to the pressing operation unit is changed before and after the operation. The gaming machine according to Feature F3, wherein:

  As shown in the feature F4, if the display mode is changed based on the player's operation, the following effects can be expected. Specifically, when the pressing operation unit is pressed by hand, at least the pressing operation unit is covered with the hand, so that the visual recognition of the display content is hindered by the player's own hand. Therefore, when the operation is performed, the display unit is displaced to change the light irradiation range, thereby making it easier to impress the player on the change in the light emission mode when the hand is released from the pressing operation unit. .

  Feature F5. In the middle of changing the distance between the display unit and the pressing operation unit by the adjusting unit, a changing unit (display control device 410) capable of limiting light emission by the light emitting unit is provided. F2 Thru | or the game machine as described in any one of the characteristics F4.

  In the configuration having the adjusting means, the display content, that is, the light emission mode (for example, the light emission region) in the pressing operation unit can be gradually changed by gradually changing the above-described distance. In this regard, for example, a configuration having a plurality of light emitting units, and by increasing or decreasing the number of light emitting units that are lit, a light emitting mode that is clearly different from the case of changing the light emitting mode can be realized. However, there is a concern that such changes alone make it easier for the player to miss the change in the light emission mode.

  Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the light emission is limited (turned off) when the distance is changed by the adjusting means, it is possible to suppress the player from overlooking the change in the light emission mode when the distance change is completed. Thereby, the light emission effect can be further improved.

Feature F6. A determination means (display control device 410) for determining whether or not the pressing operation unit is being pressed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F5, wherein the adjustment unit starts displacement of the display unit when the determination unit determines that the pressure is being pressed.

  According to the feature F6, the display mode is changed by starting the displacement of the display unit while the player's hand is touching the pressing operation unit (for example, the visual recognition of the pressing operation unit is hindered by hand). During the operation period required to cause the game, the player can block the operation so as to be difficult to see. With such a configuration, it is possible to compensate for a decrease in responsiveness due to the adoption of a configuration for displacing the display unit.

  In the case of a touch-type operation unit, it corresponds to the time during which the hand is touching, while in the case of a press-type operation unit, the initial position is pushed to the operation detection position. The period during the period corresponds to “being operated”.

  Feature F7. The gaming machine according to F6, further comprising: an operation limiting unit (display control device 410) capable of limiting light emission by the light emitting unit when the determination unit determines that the button is being pressed. .

  In the configuration having the adjusting means, the display content, that is, the light emission mode (for example, the light emission region) in the pressing operation unit can be gradually changed by gradually changing the above-described distance. In this regard, for example, a configuration having a plurality of light emitting units, and by increasing or decreasing the number of light emitting units that are lit, a light emitting mode that is clearly different from the case of changing the light emitting mode can be realized. However, such a change alone may reduce the impact when the display mode changes.

  Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the light emission is limited (turned off) when the distance is changed by the adjusting means, the difference in the display mode before and after the change can be highlighted, and the impact of the change in the display mode can be increased. It becomes possible to suppress a fall suitably.

Feature F8. Prompting means (display control device 410) for prompting the player to continue the operation over a predetermined period when the operation means is operated;
Operation detection means (display control device 410) for detecting that the operation means has been operated,
The gaming machine according to Feature F6 or Feature F7, wherein the adjustment means displaces the display unit under a situation where the continuation of operation is promoted by the prompting means.

  According to the feature F8, the prompting means urges the continuation of the operation for a predetermined period, and the display unit is displaced under the situation where the prompting is performed, so that the player can control the operating means (press operation part). This makes it easier to displace the display unit when touching. Thereby, it becomes easy to exhibit the effects shown in the feature F6 and the feature F7.

Feature F9. The operating means is configured to displace in the pressing operation direction when the pressing operation unit is pressed.
The displacement direction of the operation means is the same direction as the displacement direction of the display unit,
Urging means (coil spring 848) for urging the display unit toward the pressing operation unit side;
The adjusting unit displaces the display unit in a state where the operation unit has reached a predetermined operation position, thereby arranging the display unit at a position in contact with or close to the pressing operation unit. Is what
Any one of the features F1 to F8, wherein when the operation unit returns from the operation position to the initial position, the display unit is displaced together with the operation unit to the side opposite to the pressing operation direction. The gaming machine described in one.

  According to the feature F9, since the display unit and the operation unit (press operation unit) are displaced together, the distance relationship between them can be kept constant. As a result, the display unit and the pressing operation unit remain in contact with or close to each other, and the display mode is changed and the operation unit is being returned and returned before the display unit is returned to the initial position. The display mode can be maintained afterwards.

  Further, the display unit is brought into contact with or close to the pressing operation unit by displacing the display unit to the side approaching the pressing operation unit in a state where the pressing operation unit has reached a position close to the display unit by a player's operation. The period required to reach the position can be shortened, and the period required for switching the light emission mode described above can be shortened.

Feature F10. The drive unit has means for moving the display unit to a side opposite to the pressing operation direction when the pressing of the operation unit is released,
The gaming machine according to Feature F9, wherein the operating means is displaced to the side opposite to the pressing operation direction when pressed by the display unit.

  According to the feature F10, when the operating unit returns, the operating unit is displaced in the pressing operation direction by being pressed by the display unit. Thereby, an operation means and a display part can be displaced together.

  In addition, for example, an urging unit that urges the display unit to the side opposite to the pressing operation direction is provided, and when the pressing unit is pressed, the operating unit abuts on the display unit from the near side in the pressing operation direction. Therefore, the displacement of the display unit in the direction opposite to the operation direction is restricted, and the pressing operation is released, and the urging force of the urging unit pushes the display unit and the operation unit to the opposite side of the pressing operation direction. It is good to have a configuration.

Feature F11. The operating range of the operation means is set so that a gap is always secured between the pressing operation unit and the display unit in a state where the display unit is disposed at an initial position.
The operating range of the display unit is set to be able to contact or approach the pressing operation unit regardless of the position of the operation unit. Or the game machine as described in the characteristic F10.

  According to the feature F11, it is possible to reduce the chance that the pressing operation unit and the display unit collide with each other by the pressing operation, and to protect both the operation unit and the display unit.

  On the other hand, when it is desired to change the display mode, the display unit and the pressing operation unit can be brought into contact with or close to each other regardless of the position of the operation means, and thus various effects shown in the feature F1 and the like are preferably exhibited. be able to.

Feature F12. The drive unit includes a biasing unit that biases the display unit to a side opposite to the pressing operation direction.
When the operation unit is pressed, the display unit is pressed by the pressing operation unit, so that the operation unit and the display unit are displaced in the pressing operation direction against the urging force of the urging unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features F9 to F11.

  According to the feature F12, the positional relationship between the display unit and the operation unit can be kept constant even while the pressing operation is being performed. Thereby, the change of the operation mode during operation can be avoided.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent the operation unit from hitting the display unit and performing a pressing operation well, and it is possible to reduce the inconvenience that the operation timing of the operation unit is limited due to the adoption of the display unit.

  Feature F13. The adjusting means changes the display mode before and after the pressing operation of the operating means, and when the operating means reaches a specific position between the initial position and the maximum pressing position by the player's pressing operation. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, wherein displacement of the display unit is started.

  According to the feature F13, the display unit can start displacement under a situation where the pressing operation unit is covered by a player's hand or the like. Thereby, compared with the structure which a display part starts a displacement after completion of pressing operation, for example, it can suppress that the period required for the change of a display mode is extended.

Feature G1. Operation means (operation unit 901) pressed by the player;
First determining means (display control device 410) for determining whether or not the operating means has reached the first position from the initial position in accordance with the pressing operation;
In a gaming machine provided with effect execution means (display control device 410) for executing a predetermined effect when the operation means is determined to have reached the first position by the first determination means,
Second determination means (display control device 410) for determining whether or not the operating means has reached a second position between the first position and the initial position in the course of displacement in the pressing direction;
Driving means (solenoid 980) for displacing the operating means in the same direction as the pressing direction by the pressing operation;
Drive control means (display control device) for controlling the drive means to displace the operation means in the pressing direction when the second determination means determines that the operation means has reached the second position. 410).

  According to the feature G1, when the operating means reaches the second position, the operating means is forcibly displaced in the pressing direction (hereinafter referred to as forced displacement for convenience). By enabling the operation means to be forcibly displaced in this manner, it is possible to cause a tactile change during a pressing operation as compared with a case where the operation is not performed. Moreover, by actually performing the pressing operation, it is possible to grasp a tactile change for the first time, and to prompt the player to perform the pressing operation. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which active displacement occurs in addition to passive displacement associated with the pressing operation, an unprecedented operational feeling is realized, and the attention to the operating means and thus the operation (game) is improved. Can contribute.

  The displacement direction (pressing operation direction) when the pressing operation is performed is the same as the direction of forced displacement. For this reason, it is possible to suitably avoid that the operability is forced to be displaced and the operability is lowered or it is difficult to reach the first position.

  Feature G2. The gaming machine according to claim G1, wherein the drive control means controls the drive means so as to displace the operation means to at least the first position.

  According to the feature G2, at the time of execution of forced displacement, at least after the operating means reaches the second position, it is automatically displaced to the first position. For this reason, even if the player releases his / her hand from the operation means in surprise of the forced displacement (spontaneous movement) of the operation means, there is no inconvenience that the predetermined effect is not performed. Therefore, even if a tactile presentation function is provided as a configuration for forcibly displacing the operation means, it is less likely to cause inconvenience that the original function of the operation means as a trigger for executing the predetermined effect cannot be performed well. Can do.

  Feature G3. The drive means is a solenoid that pushes or pulls the operation means in the pressing direction when a drive signal is input from the drive control means and enters an excited state. The feature G1 or G2 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature G3, if the operation means is displaced by the solenoid, even if the player performs a pressing operation at a speed higher than the operation speed (forced displacement speed), the drive means Forces that hinder movement and displacement of the operating means are unlikely to occur. Thereby, a drive means and an operation means can be protected.

  Feature G4. The second determination unit is a start determination unit that determines an operation start based on reaching the second position when the operation unit is displaced from the initial position. The gaming machine according to any one of G3.

  The pressing operation is often performed vigorously. For this reason, when the timing for generating the above-described forced displacement is delayed, it becomes difficult to transmit a tactile change to the player, and the configuration shown in the feature G1 or the like is not utilized well. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the trigger of forced displacement is the displacement from the initial position of the operation means, the forced displacement can be executed immediately in response to the start of the player's pressing operation. Thereby, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed.

  Feature G5. The drive control means displaces the operation means by restricting displacement of the operation means in a counter-pressing direction opposite to the pressing direction when the operating means is displaced by the driving means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the driving means is controlled to wait at a later position.

  According to the feature G5, when the operating means is forcibly displaced, the operating means temporarily stands by at the position after the displacement. For this reason, even if the hand is released from the operating means, the operating means does not return immediately, so that it is possible to avoid a frontal collision between the player's hand moving in the pressing direction and the operating means. Thereby, when forced displacement is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to prevent the inconvenience that the pressing operation of the operating means is hesitant.

  Feature G6. Stopper means (stopper piece 961) capable of preventing further displacement of the operating means by contacting the operating means from the back side in the pressing direction, and the stopper means in the pressing direction of the operating means. Switching means (driving unit 953) for switching between a blocking state for blocking the displacement and an allowable state for allowing the displacement in the pressing direction, and when the driving means is controlled and the operating means is displaced in the pressing direction. Any one of the characteristics G1 to G5 is provided with operation stroke changing means (pressing side stopper mechanism 960) for expanding the operation stroke by switching the stopper means from the blocking state to the permitting state. Game machines.

  When the operation means is forcibly displaced, if the operation stroke is small, there is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to grasp the tactile change. On the other hand, if the operation stroke is set large in advance in consideration of the forced displacement, there is a concern that the operability during the pressing operation without the forced displacement is lowered.

  Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the operation stroke is expanded in the pressing direction when the operation means is forcibly displaced, the above-described disadvantages can be suppressed and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature G7. It has an opening (central opening 911), and includes an installation part (holder part 902) installed so that the operating means protrudes from the opening,
The stopper means is set such that a part of the operation means remains protruding from the opening when the operation means reaches a position where it comes into contact with the stopper means.
The operation stroke changing means switches the stopper means to the permissible state so that a pressing limit position when the forced displacement occurs is set to a position where the operation means is buried in the opening. The gaming machine according to Feature G6, wherein the game machine is enlarged.

  According to the feature G7, when the player presses the operation means with his / her hand, the hand hits the installation portion and stops, while the operation means moves backward, so that the operation means is easily separated from the hand. As a result, the fact that the operation means is spontaneously displaced can be easily transmitted to the player. However, it is general that the player does not perform the pressing operation aiming at the detection position but performs the pressing operation so as to stop at the pressing limit position. Therefore, it may give an impression that the operation is difficult to perform if the position to be buried is set as the pressing limit position in each operation. If the configuration shown in this feature is adopted, the operation means is forcibly displaced to the pressing limit position where the entire operation means is buried, so that such inconvenience does not occur.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means (game ball launching handle 45) operated by the player, game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the fired A ball path (guide path 103 of the guide rail 100) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and game parts (eg, nails 87) arranged in the game area, each of these game parts Among these, a gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (general winning opening 81 or the like).

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 14 ... Front door frame which comprises the front part of a game machine, 28 ... Upper bulge part, 94 ... Symbol display apparatus, 162 ... Main control apparatus which comprises lottery means, 410 ... Display control Device, 411 ... display control board, 412 ... MPU, 800 ... operation switch unit, 810 ... button member as operation means, 811 ... operation surface part as pressing operation part, 815 ... mirror forming layer, 816 ... light diffusion part, 820 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS ... Holder part, 825 ... Position detection sensor, 826 ... Position detection sensor, 840 ... Base member, 848 ... Coil spring, 849 ... Coil spring, 850 ... Light-emitting unit constituting display part, 860 ... Light-emitting substrate, 861 ... Light-emitting part Light emitter, 870... Substrate holder, 871 .. opposing plate portion, 873 .. standing wall portion, 880 .. solenoid, 900 .. operation switch unit, 90 ... an operation part constituting an operation means, 902 ... a holder part, 911 ... a central opening as an opening part, 914 ... a first receiving part, 915 ... a second receiving part, 920 ... a button member, 941 ... a spring member, 950 ... projecting Side stopper mechanism, 951... Stopper piece, 952... Spring member, 953... Drive part, 960... Press side stopper mechanism constituting operation stroke changing means, 961 ... Stopper piece constituting stopper part, 962. Drive unit, 971... Position detection sensor, 972... Position detection sensor, 980.

Claims (2)

An operation unit having an operation unit that is displaced from a predetermined position in an operation direction by a player's operation, an urging unit that displaces the operation unit in a direction opposite to the operation direction, and a movable unit that is displaceable in the same direction as the operation unit. When,
A signal output means for outputting an operation signal when the operation unit is operated and displaced to a detection position;
Effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect based on an operation signal from the signal output means;
Displacement means for deforming the operation means so that it is recognized that the appearance of the operation means is changed according to the game situation as seen from the front side of the gaming machine by displacing the movable part,
The operation means includes the operation unit that is being deformed from the pre-deformation state to the deformation completion state and the return from the deformation completion state to the pre-deformation state when the movable unit is displaced in the operation direction. The detection position of the operation unit is either during the deformation from the pre-deformation state to the deformation completion state or the return from the deformation completion state to the pre-deformation state by the deformation means. A gaming machine characterized by being allowed to move to.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images